JP6727050B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachi-slot machine.

Conventionally, when a player inserts a game medium such as a medal or a coin (hereinafter, referred to as “insertion operation”) and operates a start lever (hereinafter, referred to as “start operation”), a plurality of symbols are respectively generated. The rotation of the reels arranged on the surface of the reels starts, and when the stop button is operated (hereinafter referred to as "stop operation"), the rotation of the reels stops, and the combination of the symbols displayed as a result. A gaming machine known as a so-called pachi-slot machine, in which a privilege is given in accordance with the above, is known.

In such a gaming machine, when the start operation is detected by the start switch, a random number value is extracted and a lottery is performed (hereinafter, the result of this lottery is referred to as an "internal winning combination"), and the stepping motor is drive-controlled. When the stop operation is detected by the stop switch, the stepping motor is driven and controlled, and the rotation of the plurality of reels is stopped based on the internal winning combination.

2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a specific state (eg, chance zone) with a high degree of expectation of shifting to an advantageous state (eg, ART) advantageous to a player (eg, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2014-57653, A

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in Patent Document 1, in the specific state, only whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is determined, so there is a problem that the game in the specific state becomes monotonous. there were.

An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous in a specific state where an advantageous state advantageous to a player can be given.

The present invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified.
A specific state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART),
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting process by the main CPU 93) that sets advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition. )When,
Advantageous state end control means for ending the advantageous state when a notification end condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied (for example, when the notification counter becomes “0”) (for example, , Processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
The specific state control means,
It is possible to control to the specific state at least during a predetermined number of games (for example, in the CZ execution state),
Point number determination means for determining the number of points to be provided for each game in the specific state (for example, a normal medium CZ medium process or an ART medium CZ medium process by the main CPU 93),
A point number storage means for accumulating and storing the number of points determined by the point number determination means (for example, a main RAM 95 for storing a value of a point counter),
Advantageous state management information provisional provision means for deciding whether or not to provision the advantageous state management information provisionally for each game in the specific state (for example, normal CZ mid-process or ART mid-CZ mid process by the main CPU 93),
Advantageous state management information provisional storage means for storing the advantageous state management information provisionally provided by the advantageous state management information provisional provision means (for example, main RAM 95 for storing ART management information provisional stock),
In the specific state, when the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "100"), the advantageous state management information stored in the advantageous state management information temporary storage means Advantageous state management information book giving means for permanently giving information so that it can be set by the advantageous state management information setting means (for example, processing during normal CZ during CZ or processing during CZ during ART)
Special for determining whether the specific state is a normal state (for example, processing during normal CZ during CZ medium or high precision zone during ART) or a special state (for example, during medium high-precision zone for CZ) A state determining means (for example, a normal medium CZ process or an ART medium CZ process by the main CPU 93),
Special state control means for controlling the specific state to the special state when the special state determining means determines that the specific state is to be the special state (for example, normal CZ intermediate processing or ART by the main CPU 93). Medium CZ medium treatment), and
The point number determination means,
When the specific state is the special state, the number of points is determined so that the number of points is relatively larger than when the specific state is the normal state,
When the number of games in which the special state is controlled to the special state by the special state control unit is a specific number (for example, “4”), the number of points stored by the point number storage unit is The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of points that is equal to or greater than the predetermined value is determined.

In the present invention, advantageous state management is performed in a specific state (for example, during normal CZ or during ART during CZ) to which advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing an advantageous state (for example, ART) can be added. When it is determined whether or not information is provisionally provided (for example, provisionally stocked), and a predetermined provision condition is satisfied (for example, the value of the point counter becomes “100” or more), provisionally-added advantageous state management information. Is provided (for example, officially stocked). That is, in the specific state, it is determined whether or not the grant condition is satisfied for the information (advantageous state management information) for shifting or continuing to the advantageous state, and the content of the grant is also determined. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific state from becoming monotonous.

Further, in the present invention, whether the specific state is a normal state (for example, during normal CZ or CZ during ART which is not in the CZ middle high-precision zone) or a special state (for example, CZ middle high-precision zone) When the determination is possible and the specific state is the special state, the determination of the number of points is preferentially performed so that the predetermined giving condition is more easily satisfied. Further, when the number of games in which the specific state is controlled to be the special state becomes the specific number of times (for example, "4" times), the predetermined grant condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the playability in the specific state can be made more diverse, the interest in the game in the specific state can be further improved.

Further, the present invention is
When the specific state is the normal state, the specific state control means determines that a specific winning combination (for example, “push order bell B”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the CZ medium-high probability chance is entered), a special notification control unit (for example, a main notification control unit that controls to notify a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation related to the specific combination) Further includes a normal medium CZ processing by the CPU 93),
The symbol variation stop control means, when the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, when a stop operation is performed in the advantageous stop operation procedure, a specific symbol When a combination of (for example, a combination of the symbols of "8-sheet combination 2") is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop operation is performed by a stop operation procedure different from the advantageous stop operation procedure, , Without stopping and displaying the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means,
In the special state determination means, the special notification control means notifies a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation related to the specific winning combination, and the symbol variation stop control means combines the specific symbols with the symbol display means. The game machine according to the above, wherein the special state is determined to be the special state based on the stop display.

Further, in the present invention, when a specific winning combination (for example, “push order bell B”) is determined as an internal winning combination and a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the CZ middle/high probability chance is entered), the specific winning combination is selected. When a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation (for example, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation) is notified, and the stop operation can be performed in the procedure of the advantageous stop operation, the specific state is changed to the special state. It is configured to be decided. That is, in the specific state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the stop operation sequence can be correctly answered, the specific state shifts to a more advantageous special state. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the specific state can be changed according to the situation of the game operation (for example, stop operation) by the player, so that the interest of the game in the specific state can be further improved.

According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a game from becoming monotonous in a specific state where an advantageous state advantageous to a player can be given.

It is explanatory drawing explaining the function flow in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a perspective view showing an example of appearance composition in a game machine of this embodiment. FIG. 6 is a perspective view showing an internal structure of the gaming machine of the present embodiment, with a middle door closed. FIG. 7 is a perspective view showing an internal structure of the gaming machine of the present embodiment and showing a state in which a middle door is opened. It is explanatory drawing which shows the inside of the cabinet in the game machine of this embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the back surface side of the front door in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing a control system in the game machine of the present embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a main control circuit in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a sub control circuit in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the game state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a transition diagram of the effect state in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which shows the design arrangement table which is the game machine of this execution form. It is a figure which shows the symbol code table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination, a replay combination, etc. in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination, a replay combination, etc. in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol combination table related to a bonus combination, a replay combination, etc. in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the symbol combination table which concerns on the small winning combination in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for general game states in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for MB game states in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB game states in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB game states in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal lottery table for BB game states in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a bonus internal winning combination determination table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship (general game state) between the stop operation sequence with respect to an internal winning combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and a winning combination. It is a figure which shows the relationship (MB game state) between the stop operation sequence with respect to an internal winning combination in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and a winning combination. It is a diagram showing an internal winning combination storage area in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the display combination storage area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a symbol code storage area in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the internal carryover combination storage area in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the game state flag storage area in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing an effect state flag storage area in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is the figure which shows the production control information storage area in the game machine of this execution form. It is a diagram showing a BB winning lock lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ/ART transfer lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a CZ/ART transition winning selection lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing the number game lottery table of the number of precursor games at the time of CZ/ART transfer winning in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a bonus ART transition lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a diagram showing a special zone ART transfer lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the precursor game number lottery table at the time of the transition to ART special prize in the special zone in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the special addition execution lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ continuation mode lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a CZ medium-high probability chance transfer lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ middle and high probability zone transfer lottery table in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing a CZ middle and high probability zone end lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows ART management information temporary stock lottery table during CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows ART management information temporary stock content lottery table during CZ in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a diagram showing a CZ normal point addition value lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure showing a CZ middle and high probability point addition value lottery table in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the mode initial lottery table during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ mode lottery table during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ ceiling lottery table during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART management information promotion lottery table in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows CZ transfer lottery table 1 during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows CZ transfer lottery table 2 during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the transfer content lottery table at the time of CZ transfer winning in ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the CZ during ART in the gaming machine of this embodiment, and the number-of-preceding game lottery table at the time of addition zone transfer winning. It is a figure which shows the mode transfer lottery table in ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the addition guarantee lottery table in the addition zone in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART management information stock lottery table in the additional zone in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the ART management information stock content lottery table in the additional zone in the gaming machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the main control processing in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an internal lottery process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the ART related processing at the time of game start in the game machine of this execution form. It is a flow chart which shows processing in the additional zone in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing in the additional zone in the game machine of this embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the processing during CZ during ART in the game machine of this execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the processing during CZ during ART in the game machine of this execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the processing during CZ during ART in the game machine of this execution form. It is a flow chart which shows processing during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during ART in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an ART management information setting process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the processing during normal CZ in the game machine of this execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the processing during normal CZ in the game machine of this execution form. It is the flowchart which shows the processing during normal CZ in the game machine of this execution form. It is a flow chart which shows the processing in the special zone in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows processing during a bonus in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows the normal processing in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game start time lock execution process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a bonus end check process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is the flowchart which shows the bonus operation check processing in the game machine of this execution form. It is a flow chart which shows ART related processing at the time of game end in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a game end lock execution process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows an interruption processing by control of a main CPU in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a flowchart showing an input port check process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a communication data transmission process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a mother task in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a main board communication task in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a flowchart showing a command reception process in the gaming machine of the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of CZ transfer (CZ management information 1) in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of CZ transfer (CZ management information 2) in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of CZ transfer (CZ management information 3) in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example of CZ shift (CZ management information 4) in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of CZ transfer (CZ management information 5) in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of CZ transfer (CZ management information 6) in the game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure showing an example (during ART) of a screen display in a game machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship (general game state) of the stop operation sequence with respect to an internal winning combination in a game machine of the modification of this embodiment, and a winning combination.

Hereinafter, a pachi-slot machine, which is a specific example of a gaming machine according to the present invention, will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the main configuration of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.

[Function flow of pachi-slot machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram showing a functional flow of the pachi-slot machine 1 in the present embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1, each means shown in FIG. 1 executes a necessary process, and each function is exerted to enable a player to execute a game.

<Latching operation detection means>
The insertion operation detection means detects an insertion operation of a game medium such as a medal or a coin by the player. When the insertion operation of a predetermined number of game media (for example, three medals) is detected, the detection of the start operation by the start operation detection unit described later is permitted. In addition, a predetermined winning line is activated in the symbol display means described later (hereinafter, the activated winning line is referred to as an “effective line”). In the present embodiment, the selector 66 that detects insertion of medals by the player and the BET switch 77 that detects operation of the BET button 22 by the player constitute insertion operation detection means. The types of game media that can be detected are not limited to medals, and include coins, tokens, game balls, electromagnetic game media having a value equivalent to these, and the like.

<Starting operation detecting means>
The start operation detecting means detects a start operation by the player. When the start operation is detected, the variable display of symbols by the symbol display means described later is started. Further, a random number value used when the internal winning combination determining means described later determines the internal winning combination is extracted from within a predetermined numerical value range (for example, 0 to 65535). In addition, the random number value for production which is used when the production control means which is mentioned later controls the production contents, is extracted from within the numerical range which is decided beforehand (for example, 0-127, 0-16383). In the present embodiment, the start switch 79 for detecting the operation of the start lever 23 by the player constitutes a start operation detecting means. It should be noted that the types, the number, and the numerical value range of the random number values to be extracted are not limited to this, and it is assumed that the random number values of the number required in the game can be extracted from within the predetermined numerical value range. ..

<Means for determining internal winning positions>
The internal winning combination determining means performs a lottery based on the extracted random number value and determines an internal winning combination from a plurality of predetermined winning combinations. That is, the combination of symbols permitted to be displayed on the activated line is determined by the determination of the internal winning combination. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91, which refers to various tables and executes the internal lottery process based on the extracted random number value, constitutes an internal winning combination determination means. The type of symbol combination relates to “winning” (also referred to as “establishment”) in which benefits such as payout of medals, operation of replay (replay), and operation of bonus are given to the player. Other than that, those related to so-called "loss" are provided.

Further, the pachi-slot machine 1 can perform control such that the progress of the game is stopped (the game operation of the player is invalidated). Such control is called "lock" (or "freeze"). For the sake of convenience, the control for stopping the progress of the game executed at the start of the game is called "lock at the start of game", and the control for stopping the progress of the game executed at the end of the game is called "lock at the end of game". Call. That is, the "game start lock" is a control in which the progress of the game is stopped in the sense that the operation to the stop button is not effective for a predetermined period after the start lever is operated, "Lock at the end of game" means that the operation of the bet button or the operation of the start lever is not effective for a predetermined period after the stop button is operated, and the progress of the game is stopped. Control. Of course, the trigger of the “lock” is not limited to the above, and for example, after the start lever is operated and one of the stop buttons is operated, the subsequent operation is effective for a predetermined period. It is good also as performing control which does not become.

Here, the internal winning combination determining means can perform a lottery based on the extracted random number value, and can determine whether to perform “lock” instead of the internal winning combination or together with the internal winning combination. In this case, a plurality of random number values are extracted, an internal winning combination is determined based on one of the random number values, and whether or not to perform "lock" is determined based on another one of the random number values. May be That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1, it is possible to determine whether or not to perform “lock” based on the extracted random number value, in addition to determining the internal winning combination based on the extracted random number value. ing. In this case, the main control circuit 91 constitutes lock determining means.

<Design display means>
The symbol display means variably displays a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns. That is, when the start operation is detected by the start operation detecting means, the variable display of the symbol is started, and when the stop control is executed by the stop control means described later, the variable display of the symbol is ended. In the present embodiment, the plurality of reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 constitute a symbol display means. The symbol display means is not limited to this, and may be, for example, a symbol image display means (for example, an image display device) that variably displays a plurality of symbol images in a plurality of columns.

<Stop operation detection means>
The stop operation detecting means detects a stop operation by the player. When the stop operation is detected, the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means is stopped by the stop control means described later. In the present embodiment, the stop switch board 80 that detects the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R by the player constitutes a stop operation detecting means.

It should be noted that the reel stop operation performed first when all reels are rotating is the first stop operation, the stop operation performed next to the first stop operation is the second stop operation, and the second stop operation is next. The stop operation performed is called a third stop operation.

<Stop control means>
The stop control means controls the stop of the variable display of the symbols on the symbol display means. That is, when a stop operation is detected by the stop operation detecting means, based on the stop control information set according to the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the variable display of the symbols in the symbol displaying means is stopped. Control. In the present embodiment, when the player operates the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R, various reel control information is referred to, and reel stop control processing for controlling the rotation of the corresponding reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed. The main control circuit 91 that constitutes a stop control means.

Here, in the pachi-slot machine 1, basically, control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed within a specified time (190 msec or 75 msec) from when the stop button is pressed. In the present embodiment, the number of symbols that move with the rotation of the reel within the specified time is referred to as the “number of sliding pieces”. When the specified time is 190 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 4 symbols, and when the specified time is 75 msec, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 1 symbol. The maximum number of sliding pieces is not limited to these, and can be set as appropriate.

The stop control means, in accordance with the result of the determination of the internal winning combination, regarding the combination of symbols which are allowed to be displayed, the specified time is used so that the symbol combination is displayed as much as possible along the activated line. The rotation of the reel is stopped within the maximum number of sliding pieces.

On the other hand, according to the decision result of the internal winning combination, for the combination of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed, the maximum sliding piece is used so as not to be displayed along the effective line by using the above specified time. Stop spinning the reels within a range of numbers.

In addition, the stop control means changes the combination of symbols displayed by the determined internal winning combination according to a predetermined stop operation order (for example, the order in which a plurality of stop buttons are operated). At some time, the control for stopping the rotation of the corresponding reel is performed by also referring to the predetermined stop operation sequence.

<Winning determination means>
The winning determination means determines whether or not there is a winning, depending on the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means. That is, when the variable display of the symbols is stopped by the stop control means, the winning or non-winning of the winning combination is determined based on the combination of the symbols stopped on the activated line. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91, which refers to the symbol combination table or the like and executes the winning prize search process based on the symbol combination displayed on the symbol display means, constitutes a winning determination means.

<Profit-making means>
When the winning determination means determines that there is a winning, the profit giving means gives a profit according to the combination of the winning symbols. That is, according to the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means, a corresponding profit is given to the player. In the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 that executes the medal payout process and the like based on the result of the prize search process constitutes a profit giving means. When the profit to be given is given by the control of the sub control circuit 101, the sub control circuit 101 constitutes a profit giving means.

Here, as the profit to be given by the profit giving means, the payout of medals, the same amount of game media as the current game are automatically inserted, and the re-play operation in which the game can be performed again, the internal relating to the re-game Re-play high probability state (replay time) that increases the winning probability of the winning combination, special game state (bonus) that increases the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to payout of medals, and stop operation appropriate for the player By informing the procedure of 1, the operation of a specific game state (assist time) in which the winning probability of the internal winning combination relating to the payout of medals becomes high can be mentioned. It should be noted that the profit given by the profit giving means is not limited to this.

In this manner, in the pachi-slot machine 1, when the player's input operation is detected by the input operation detection means and the player's start operation is detected by the start operation detection means, the internal winning combination determination means etc. Is determined and the variable display of symbols by the symbol display means is started. Then, when the stop operation detecting means detects the stop operation of the player, the stop control means controls the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means to stop, and the combination of the symbols displayed on the symbol display means is the winning determination means. When it is determined that the winning combination is a combination of symbols, the profit giving means gives a profit according to the combination of symbols. The above-described series of flows is performed as one game (unit game) on the pachi-slot machine.

<Direction control means>
The production control means, based on the extracted random number value for production, other information (for example, production control information), or a predetermined transition trigger being established, the production state so that the game is performed in an appropriate production state. Effect state control means for controlling, effect content determining means for determining what is to be executed this time from a plurality of types of effects, and controlling effect effecting means to be described later so that the determined effect is appropriately executed. The production execution control means is included. In the present embodiment, the production state is controlled according to a lottery result based on various tables referred to in a plurality of types of production states and the extracted random numbers for production, and the production content is determined according to the control result. The main control circuit 91 that constitutes a component constitutes an effect state control means and an effect content determination means. Further, the sub-control circuit 101 for executing the effect according to the determined effect content constitutes effect execution control means. When the control of the effect state is performed by the sub control circuit 101, the sub control circuit 101 may constitute the effect state control means. Further, when the effect content is determined by the sub-control circuit 101, the sub-control circuit 101 may constitute effect content determination means. In addition, when the production execution means which will be described later is controlled by the main control circuit 91, the main control circuit 91 may constitute the production execution control means.

Further, the effect state control means and the effect content determination means notify the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information regarding the stop operation sequence and information regarding the game history) when a predetermined notification condition is satisfied. Decide the contents of the production of. In this case, the effect control means can also be called notification control means.

<Direction execution means>
The effect executing means executes the effect determined by the effect content determining means. That is, it means various devices used for production such as a display device and a lamp for performing visual appeal, a speaker for performing auditory appeal, a production button for performing tactile appeal, and the like. In the present embodiment, the 7-segment display 24, the liquid crystal display device 11, the LED 85, and the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R form an effect executing means. The effect execution means is not limited to these, and may be, for example, a movable body (feature) provided at a position visible from the front side of the pachi-slot machine 1, or a plurality of reels (for example, The production may be executed by variably displaying the reels 3L, 3C, 3R) in a production mode different from the normal display mode of the variable display.

In addition, when the effect execution means determines the effect for informing the player of information necessary for the game (for example, information about the stop operation sequence and information about the game history) by the effect content determination means, , Informs the player of the information. In this case, the effect executing means can also be called an informing means.

[Pachislot machine structure]
Next, the structure of the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Appearance structure>
FIG. 2 is a perspective view showing an external structure of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The exterior body 2 of the pachi-slot machine 1 has a cabinet 2a that houses reels, circuit boards, and the like, and a front door 2b that is attached to the cabinet 2a so as to be openable and closable. Further, handles 7 are provided on both side surfaces of the cabinet 2a. The handle 7 is a recess that is used when carrying the pachi-slot machine 1.

Inside the cabinet 2a, three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are provided side by side. Hereinafter, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are also referred to as the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R, respectively. Each of the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R has a reel body formed in a cylindrical shape, and a translucent sheet material mounted on the peripheral surface of the reel body. On the surface of the sheet material, a plurality of (for example, 21) patterns are drawn at equal intervals along the circumferential direction.

An upper panel unit 10 and a liquid crystal display device 11 are provided above the center of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 forms the upper part of the front door 2b. The upper panel unit 10 has a light source and executes an effect by light emitted from the light source. The liquid crystal display device 11 is arranged below the upper panel unit 10 and executes an effect by displaying an image.

A pedestal portion 12 is formed at the center of the front door 2b. The pedestal portion 12 is provided with the symbol display area 4 and various devices to be operated by the player.

The symbol display area 4 is arranged on the front side overlapping the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R when viewed from the front, and is provided corresponding to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R. The symbol display area 4 functions as a display window and is configured to be able to pass through the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind it. Hereinafter, the symbol display area 4 is also referred to as a display window 4.

When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R provided behind the display window 4 is stopped, among the plural types of symbols of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the upper, middle and lower stages of the frame are displayed. One symbol is displayed in each area (three in total). In addition, one or a plurality of lines, each of which is a combination of predetermined ones of the three regions of the upper, middle, and lower stages facing the reels 3L, 3C, and 3R of the display window 4, are defined as effective lines. The Rukoto. In the present embodiment, a line (center line) formed by combining a middle region facing the reel 3L, a middle region facing the reel 3C, and a middle region facing the reel 3R is defined as an effective line.

The display window 4 is formed by a frame member 13 provided on the pedestal portion 12. The frame member 13 has a display window 4, an information display window 14, and a stop button mounting portion 15.

The information display window 14 is continuously provided below the display window 4 and opens upward. That is, the display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. The information display window 14 and the display window 4 are covered with a transparent window cover 16.

The window cover 16 is arranged on the inner surface side of the frame member 13 and cannot be removed from the front surface side of the front door 2b. Further, the frame member 13 has a sheet mounting portion 17 that faces the opening of the information display window 14 with the window cover 16 interposed therebetween. Then, a sheet member (information sheet) in which information regarding a game is written is arranged between the sheet placing portion 17 and the window cover 16. Therefore, the information sheet is covered with the window cover 16 having a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps.

Since the window cover 16 constituting the mounting portion of the information sheet cannot be removed from the front side of the front door 2b and has a smooth surface without irregularities or gaps, the pachi-slot machine can be used by using the mounting portion of the information sheet. It is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of accessing the inside of 1. The exchange of information sheets will be described later with reference to FIG.

In this embodiment, the display window 4 and the information display window 14 are formed as one continuous opening. However, the information display window according to the gaming machine of the present invention has only to be provided below the display window and need not be continuous with the display window. That is, the display window 4 and the information display window 14 may be formed as two openings arranged in the vertical direction.

The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided below the information display window 14 and is formed on a plane facing the front. The stop button mounting portion 15 is provided with a through hole through which the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R penetrate. The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are associated with each of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and are provided to stop the rotation of the corresponding reels. Hereinafter, the stop buttons 19L, 19C, and 19R are also referred to as a left stop button 19L, a middle stop button 19C, and a right stop button 19R, respectively.

The stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R represent an example of operation means that is a target of operation by the player. Further, the pedestal portion 12 is provided with a medal insertion slot 21, a BET button 22, and a start lever 23 as operation means to be operated by the player.

The medal slot 21 is provided to receive medals that are dropped from the outside by the player. The medals received in the medal insertion slot 21 will be thrown into one game with the predetermined number being the upper limit, and the amount exceeding the prescribed number can be deposited inside the pachi-slot machine 1. (So-called credit function).

The BET button 22 is provided to determine the number of medals deposited in the pachi-slot machine 1 for one game. The start lever 23 is provided to start rotation of all reels (3L, 3C, 3R).

A 7-segment display 24 including a 7-segment LED (Light Emitting Diode) is provided on the left side of the display window 4 when viewed from the front. The 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information such as the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a privilege (hereinafter, the number of payouts) and the number of medals deposited in the pachi-slot (hereinafter, the number of credits). .. In addition, the 7-segment display 24 digitally displays information regarding the procedure of the stop operation, which is advantageous for the player.

Side panel units 26L and 26R are provided on both sides of the pedestal portion 12. Each of the side panel units 26L and 26R has a light source, and executes an effect by light emitted from the light source. A settlement button 27 is provided below the side panel unit 26L. The settlement button 27 is provided for pulling out the medals stored inside the pachi-slot machine 1 to the outside.

A waist panel unit 31 is provided below the pedestal portion 12. The waist panel unit 31 has a decorative panel on which an arbitrary image is drawn, and a light source that emits light for illuminating the decorative panel from the back side.

Below the waist panel unit 31, a medal payout opening 32, speaker holes 33L and 33R, and a medal tray unit 34 are provided. The medal payout port 32 guides the medals discharged by driving the hopper device 51 described later to the outside. The medals discharged from the medal payout opening 32 are stored in the medal tray unit 34. The speaker holes 33L and 33R are provided to output a sound effect or a sound such as music corresponding to the effect contents.

<Internal structure>
3 and 4 are perspective views showing the internal structure of the pachi-slot machine 1. In FIG. 3, the front door 2b is opened, and the middle door 41 provided on the back surface side of the front door 2b is closed with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 4 shows a state in which the front door 2b is opened and the middle door 41 is opened with respect to the front door 2b. Further, FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram showing the inside of the cabinet 2a. FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing the back surface side of the front door 2b.

The cabinet 2a has a top plate 20a, a bottom plate 20b, left and right side plates 20c and 20d, and a back plate 20e (see FIG. 5). A cabinet-side speaker 42 is provided on the upper side inside the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side speaker 42 is attached to the back plate 20e of the cabinet 2a via mounting brackets 43L and 43R. The cabinet side speaker 42 is, for example, a speaker for outputting a sound effect.

A cabinet-side relay board 44 is disposed on the left side of the cabinet-side speaker 42 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The cabinet side relay board 44 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The cabinet-side relay board 44 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7), which will be described later, attached to the middle door 41 (see FIGS. 3 and 4), a hopper device 51, a game medal auxiliary storage switch (not shown), and a medal. The wiring for connecting to the payout count switch (not shown) is relayed.

An amplifier board 45 that controls the output of sound from the cabinet-side speaker 42 is arranged in the center of the cabinet 2a. The amplifier board 45 is attached to a mounting shelf 46 fixed to the left and right side plates 20c and 20d.

Further, when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, an external concentrated terminal board 47 is arranged on the right side of the amplifier board 45. The external centralized terminal board 47 is attached to the right side surface board 20d of the cabinet 2a. The external centralized terminal board 47 is provided to output signals such as a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, and a security signal to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

A sub power supply device 48 is disposed on the left side of the amplifier board 45 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The sub power supply device 48 is attached to the left side plate 20c of the cabinet 2a. The sub power supply device 48 supplies electric power of 100 V AC voltage to the power supply device 53 described later. Further, the AC voltage of 100 V is converted into the DC voltage and supplied to the amplifier board 45.

A medal payout device (hereinafter referred to as a hopper device) 51, a medal auxiliary storage 52, and a power supply device 53 are arranged below the inside of the cabinet 2a.

The hopper device 51 is attached to the central portion of the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a. The hopper device 51 has a structure capable of accommodating a large amount of medals and discharging them one by one. The hopper device 51 pays out medals when the number of stored medals exceeds, for example, 50 or when the settlement button is pressed to settle the medals. The medals paid out by the hopper device 51 are discharged from the medal payout opening 32 (see FIG. 2).

The medal auxiliary storage 52 stores the medals overflowing from the hopper device 51. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is arranged on the right side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front. The medal auxiliary storage 52 is engaged with the bottom plate 20b of the cabinet 2a and is configured to be attachable to and detachable from the bottom plate 20b.

The power supply device 53 has a power switch 53a and a power supply board 53b (see FIG. 7). The power supply device 53 is disposed on the left side of the hopper device 51 when the inside of the cabinet 2a is viewed from the front, and is attached to the left side face plate 20c. The power supply device 53 converts the power of the AC voltage 100V supplied from the sub power supply device 48 into the power of the DC voltage required by each unit, and supplies the converted power to each unit.

As shown in FIG. 3, FIG. 4 and FIG. 6, the middle door 41 is arranged at the center of the back surface of the front door 2b, and is configured to open and close the display window 4 (see FIG. 4) from the back side. Door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c are provided on the upper and lower portions of the middle door 41. The door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c fix (prohibit) the opening operation of the middle door 41 with the display window 4 closed from the back side. That is, in order to open the middle door 41, it is necessary to rotate the door stoppers 41a, 41b, 41c to release the fixation of the middle door 41.

A main control board case 55 accommodating a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) and three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are attached to the middle door 41. A stepping motor is connected to the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R via a gear having a predetermined reduction ratio.

As shown in FIG. 4, when the middle door 41 is opened, the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet placing portion 17 are exposed. As described above, between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17, the information sheet in which the information regarding the game is written is arranged. This information sheet is inserted into the gap formed between the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17 with the middle door 41 opened to expose the back surface of the window cover 16 and the sheet mounting portion 17. It Also, when exchanging the information sheet, the information sheet exchange operation is performed after the middle door 41 is opened.

The main control board case 55 is provided with a setting key type switch 56. The setting key type switch 56 is used when changing the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1 or confirming the setting value of the pachi-slot machine 1. In the present embodiment, the main control board case 55 and the main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 constitute a main control board unit.

The main control board 71 housed in the main control board case 55 constitutes a main control circuit 91 (see FIG. 8) described later. The main control circuit 91 is a circuit for controlling the progress of the game in the pachi-slot machine 1, such as the determination of the internal winning combination, the rotation and stop of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, the determination of the presence or absence of the winning, the determination of the effect contents. The specific configuration of the main control circuit 91 will be described later.

A sub-control board case 57 that houses a sub-control board 72 (see FIG. 7) is disposed above the middle door 41. The sub-control board 72 housed in the sub-control board case 57 constitutes the sub-control circuit 101 (see FIG. 9). The sub-control circuit 101 is a circuit that controls execution of effects such as display of images. The specific configuration of the sub control circuit 101 will be described later.

A center speaker 58 is arranged above the sub control board case 57. A fan 59 is disposed on the left side of the center speaker 58 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. That is, the fan 59 is arranged above the back surface of the front door 2b. The fan 59 blows air downward to cool the inside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

A sub relay board 61 is disposed on the right side of the sub control board case 57 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The sub relay board 61 relays the wiring connecting the sub control board 72 and the main control board 71. The sub-control board 72 is a board that relays a wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and a board arranged around the sub-control board 72. It should be noted that examples of the boards arranged around the sub-control board 72 include LED boards 62A and 62B described later.

The LED boards 62A and 62B are arranged above the sub control board case 57 when viewed from the back surface side of the front door 2b. These LED boards 62A and 62B cause an LED (Light Emitting Diode) 85 (see FIG. 7), which is a specific example of a light source, to emit light in accordance with the effect executed by the control of the sub control circuit 101 (see FIG. 8). Display the blinking pattern. The pachi-slot machine 1 of this embodiment includes a plurality of LED boards in addition to the LED boards 62A and 62B. For example, a reel LED substrate (not shown) for controlling a reel LED (not shown) for illuminating the sheet material of each reel is provided from the back side of each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

Below the sub relay board 61, a 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 is arranged. The 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 stores a history of opening/closing of the middle door 41. Further, when the middle door 41 is opened, a signal for displaying an error on the liquid crystal display device 11 is output to the sub control board 72 (sub control circuit 101).

A board speaker 64 and lower speakers 65L and 65R are disposed below the middle door 41. The board speaker 64 faces the waist panel unit 31 (see FIG. 2), and the lower speakers 65L and 65R face the speaker holes 33L and 33R (see FIG. 2), respectively.

A selector 66 and a door open/close monitor switch 67 are arranged above the lower speaker 65L. The selector 66 is a device for selecting whether or not the material and shape of the medal are proper, and guides the proper medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 21 to the hopper device 51. A medal sensor (not shown) that detects that a proper medal has passed is provided on the path through which the medal passes in the selector 66.

The door open/close monitor switch 67 is arranged on the left side of the selector 66 when the front door 2b is viewed from the back side. The door opening/closing monitoring switch 67 outputs a security signal for notifying the opening/closing of the front door 2b to the outside of the pachi-slot machine 1.

Further, a door relay terminal plate 68 is provided in a region below the display window 4 and opened/closed by the middle door 41 (see FIG. 4). The door relay terminal board 68 includes a main control board 71 (see FIG. 7) in the main control board case 55, various buttons and switches, a sub control board 72 (see FIG. 7), a selector 66, and a game operation display board 81. (See FIG. 7) This is a substrate that relays the wiring with the wiring. The various buttons and switches include, for example, the BET button 22, the settlement button 27, the door opening/closing monitoring switch 67, the BET switch 77, the start switch 79, and the like, which will be described later.

[Control system of pachi-slot machine]
Next, a control system included in the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a block diagram showing a control system of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The pachi-slot machine 1 has a main control board 71 arranged on the middle door 41 and a sub-control board 72 arranged on the front door 2b. On the main control board 71, there are a reel relay terminal board 74, a setting key type switch 56, an external centralized terminal board 47, a hopper device 51, a medal auxiliary storage switch 75, and a power supply board 53b of the power supply device 53. It is connected. The setting key type switch 56, the external centralized terminal board 47, the hopper device 51, and the medal auxiliary storage switch 75 are connected to the main control board 71 via the cabinet side relay board 44. Since the external centralized terminal board 47 and the hopper device 51 have been described above, the description thereof will be omitted.

The reel relay terminal board 74 is arranged inside the reel body of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The reel relay terminal plate 74 is electrically connected to a stepping motor (not shown) of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R and relays a signal output from the main control board 71 to the stepping motor.

The medal auxiliary storage case switch 75 penetrates a switch through hole of the medal auxiliary storage case 52, which will be described later. The medal auxiliary storage switch 75 detects whether the medal auxiliary storage 52 is full of medals.

A power switch 53a is connected to a power board 53b of the power supply device 53. The power switch 53a is turned on when the pachi-slot machine 1 is supplied with necessary power.

Further, on the main control board 71, a selector 66, a door opening/closing monitor switch 67, a BET switch 77, a settlement switch 78, a start switch 79, a stop switch board 80, a game operation display board 81, and a door relay terminal board 68. The sub relay board 61 is connected. The selector 66, the door open/close monitor switch 67, and the sub relay board 61 have been described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The BET switch 77 detects that the BET button 22 has been pressed by the player. The settlement switch 78 detects that the settlement button 27 is pressed by the player. The start switch 79 detects that the player has operated the start lever 23 (start operation).

The stop switch board 80 is a board that constitutes a circuit for stopping the spinning reel and a circuit for displaying the reel that can be stopped by using an LED or the like. The stop switch board 80 is provided with a stop switch. The stop switch detects that the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R have been pressed by the player (stop operation).

The game operation display board 81 displays the number of inserted medals on the 7-segment display 24 when accepting the insertion of medals, when the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotatable and when replaying. It is a substrate for making. The 7-segment display 24 and the LED 82 are connected to the game operation display board 81. The LED 82 lights, for example, a mark indicating the start of a game, a mark for performing a replay, or the like.

The sub control board 72 is connected to the main control board 71 via the door relay terminal board 68 and the sub relay board 61. A sound I/O board 84, LED boards 62A, 62B, and a 24h door open/close monitoring unit 63 are connected to the sub control board 72 via a sub relay board 61. The LED boards 62A, 62B and the 24h door opening/closing monitoring unit 63 have been described above, and thus description thereof will be omitted.

The sound I/O board 84 outputs sound to the center speaker 58, the board speaker 64, and the lower speakers 65L and 65R. The sound I/O board 84 outputs sound to the cabinet side speaker 42 together with the amplifier board 45.

A ROM cartridge substrate 86 and a liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are connected to the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge substrate 86 and the liquid crystal relay substrate 87 are housed in the sub control substrate case 57 together with the sub control substrate 72. The ROM cartridge board 86 is a board for managing images (video) for presentation, sound, LED boards 62A and 62B, other LED boards (not shown), and communication data. The liquid crystal relay board 87 is a board that relays the wiring that connects the sub-control board 72 and the liquid crystal display device 11.

<Main control circuit>
Next, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 71 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the main control circuit 91 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The main control circuit 91 has a microcomputer 92 installed on the main control board 71 as a main component. The microcomputer 92 includes a main CPU 93, a main ROM 94 and a main RAM 95.

The main ROM 94 stores a control program executed by the main CPU 93, a data table, data for transmitting various control commands (commands) to the sub control circuit 101, and the like. The main RAM 95 is provided with a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination determined by executing the control program.

A clock pulse generation circuit 96, a frequency divider 97, a random number generator 98, and a sampling circuit 99 are connected to the main CPU 93. The clock pulse generation circuit 96 and the frequency divider 97 generate clock pulses. The main CPU 93 executes the control program based on the generated clock pulse. The random number generator 98 generates a random number within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 65535). The sampling circuit 99 extracts one value from the generated random numbers.

The main CPU 93 counts the number of times a pulse is output to the stepping motor of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R after detecting the reel index. As a result, the main CPU 93 manages the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R (mainly, how many symbols the reel has rotated). The reel index is information indicating that the reel has made one rotation. This reel index is provided, for example, with an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and is provided at a predetermined position of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R, and the light emitting part and the light receiving part are rotated by the rotation of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. It is detected by a reel position detection unit (not shown) having a detection piece interposed therebetween.

Here, the management of the rotation angle of each reel 3L, 3C, 3R will be specifically described. The number of pulses output to the stepping motor is counted by a pulse counter provided in the main RAM 95. Then, each time the pulse counter counts the output of a predetermined number of pulses (for example, 16 times) required for rotating one symbol, the symbol counter provided in the main RAM 95 is incremented by one. The symbol counter is provided for each reel 3L, 3C, 3R. The value of the symbol counter is cleared when the reel index is detected by the reel position detector (not shown).

That is, in the present embodiment, by managing the symbol counter, the number of symbols rotated after the reel index is detected is managed. Therefore, the position of each symbol on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is detected with reference to the position at which the reel index is detected.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the maximum number of sliding pieces is set to 4 symbols. Therefore, for example, when the left stop button 19L is pressed, the symbol of the left reel 3L in the middle stage of the display window 4 and each symbol within the range up to four symbols ahead are displayed in the middle stage of the display window 4. The pattern can be stopped.

<Sub control circuit>
Next, the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a block diagram showing a configuration example of the sub control circuit 101 of the pachi-slot machine 1.

The sub control circuit 101 is electrically connected to the main control circuit 91, and performs various kinds of processing for performance execution based on a command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The sub control circuit 101 basically includes a sub CPU 102, a sub RAM 103, a rendering processor 104, a drawing RAM 105, and a driver 106.

The sub CPU 102 controls the output of video, sound, and light according to the control program stored in the ROM cartridge board 86 in response to the command transmitted from the main control circuit 91. The ROM cartridge board 86 basically includes a program storage area and a data storage area.

A control program executed by the sub CPU 102 is stored in the program storage area. For example, the control program controls the communication with the main control circuit 91, and the main board communication task for selecting and registering the effect contents (effect data) according to the transmitted command, and the selected effect contents. Based on the animation task for controlling the display of the image by the liquid crystal display device 11 (see FIG. 6), the lamp control task for controlling the light output by the light source such as the LED 85, and the speakers such as the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R. It includes a sound control task that controls the output of sound.

The data storage area includes a storage area for storing various data tables, a storage area for storing effect data forming each effect content, and a storage area for storing animation data related to image creation. Further, a storage area for storing sound data regarding BGM and sound effects, a storage area for storing lamp data regarding a pattern of turning on/off light, and the like are included.

The sub RAM 103 is provided with a storage area for registering the determined effect contents and effect data, and a storage area for storing various data such as an internal winning combination transmitted from the main control circuit 91.

The sub CPU 102, the rendering processor 104, the drawing RAM (including a frame buffer) 105, and the driver 106 create a video according to the animation data specified by the effect contents, and display the created video on the liquid crystal display device 11.

Further, the sub CPU 102 causes the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R and the like to output sounds such as BGM according to the sound data designated by the effect contents. In addition, the sub CPU 102 controls the turning on and off of the light source such as the LED 85 according to the lamp data specified by the effect contents.

[Change of game state]
Next, with reference to FIG. 10, a game state of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described. The main CPU 93, as a gaming state of the pachi-slot machine 1, a general gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4), an MB gaming state (RT0, RT1, RT2 or RT3) and a BB gaming state (general, JACIN1 internal winning, JACIN2 internal win, RB1, JACIN1 internal win in RB1, JACIN2 internal win in RB1, JACIN1 internal win in RB2, RB2 or JACIN2 internal win in RB2).

<Transition of general gaming state and MB gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4 gaming states are defined as general gaming states, and MB gaming states MB gaming state (RT0) and MB A gaming state (RT1), an MB gaming state (RT2) and an MB gaming state (RT3) are defined. Note that “RT” is an abbreviation for “replay time”, and the winning probability of the replay combination that is the operating combination of the replay is set for each gaming state. “MB” is an abbreviation for “middle bonus”. In addition, "MB" is also called "an accessory continuous operation device related to a second type special accessory", and is a state in which a "second type special accessory"("CB" (challenge bonus)) operates continuously. Has become.

At RT0, the winning probability of the replay role is set to "8978/65536", at RT1 the winning probability of the replay role is set to "8980/65536", and at RT2, the winning probability of the replay role is "18180/65536". The winning probability of the replay combination is set to "43065/65536" in RT3, and the winning probability of the replay combination is set to "31457/65536" in RT4 (see FIG. 19). In RT0, the probability that the result of the internal lottery process described later will be “miss” is set to “34087/65536”, in RT1, the probability of “miss” is set to “34085/65536”, and at RT2. , The probability of being “miss” is set to “24885/65536”, and the probability of being “miss” is set to “0/65536” at RT3 (that is, the “miss” is set not to be determined), At RT4, the probability of "missing" is set to "14600/65536" (see FIG. 19). However, as will be described later, in the RT4, since the BB is carried over, the probability of being “miss” is set to “0/65536” (that is, the “miss” is not determined). It can be said that it is set).

Further, the winning probability of the replay combination in the MB game state (RT0 to RT3) is inherited from the winning probability of the replay combination in the general game state described above. However, in the MB game state (RT0 to RT3), even when the player is internally won for the replay combination, only 11 or 10 combinations, which will be described later, are established, and the replay combination is not established. Further, in the MB gaming state (RT0 to RT3), the probability of being "miss" is set to "0/65536" (that is, the "miss" is set not to be determined). However, in the MB gaming state (RT0 to RT3), when the internal replay combination is won, the replay combination may be established according to a predetermined condition (for example, the procedure of the stop operation). Further, in the MB game state, the winning probability of a different replay combination may be set without inheriting the winning probability of the replay combination in the normal game state.

Here, RT0 and RT1 are replay low probability states (low RT gaming states) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively low compared to RT3 and RT4, and RT3 and RT4 are compared to RT0 and RT1. It is a high replay probability state (high RT gaming state) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively high. In addition, RT2 has a relatively high probability of winning the replay role as compared to RT0 and RT1, but has a relatively low probability of winning the replay role as compared to RT3 and RT4. ). Further, when compared with RT3, RT0, RT1, RT2, and RT4 can all be said to be replay low-probability states (low RT gaming states) in which the winning probability of the replay combination is relatively low.

The winning probability of the replay combination in each gaming state (including each gaming state of the BB gaming state described later) is not limited to that described above (or later), and can be set as appropriate. For example, the winning probability of the replay combination at RT4 may be set to be the same as or similar to the winning probability of the replay combination at RT0 or RT1. The winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning) may be set higher than the winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state (general). The winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning) may be set higher than the winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state (general). The winning probability of the replay combination in the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning) may be set higher than the winning probability of the replay winning combination in the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning).

The state where the pachi-slot machine 1 was first installed in the game shop, or the state where the main RAM 95 backup error occurred in the pachi-slot machine 1 and all storage areas were initialized (initial state), the set value of the pachi-slot machine 1 was changed When it is done (after changing the setting) or when the BB game state described later is finished (BB end), the game state is shifted to RT0.

In RT0, when the RT1 transition symbol described later is established, the game state is shifted to RT1. Also, when the internal winning of BB described later is won, the game state is shifted to RT4. In addition, in RT0, when MB1 or MB2 to be described later is established, the winning state of the replay combination of RT0 (that is, the RT gaming state) is taken over, and the gaming state is shifted to the MB gaming state (RT0), In the MB gaming state (RT0), if the ending condition of the MB gaming state (for example, the payout of more than 10 medals has been fulfilled), the gaming state is shifted (returned) to RT0 again.

In RT1, when the RT2 shift lip described later is established, the game state is shifted to RT2. Also, when the internal winning of BB described later is won, the game state is shifted to RT4. In addition, in RT1, when MB1 or MB2 to be described later is established, the gaming state is shifted to the MB gaming state (RT1) while the winning probability of the replay role of RT1 (that is, RT gaming state) is taken over, In the MB gaming state (RT1), if the ending condition of the MB gaming state is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted (returned) to RT1 again.

In RT2, when the RT3 shift lip described later is established, the game state is shifted to RT3. Also, when the RT1 transition lip or the RT1 transition symbol described later is established, the game state is shifted to RT1. Also, when the internal winning of BB described later is won, the game state is shifted to RT4. In addition, in RT2, when MB1 or MB2 to be described later is established, the gaming state is shifted to the MB gaming state (RT2) while the winning probability (that is, RT gaming state) of the replay role of RT2 is inherited, In the MB game state (RT2), if the ending condition of the MB game state is satisfied, the game state is shifted (returned) to RT2 again.

In RT3, when the RT1 transition lip or the RT1 transition symbol described later is established, the game state is shifted to RT1. Also, when the internal winning of BB described later is won, the game state is shifted to RT4. In addition, in RT3, when MB1 or MB2 to be described later is established, the gaming state is shifted to the MB gaming state (RT3) while the winning probability of the replay combination of RT3 (that is, the RT gaming state) is inherited, In the MB game state (RT3), if the ending condition of the MB game state is satisfied, the game state is transferred (returned) to RT3 again.

When BB described later is established at RT4, the game state is shifted to the BB game state (general). Here, BB, MB1, MB2, JACIN1 and JACIN2, which will be described later, are bonus combinations that activate the bonus (see FIG. 25), and these bonus combinations are internally won from the time when the internal winning is achieved until the prize is won. State is retained. This is called "carryover", and the bonus role is also called "carryover". The internal winning state of the bonus combination is also called “between flags”. In this embodiment, RT4 becomes "between BB flags", the BB game state (JACIN1 internal winning, JACIN1 internal winning in RB1 and JACIN1 internal winning in RB2) becomes "between JACIN1 flags", and BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning, The JACIN2 internal win in RB1 and the JACIN2 internal win in RB2) are “between JACIN2 flags”. It should be noted that MB1 and MB2 are always established in the internally-winned game, so that "between MB flags" is not provided. However, MB1 and MB2 may not necessarily be established in the internally won game (that is, they may be carried over to the next and subsequent games), and in this case, as "between MB flags". A gaming state may be provided.

The transition triggers of each gaming state in the general gaming state are not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate. For example, one transition trigger of the above-mentioned game state transition triggers is established, and after the game state has been transitioned, a predetermined number of games have been played as another transition trigger, and the game state May be moved. Specifically, after the RT3 shift lip is established and the game state is shifted to RT3, the game state may be shifted to RT1 when 100 games have been played.

<Change of BB game state>
As shown in FIG. 10, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment, as the BB game state, the BB game state (general), the BB game state (JACIN1 internal winning), the BB game state (JACIN2 internal winning), the BB game state ( RB1), BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning in RB1), BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning in RB1), BB gaming state (RB2), BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning in RB2) and BB gaming state (JACIN2 in RB2) Internal winning) is defined. Note that “BB” is an abbreviation for “big bonus”, and “RB” is an abbreviation for “regular bonus”. Further, “BB” is also called “a role product continuous actuating device related to a type 1 special accessory”, and “RB” is also called a “type 1 special role”.

In the BB gaming state (general, JACIN1 internal winning and JACIN2 internal winning), the winning probability of the replay role is set to "9032/65536", and in the BB gaming state (RB1, RB1 JACIN1 internal winning and RB1 JACIN2 internal winning) , The winning probability of the replay role is set to “0/65536” (that is, the replay role is set not to be determined), and the replay is performed in the BB game state (RB2, RB2 JACIN1 internal win and RB2 JACIN2 internal win). The winning probability of the winning combination is set to "28506/65536" (see FIGS. 21 to 23). In the BB game state (generally, RB1, RB1 JACIN1 internal winning, RB1 JACIN2 internal winning, RB2, RB2 JACIN1 internal winning and RB2 JACIN2 internal winning), the result of the internal lottery process described below is "miss". The probability of being "0/65536" is set (that is, "miss" is not determined), and in the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning and JACIN2 internal winning), the probability of being "missing" is "37025/ 65536" (see FIGS. 21 to 23). However, since the BB game state (JACIN1 internal winning and JACIN2 internal winning) is a state in which JACIN1 or JACIN2 is carried over, the probability of being "missed" is set to "0/65536". It can also be said that it is set (that is, it is set so that “miss” is not determined).

In the BB gaming state (general), when the internal winning of JACIN1 described later is made, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning). In addition, when the internal winning of JACIN2 described later is made, the game state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning). Although not shown in FIG. 10, in the BB game state (RB1), the end condition of the BB game state (RB1) (RB1 game state) without internally winning either JACIN1 or JACIN2 ( For example, if the winning of the small winning combination has been performed eight times or the game has been performed 12 times), the game state is changed (returned) to the BB game state (general) again. Further, in the BB gaming state (RB2), without being internally won to either JACIN1 or JACIN2, the ending condition of the BB gaming state (RB2) (RB2 gaming state) (for example, 8 small winnings were won). Or that 12 games have been played), the game state is transferred (returned) to the BB game state (general) again.

In the BB game state (JACIN1 internal winning), when JACIN1 described later is established, the game state is shifted to the BB game state (RB1).

In the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning), when JACIN2 described later is established, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (RB2).

In the BB game state (RB1), when the internal winning of JACIN1 to be described later is won, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning of RB1). In addition, when the internal winning of JACIN2 described later is achieved, the game state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning in RB1).

In the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning in RB1), when the above-mentioned ending condition of the BB gaming state (RB1) (RB1 gaming state) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning).

In the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning in RB1), when the above-mentioned ending condition of the BB gaming state (RB1) (RB1 gaming state) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning).

In the BB gaming state (RB2), when the internal winning of JACIN1 to be described later is achieved, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning in RB2). Further, when the internal winning of JACIN2 described later is made, the game state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning in RB2).

In the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning in RB2), when the above-mentioned ending condition of the BB gaming state (RB2) (RB2 gaming state) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN1 internal winning).

In the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning in RB2), when the above-mentioned ending condition of the BB gaming state (RB2) (RB2 gaming state) is satisfied, the gaming state is shifted to the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning).

In any of the BB game states, if the ending condition of the BB game state (for example, the payout of more than 349 medals has been paid) is satisfied, the game state is shifted to RT0.

[Change of production state]
Next, an effect state of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. The main CPU 93, as the effect state of the pachi-slot machine 1, normally, during bonus, in special zone, during normal CZ, during ART preparation, during ART, during CZ during ART, during addition zone preparation, during addition zone, during CZ medium high accuracy. The chances and the effect states in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone are changed. Note that “CZ” is an abbreviation for “chance zone”, and indicates a game section with a high degree of expectation that is advantageous for the player (for example, shifts to ART or continues during ART).

<Normal>
Normally, the player is in a state of performing a normal game, and since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, the probability of shifting to the high RT game state (for example, RT3) is low and the number of payouts is large. It is a gaming section that is disadvantageous to the player, in which the probability of establishment of a symbol combination of a small winning combination (for example, "8 winning combinations 1" or "8 winning combinations 2" described later) is low.

The normal operation is performed after the above-described initial state is generated or the setting is changed. In addition, the process proceeds when the bonus game ends without the ART transition being determined (BB end (ART non-win)). In addition, the transition is made when the addition of the additional zone is not decided and the inside of the special zone ends (special zone failure). Further, when the normal CZ is completed without the ART transfer being determined, the transfer is made (CZ failure). In addition, the process shifts when the ART is finished (ART end).

Normally, when a BB described later is established, a transition is made to the bonus (BB establishment). In addition, normally, when the game state is RT3 and MB1 or MB2 is established, the game is moved to the special zone (special zone shift). In addition, normally, a CZ transition lottery is carried out, and when this CZ transition lottery is won, the routine shifts to CZ in the normal state (CZ transition). In addition, usually, an ART transfer lottery is performed, and when winning the ART transfer lottery, the ART preparation is performed and then the ART is transferred (ART transfer). Further, even if the player does not win the ART transfer lottery during the ART and does not move during the bonus, when the number of games reaches a prescribed number (for example, the number of ceiling games described later), After preparing for ART, shift to ART (shift to ART).

Normally, even if the player has won the CZ transition lottery, until the transition to the normal CZ (that is, until the number of precursor games described later becomes “0”) Further, when the CZ transition lottery is further performed and the CZ transition lottery is won again, the middle CZ is more advantageous (that is, the CZ management information described later is promoted).

<In bonus>
During the bonus, it is a production state showing the above-mentioned BB game state, and the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, but a small winning combination with a large number of payouts (for example, “9 winning combination 1” or “9” described later). Since the winning probability of the combination of the symbols of the "sheet combination 2") is high, the game section is advantageous for the player.

During the bonus, in any of the other effect states, when BB described later is established (BB establishment). In addition, in FIG. 11, during transition from the special zone to during the bonus, transition from ART preparation to bonus, transition from CZ during ART to bonus, and addition zone preparation from bonus The case of migration is omitted.

In the bonus transferred from the normal, if a predetermined condition (for example, the lock at the time of winning the BB described later has been executed) is satisfied, after the BB game state is finished, the additional zone is being prepared and the additional zone is being added. To (additional zone transfer). If a specific condition (for example, “overlapping with red, blue, and green” described later) is satisfied, after the BB game state is finished, the state of ART preparation is performed and the state of ART is transitioned (ART transition). In addition, when winning the ART transfer lottery (see FIG. 39 described later), after the BB game state is completed, the ART preparation is performed and then the ART is transferred (ART transfer). However, in the case where none of these is applicable, after the BB game state ends, the process shifts to normal (BB end (ART non-win)).

In addition, during the bonus transferred from the special zone, after the BB game state is completed, the additional zone is prepared and then the zone is switched to the additional zone (shift to additional zone). That is, in the special zone, when the player internally wins the BB, the transfer to the additional zone is settled.

In addition, during the bonus transferred from the normal CZ, after the BB game state is completed, the ART is prepared and the state is transferred to the ART (transfer to ART). That is, in the normal CZ, when the BB is internally won, the ART transfer is settled.

Further, during the ART preparation, during the ART or during the bonus transferred from the CZ during the ART, after the BB game state is finished, the ART preparation is performed and then the ART is transferred (ART return). In addition, during the addition zone preparation or during the bonus transferred from the addition zone, after the BB game state is finished, the addition zone is prepared and then the addition zone is entered (return to the addition zone).

<In special zone>
In the special zone, although the procedure of the stop operation, which is advantageous for the player, is not normally notified, the RT3 shift lip is established, the game state is shifted to RT3, and MB is established at this RT3. In case of transition (special zone transition).

In the special zone, since the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is notified, the high RT game state (for example, RT3) continues, and the small winning combination with a large number of payouts (for example, “8 winning combination 1” to be described later). Alternatively, it is a gaming section that is advantageous for the player, in which the probability of winning the combination of symbols of “8 winning combinations 2”) is high.

The special zone is an effect state that continues for 10 games. While the game is consumed by 10 games, the additional zone transfer lottery is performed, and when the additional zone transfer lottery is won, the special zone is transferred to the additional zone ( Additional zone transfer). On the other hand, when the additional zone transfer lottery is not won, the normal zone is transferred (special zone failure).

<Normal CZ>
During the normal CZ, since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified, the probability of transition to the high RT gaming state (for example, RT3) is low and the small winning combination with a large number of payouts (for example, “8 described later”). The winning probability of the combination of symbols of "single hand 1" or "8 second hand 2") is low, which is a disadvantageous game section for the player, but the expectation of shifting to ART during normal operation is higher than that. In a sense, it is a game section that is advantageous to the player.

In the normal CZ mode, the CZ transfer lottery is normally won, and the mode is transferred when the number of precursor games is exhausted (CZ transfer). During the normal CZ, there is a performance state that continues for at least 12 games. In the first game during the normal CZ, it is determined whether or not special addition of points, which will be described later, is performed, and the CZ end probability (described later). CZ continuation mode) to be performed is determined. In addition, in the 1st to 3rd games in the normal CZ, the CZ promotion lottery (CZ transition lottery) is performed as a CZ introduction state described later, and when the CZ promotion lottery is won, the medium CZ medium is more advantageous. (That is, the CZ management information described later is promoted).

In addition, in the fourth and subsequent games during the normal CZ, a point addition lottery is performed as a CZ execution state described later, and when the points reach a predetermined value (for example, “100”) or more before the normal CZ ends. , It is elected to move to ART, and after preparing for ART, moves to ART (transfer to ART). On the other hand, when the normal CZ is exhausted up to the 12th game without reaching the predetermined value or more, the CZ end lottery is performed according to the determined CZ end probability in the 13th game and thereafter. If you win the CZ end lottery before the number of points exceeds the predetermined value (that is, if you decide to end the CZ), the normal CZ will end and you will move to normal (CZ failure). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, during the ART, the continuation or the end thereof is managed by the ART management information which will be described later, but the ART management information is stocked after the fourth game in the normal CZ. When it is determined whether to store (store) and store the ART management information, and when it is determined to stock the ART management information, the determined ART management information is provisionally added (temporary stock). Then, when the ART management information is temporarily transferred, the provisionally added ART management information is permanently added (formally stocked) as ART management information and can be set in the ART. On the other hand, if the CZ fails, the provisionally added ART management information is cleared (initialized) and is not permanently added as ART management information.

That is, during the normal CZ, it is determined whether or not to shift to the ART, and whether or not to stock the ART management information used to control the continuation or the termination during the ART. It has become.

In addition, in the fourth game and after during the normal medium CZ, it is determined whether or not to shift to the CZ medium and high certainty chance and whether or not to shift to the CZ medium and high certainty zone.

(CZ middle and high probability chance)
The CZ medium-high probability chance shift is performed when the CZ medium-high probability chance transfer lottery is performed when the "push order bell B" described later is internally won in the normal CZ, and when the CZ medium-high probability chance transfer lottery is won. To do.

The CZ middle-high probability chance is a rendering state in which only one game continues, and in this CZ middle-high probability chance, regarding the first stop operation, among the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player for the “push order bell B” described later. Only the procedure of the stop operation is notified. When the "8-card combination 2" described later can be established, the CZ medium high-accuracy zone is entered, and when the "8-card combination 2" described later cannot be established, The CZ middle-high accuracy chance is ended without shifting to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone.

Here, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, for example, in the case of internally winning the "left center right bell B", the stop operation is performed at the "left first stop" and the stop operation is performed at the "center second stop". When the operation is performed, the combination of the symbols of "8-card combination 2" is displayed on the activated line, and when the internal winning is "Bell B in the left and right", the stop operation is "left first stop". When it is performed and the stop operation is performed by the "right second stop", the symbol combination of "8-sheet combination 2" is displayed on the activated line. That is, in the CZ middle-high accuracy chance, the procedure can be shifted to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone by correctly answering the stop operation procedure (two selections) of the second stop operation.

(In the CZ middle-high accuracy zone)
The CZ middle/high accuracy zone shift lottery is carried out during the normal medium CZ, and is shifted when the CZ middle/high accuracy zone shift lottery is won. Further, in the CZ middle-high probability chance, the process shifts when the stop operation is performed in the correct stop operation procedure as described above.

During the CZ middle-high accuracy zone, a maximum of four games are continued, and in this CZ middle-high accuracy zone, the point addition lottery is more advantageously performed than during the normal medium CZ. Further, during the CZ medium-high accuracy zone, the number of games in the normal medium CZ does not progress (that is, the “CZ counter” described later is not added). Further, in the CZ middle-high accuracy zone, the CZ middle-high accuracy zone end lottery is performed, and when the CZ middle-high accuracy zone end lottery is won (that is, when it is decided to end the CZ middle-high accuracy zone), When the CZ middle and high accuracy zone ends, the normal CZ shifts. On the other hand, if you can continue 4 games in the CZ middle-high accuracy zone without winning the CZ middle-high accuracy zone end lottery, points will always be added so that it will be equal to or more than the predetermined value, and the ART transfer will be performed. It is supposed to be confirmed.

It should be noted that even during the CZ medium-high accuracy zone, whether to provisionally provide ART management information is determined, and as the CZ medium-high accuracy zone progresses, more advantageous ART management can be performed. Information is provisionally added.

<Preparing for ART>
During the ART preparation, when it is decided to shift to ART, it is a production state in which the shift to ART (more specifically, shift to RT3) is waited, and a stop operation advantageous for the player. Since the procedure is notified, a small winning combination with a high transition rate to a high RT gaming state (for example, RT3) and a large number of payouts (for example, "8 winning combination 1" or "8 winning combination 2" described later) This is a game section advantageous for the player, in which the probability of winning the combination of symbols is high. During the ART preparation, if the RT3 shift lip is established and the game state shifts to RT3, shift to ART (shift to RT3).

<During ART>
During the ART, the player is in a production state in which the medals can be continuously increased along with the above-mentioned bonus, and since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, a high RT game state (for example, (RT3) continues and the winning probability of the combination of symbols of the small winning combination with a large payout number (for example, "8 winning combination 1" or "8 winning combination 2" described later) is high, which is an advantageous game section for the player. ..

During the ART preparation, during the ART preparation, the RT3 transition rip is established and the game state shifts to RT3 (RT3 shift). Also, the process moves when the addition zone ends (end of the addition zone). Further, the process shifts when the CZ during ART ends (CZ end).

During the ART, the ART management information given in another effect state (for example, during normal CZ, during CZ during ART, in the additional zone) is used, and according to the ART management information, payout of medals is performed. The number of times of notification of an advantageous stop operation procedure (the number of times of notification) is managed. For example, in the “ART management information 1” described below, the number of notifications possible is set to “5” times (for example, the initial value “5” of the “notification counter” described below), and the number of notifications is counted as a target combination. , “Pressing order bell A” and “Pressing order bell B” described later are associated with each other. Further, for example, in “ART management information 2” to be described later, the number of possible notifications is set to “5” times, and the “press order bell A” to be described later is associated as the counting target combination. Further, for example, in the “ART management information 3” described later, the number of possible notifications is set to “5” times, and the “pressing bell B” described later is associated as the counting target combination. Further, for example, in “ART management information 4” to be described later, the number of notifications that can be notified is set to “50” times, and the “pressing order bell A” and the “pressing order bell B” described below are associated with each other as the counting target combination. ing.

Further, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, the "push order bell A" is determined as the internal winning combination with a higher probability than the "push order bell B". Therefore, when "ART management information 1" described later is set during ART, the number of notifications is exhausted most quickly and the number of paid-out medals is minimized. Further, when "ART management information 2" described later is set, the notification count is exhausted by the amount corresponding to the "push order bell B", and the number of medals paid out increases. Further, when "ART management information 3" described later is set, the notification count is exhausted by the amount of "push order bell A", and the number of paid-out medals is increased. Further, when "ART management information 4" described later is set, the number of notifications is exhausted more and the number of medals to be paid out increases as the number of notifications possible increases. In this way, the number of medals to be increased and the ending time of the ART can be changed by changing the number of possible notifications or the winning combination to be counted.

In addition, during ART, a CZ transition lottery is carried out, and when winning the CZ transition lottery, it shifts to CZ during ART (CZ transition). In addition, even if the CZ transition lottery is not won during the ART, if the number of winnings of the replay combination reaches a prescribed number (for example, the number of CZ ceiling replays described later), the CZ during the ART (Transition to CZ).
In addition, during the ART, an additional zone transfer lottery is carried out. When the additional zone transfer lottery is won, the player moves to the additional zone (transfer to the additional zone).

Even during the CZ transition lottery during ART, until the transition to CZ during ART (that is, until the number of precursor games to be described later becomes “0”), the precursor state is maintained. In the above, when the CZ transition lottery is further performed and the CZ transition lottery is won again, the CZ during ART becomes more advantageous (that is, the CZ management information described later is promoted).

<In CZ during ART>
During the CZ during ART, the player can continuously increase the number of medals together with the above-mentioned ART, and since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the high RT game state ( For example, RT3) continues and the winning probability of the combination of symbols of the small winning combination with a large payout number (for example, "8 winning combination 1" or "8 winning combination 2" described later) is high, which is advantageous for the player. In addition, since there is a high expectation that ART management information to be described later will be added, this is a more advantageous game section for the player. The CZ during ART has basically the same configuration as the CZ during normal, and whether or not the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is informed, or whether or not the ART transition itself is determined. Different in

During the ART, the CZ shifts to the CZ shift lottery during the ART or when the number of winnings of the replay combination reaches a prescribed number and the precursor game number is exhausted (CZ shift). During CZ during ART, there is a production state that continues for at least 12 games. In the first game during CZ during ART, whether or not to perform special addition of points to be described later is determined and the end probability of CZ (to be described later). CZ continuation mode) to be performed is determined. In addition, in the first to third games in the CZ during ART, the CZ promotion lottery (CZ transition lottery) is performed as a CZ introduction state described later, and when the CZ promotion lottery is won, the CZ during ART is more advantageous. (That is, the CZ management information described later is promoted).

In addition, in the fourth and subsequent games during the CZ during ART, a point addition lottery is performed as a CZ execution state described later, and when the points reach a predetermined value (for example, “100”) or more before the CZ during ART ends. , ART management information is added to end ARTCZ, and the process shifts to ART (CZ end). On the other hand, when the CZ during ART is exhausted up to the 12th game without the points exceeding the predetermined value, the CZ end lottery is performed in the 13th game and thereafter according to the determined CZ end probability. If you win the CZ end lottery before the points become equal to or higher than the predetermined value (that is, if you decide to end the CZ), the ART management information will not be added and the ARTCZ will end Shift to (end of CZ).

In addition, after the fourth game in the CZ during ART, it is determined whether or not to shift to the CZ middle-high accuracy chance and whether to shift to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone. Since the CZ medium-high accuracy chance and the CZ medium-high accuracy zone have the same configurations as those in the normal medium CZ, the description thereof is omitted here.

<Preparing for additional zone>
During preparation for the additional zone, when it is decided to transition to the additional zone, it is a production state in which it waits for transition to the additional zone (more specifically, transition to RT3), which is advantageous for the player. Since the procedure of the stop operation is notified, a small winning combination with a high transition probability to a high RT gaming state (for example, RT3) and a large payout number (for example, “8 winning combinations 1” or “8 winning combinations” to be described later). 2)) is a game section that is advantageous for the player because the probability of winning the combination of symbols is high. When the RT3 shift lip is established and the game state shifts to RT3 while the additional zone is being prepared, the mode shifts to the additional zone (RT3 shift).

<In the additional zone>
During the additional zone, the player can continuously increase medals along with the above-mentioned ART, and since the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified, the high RT game state (for example, , RT3) continues, and the winning probability of the combination of symbols of the small winning combination (for example, "8 winning combination 1" or "8 winning combination 2" described later) is high, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, since there is a high expectation that ART management information, which will be described later, will be added, this is a more advantageous game section for the player.

In the special zone, the transition to the additional zone is performed when the additional zone transition lottery is won (transition to the additional zone). In addition, during the ART, when the player wins the additional zone transfer lottery, the transfer is performed (transfer to the additional zone). During the add-on zone, the production state continues for 7 games. While the game is consumed by 7 games, the ART management information is added to the lottery, and when the addition lottery is won, the ART management information is added. At the same time, the additional lottery for 7 games can be performed again (that is, as long as the ART management information is added, the additional zone for one set of 7 games is looped and continues). On the other hand, when the addition of the ART management information is not won, the addition of the ART management information ends and the process shifts to ART (end of the addition zone).

In addition, in the additional zone, even if you do not win the additional lottery of the ART management information while playing the game for seven games, at least once if the addition of the ART management information is guaranteed. Is designed to add ART management information.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the player basically starts the game from the normal state and shifts from the normal state to the ART state through the CZ during the normal state, the bonus period, or the special zone, and during the ART period. , It is expected that the number of continuations during ART (that is, ART management information) will be increased by shifting to the bonus zone, CZ during ART, or during the extra zone, and the advantageous state advantageous for the player will continue for a longer time. To play games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as the number of notifications that can be performed during the ART, the number of notifications in which an advantageous stop operation procedure is notified when the count target combination is internally won is adopted, but the number of notifications is not limited to this. Absent. For example, the number of games in which an advantageous stop operation procedure can be notified may be adopted as the number of times of notification during ART. Specifically, when "ART management information 1" which will be described later is set, "20" is defined as the number of games, and when "ART management information 2" which is described later is set, the game is played. When "30" is specified as the number of times and "ART management information 3" which will be described later is set, when "70" is specified as the number of games and "ART management information 4" which is described later is set Alternatively, "180" may be defined as the number of games.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the number of continuations during ART is determined by the number of ART management information that can be set (that is, the number of ART management information stocks described below), the number of notifications that can be set in the set ART management information, and the counting target role. The management method is adopted, but the method is not limited to this. For example, information (continuation rate) for determining whether or not to continue the ART is set in the set ART management information, and when the number of notifications reaches the number of notifications possible, according to this information , It is decided by lottery whether or not to continue the ART, and when it is decided to continue the ART, it is possible to continue the ART by resetting the number of notifications again and not to continue the ART. If determined, the ART may be ended.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, in the normal CZ, the ART transition lottery and the ART management information provisional lottery are performed, and when the ART transition lottery is won, the ART management information is permanently attached. In this ART transfer lottery, it may be simply to determine whether or not the ART management information is permanently attached. Also, for example, normally, an ART transition lottery is performed, and when the ART transition lottery is won, the ART transition lottery is performed. However, in this ART transition lottery, whether the ART management information is simply added is determined. It may be decided. That is, when the ART management information is added and the ART management information can be set, it is moved to the ART state or the ART state is continued, and when the ART management information is not set, It is also possible not to shift to ART or to end ART.

[Data table stored in main ROM]
Next, various data tables stored in the main ROM 94 will be described with reference to FIGS.

<Design placement table>
The symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 12 represents an arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbol arrangement table defines a correspondence relationship between 20 symbol positions (symbol position data) “0” to “19” and symbols corresponding to each of these symbol positions.

The symbol positions “0” to “19” indicate the positions of the symbols arranged along the rotation direction in each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R. The symbols corresponding to the symbol positions “0” to “19” can be specified by referring to the symbol arrangement table using the value of the symbol counter.

As the types of symbols, "red 7", "white 7", "red blank", "blue blank", "green blank", "bell", "replay", "red special", "blue special" and " Includes "green special".

The “red 7” design is colored red and, for example, a transmissive region through which a part of the light emitted from the reel LED is transmitted is provided, or a design drawn larger than other designs. Therefore, when the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are rotated and stopped, the pattern is easily visible to the player. Further, the "white 7" symbol is a symbol that is colored in white and is provided with, for example, the above-described transparent region, or is drawn larger than other symbols, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. At the time of rotation and stop, the pattern is easily visible to the player.

Further, the "red blank" design is colored with red, but is, for example, a design that is not provided with the above-mentioned transparent region or is drawn smaller than other designs, and at least the reel. At the time of rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R, the pattern is hard to be visually recognized by the player. Further, the "blue blank" design is colored with blue, but is, for example, a design that is not provided with the above-mentioned transparent region or is drawn smaller than other designs, and at least the reel. At the time of rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R, the pattern is hard to be visually recognized by the player. Further, the "green blank" design is colored with green, but is, for example, a design that is not provided with the above-mentioned transparent region or is drawn smaller than other designs, and at least the reel. At the time of rotation of 3L, 3C, 3R, the pattern is hard to be visually recognized by the player.

Further, the "bell" pattern is colored yellow, but for example, the above-mentioned transparent region is not provided, or is a pattern drawn smaller than other patterns, and at least the reel 3L. , 3C, 3R are rotated, the pattern is hard to be visually recognized by the player. Further, the "replay" symbol is colored in blue, but is, for example, a symbol that is not provided with the above-mentioned transparent region or is drawn smaller than other symbols, and at least the reel 3L. , 3C, 3R are rotated, the pattern is hard to be visually recognized by the player.

Further, the "red special" design is a design that is colored red and is provided with, for example, the above-described transparent region, or is drawn larger than other designs, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. At the time of rotation and stop, the pattern is easily visible to the player. Further, the "blue special" symbol is a symbol which is colored blue and is provided with, for example, the above-mentioned transparent region or is drawn larger than other symbols, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. At the time of rotation and stop, the pattern is easily visible to the player. Further, the "green special" design is a design that is colored green and is provided with the above-described transparent region, or is drawn larger than other designs, and the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. At the time of rotation and stop, the pattern is easily visible to the player.

<Design code table>
As shown in FIG. 13, each symbol arranged on each reel 3L, 3C, 3R is distinguished by 1 byte (8 bits) data shown in the symbol code table. The symbol code table shown in FIG. 13 represents a symbol code as data for specifying the type of symbol arranged on the surfaces of the three reels 3L, 3C, 3R.

For example, the symbol arrangement table shown in FIG. 12 has been described as indicating the arrangement of symbols arranged on the surface of each of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C and the right reel 3R, but is actually stored in the main ROM 94. The symbol arrangement table that is shown represents an array of symbol codes that specify the symbols arranged on the surfaces of the left reel 3L, the middle reel 3C, and the right reel 3R.

In the present embodiment, the symbols used in the pachi-slot machine 1 are, as described above, "red 7", "white 7", "red blank", "blue blank", "green blank", "bell", "replay", There are 10 types of "red special", "blue special" and "green special".

In the symbol code table, for example, "1" (00000001) is assigned as the symbol code for the "red 7" symbol, and "2" (00000010) is assigned as the symbol code for the "white 7" symbol.

Similarly, "red blank" design, "blue blank" design, "green blank" design, "bell" design, "replay" design, "red special" design, "blue special" design and "green special" design Codes "3" to "10" are respectively assigned.

<Design combination table>
In the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 14 to 18, the winning operation flag and the payout number are associated with the symbol combination identified by the storage area identification data represented by 34 bytes.

The winning operation flag is a winning or operated winning combination (a winning combination is referred to as a "winning combination", an activated combination is referred to as an "operating combination", and they are collectively referred to as a "display combination" or a "established combination". Further, it may be simply referred to as a "winning combination"), which is data assigned corresponding to a unique symbol combination for representing 1 byte (8 bits) of data. The storage area type is data for distinguishing 1-byte data. A combination of symbols related to a winning combination or an operating combination is identified by the storage area type and 1-byte data.

In the symbol combination tables shown in FIGS. 14 to 18, names (contents) are associated with combinations of symbols relating to winning combinations or operating combinations to facilitate understanding of the invention.

The payout number is data indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the player, corresponding to the combination of each symbol related to the winning combination or the operating combination. When the combination of symbols displayed on the activated line matches the “combination of symbols” in the symbol combination table, the payout of medals by driving the hopper device 51 or the number of credits is counted based on the corresponding number of payouts. The credit counter is added.

14 to 16 show a symbol combination table relating to a bonus combination, a replay combination, and the like. When the symbol combination shown in FIGS. 14 to 16 is displayed on the activated line, no medals are paid out, but the bonus or re-game is activated (established), or the game state is changed.

As shown in FIGS. 14 to 16, when "red 7-red 7-red 7" indicating the combination of symbols "BB" is displayed on the activated line, no medals are paid out, but BB is Since it has been established, the general game state (RT4) shifts to the BB game state (general).

Further, when "Replay-Replay-Bell" indicating the combination of the symbols "MB1" is displayed on the activated line, there is no payout of medals, but it means that MB1 has been established and the general gaming state (RT0 to RT0). It shifts from RT3) to the MB game state (RT0 to RT3).

Also, when "Bell-Replay-Red Blank" showing the combination of symbols "MB2-1" is displayed on the activated line, no medals are paid out, but MB2 has been established, and the general gaming state. The state shifts from (RT0 to RT3) to the MB gaming state (RT0 to RT3). The same applies when a combination of symbols "MB2-2" is displayed on the activated line. Since the combinations of the symbols "MB2-1" and "MB2-2" have the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combination "MB2".

Also, when "Replay-Red 7-Red Blank" indicating the combination of symbols of "JACIN1-1" is displayed on the activated line, no medal is paid out, but JACIN1 is established, and the BB game is achieved. The state (JACIN1 internal winning) is transferred to the BB game state (RB1). The same applies when a combination of symbols "JACIN1-2" to "JACIN1-6" is displayed on the activated line. Since the combinations of the symbols "JACIN1-1" to "JACIN1-6" have the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations "JACIN1".

Also, when "Replay-Red 7-Bell" showing the combination of symbols of "JACIN2-1" is displayed on the activated line, no medal is paid out, but JACIN2 is established, and the BB game state. From (JACIN2 internal winning) to the BB game state (RB2). The same applies when a combination of symbols "JACIN2-2" and "JACIN2-3" is displayed on the activated line. Since the combinations of the symbols "JACIN2-1" to "JACIN2-3" have the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations "JACIN2".

Further, when "white 7-white 7-red blank" indicating the combination of symbols of "BB middle lip A1-1" is displayed on the activated line, no medal is paid out, but the replay combination is established. This means that the next game can be played again. "BB middle lip A1-2", "BB middle lip A2-1" to "BB middle lip A2-4", "BB middle lip A3-1" to "BB middle lip A3-4" and "BB middle lip A4" The same applies when a combination of the symbols "-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8" is displayed on the activated line. It should be noted that "BB middle lip A1-1", "BB middle lip A1-2", "BB middle lip A2-1" to "BB middle lip A2-4", "BB middle lip A3-1" to "BB middle lip" Lip A3-4" and "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8" have a similar function, so they are collectively referred to as "BB middle lip A". It can also be called a combination of designs.

Also, when "White 7-White 7-White 7" indicating the combination of the symbols of "BB middle lip B1" is displayed on the activated line, the medal is not paid out, but the replay combination is established. The next game will be replayed. "BB middle lip B2-1", "BB middle lip B2-2", "BB middle lip B3-1", "BB middle lip B3-2" and "BB middle lip B4-1" to "BB middle lip B4" The same applies when a combination of symbols "-4" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "lip in BB B1", "lip in BB B2-1", "lip in BB B2-2", "lip in BB B3-1", "lip in BB B3-2" and "lip in BB B4" Since the combination of the symbols "-1" to "lip B4-4 in BB" has the same function, it can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols "lip B in BB".

Also, when "Red Special-White 7-Green Special", which indicates the combination of symbols of "BB Middle Lip C1", is displayed on the activated line, there is no medal payout, but the replay combination has been established. The next game will be replayed. The same applies when a combination of symbols "BB middle lip C2-1" and "BB middle lip C2-2" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, since the combination of the symbols "BB middle lip C1", "BB middle lip C2-1" and "BB middle lip C2-2" have the same function, they are collectively referred to as "BB middle lip". It can also be called a combination of symbols "C".

Also, when "Replay-Replay-Replay" indicating the combination of symbols of "Normal Rep" is displayed on the activated line, there is no medal payout, but the replay combination has been established, and in the next game. You will be able to play again.

Further, when "Red Special-Replay-Bell" indicating the combination of the symbols of "Special Lip A1" is displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals is not made, but the replay combination is established, and the next time Replaying can be performed in the game. "Special Lip A2-1", "Special Lip A2-2", "Special Lip A3-1" to "Special Lip A3-6" and "Special Lip A4-1" to "Special Lip A4-3" The same applies when a combination of is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "special lip A1", "special lip A2-1", "special lip A2-2", "special lip A3-1" to "special lip A3-6" and "special lip A4-1" to "special" Since the combination of the symbols of the “lip A4-3” has the same function, it can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of the “special lip A”.

Further, when "Replay-Blue Special-Bell" indicating the combination of the symbols of "Special Lip B1" is displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals is not made, but the replay combination is established, and the next time. It is possible to replay the game. The same applies when a combination of symbols "special lip B2-1" to "special lip B2-3" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, since the combination of the symbols of "special lip B1" and "special lip B2-1" to "special lip B2-3" have the same function, the symbols of "special lip B" are collectively referred to. It can also be called a combination of.

Further, when "Replay-Replay-Green Special" indicating the combination of the symbols of "Special Lip C1" is displayed on the activated line, no medals are paid out, but the replay combination is established, and the next time It is possible to replay the game. "Special Lip C2-1", "Special Lip C2-2", "Special Lip C3-1" to "Special Lip C3-3", "Special Lip C4-1", "Special Lip C4-2", "Special" The same is true when a combination of the symbols "lip C5-1" and "special lip C5-2" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "special lip C1", "special lip C2-1", "special lip C2-2", "special lip C3-1" to "special lip C3-3", "special lip C4-1", "special lip" Lip C4-2", "special lip C5-1" and "special lip C5-2" each symbol combination has a similar function, so it is generically called "special lip C" symbol combination Can be said.

Further, when "Red Special-Blue Special-Red Blank" indicating the combination of symbols of "Special Lip D1-1" is displayed on the activated line, no medal is paid out, but the replay combination is established. Then, the next game can be played again. "Special Lip D1-2", "Special Lip D2-1", "Special Lip D2-2", "Special Lip D3-1" to "Special Lip D3-4" and "Special Lip D4-1" to "Special The same applies when a combination of the symbols “Dp4-6” is displayed on the activated line. Note that "special lip D1-1", "special lip D1-2", "special lip D2-1", "special lip D2-2", "special lip D3-1" to "special lip D3-4", and Since the symbol combinations of "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6" have similar functions, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "special lip D".

Also, when "Red Special-Replay-Green Special", which indicates the combination of symbols of "Special Lip E1", is displayed on the activated line, no medal is paid out, but the replay combination has been established, and the next time. Replay can be performed in this game. "Special Lip E2-1" to "Special Lip E2-6", "Special Lip E3-1" to "Special Lip E3-4", "Special Lip E4-1" to "Special Lip E4-3", "Special" The same is true when a combination of the symbols "Rip E5-1" to "Special Lip E5-18" and "Special Lip E6-1" to "Special Lip E6-3" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "special lip E1", "special lip E2-1" to "special lip E2-6", "special lip E3-1" to "special lip E3-4", "special lip E4-1" to "special" Lip E4-3", "Special Lip E5-1" to "Special Lip E5-18" and "Special Lip E6-1" to "Special Lip E6-3" are combinations of symbols having the same function. Because of this, it can be collectively referred to as a combination of symbols of "special lip E".

Also, when "Replay-Blue Special-Green Special" indicating the combination of the symbols of "Special Lip F1" is displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals is not made, but the replay combination is established, and the next time. Replay can be performed in this game. "Special Lip F2", "Special Lip F3-1" to "Special Lip F3-3", "Special Lip F4-1" to "Special Lip F4-3" and "Special Lip F5-1" to "Special Lip F5" The same applies when a combination of symbols "-3" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "special lip F1", "special lip F2", "special lip F3-1" to "special lip F3-3", "special lip F4-1" to "special lip F4-3" and "special lip F5" Since the symbol combinations of "-1" to "special lip F5-3" have similar functions, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combination of "special lip F".

Further, when "Bell-Bell-Red Blank" indicating the combination of symbols of "RT1 transition lip 1-1" is displayed on the activated line, no medal is paid out, but the replay combination is established. The next game will be replayed. In addition, in the general game state (RT2) and the general game state (RT3), when the symbol combination of "RT1 shift rep 1-1" is displayed on the activated line, the game is shifted to the general game state (RT1). .. The same applies when a combination of symbols "RT1 transition lip 1-2" and "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, the combination of each symbol of "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2" and "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6" has the same function. Because of this, it can be collectively referred to as a combination of the symbols of "RT1 transition lip".

Further, when "White 7-Replay-Red blank" showing the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition rip 1" is displayed on the activated line, the medal is not paid out, but the replay combination is established, The next game can be played again. Further, in the general gaming state (RT1), when the symbol combination of "RT2 shift rip 1" is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the general gaming state (RT2). The same applies when a combination of symbols "RT2 transition lip 2" to "RT2 transition lip 6" is displayed on the activated line. Since the combinations of the symbols "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6" have the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combinations of "RT2 transition lip".

Further, when "Bell-Replay-Green Special" showing the combination of the symbols of "RT3 transition lip" is displayed on the activated line, the payout of medals is not made, but the replay combination is established, and the next time. It is possible to replay the game. Further, in the general gaming state (RT2), when the combination of symbols "RT3 shift rep" is displayed on the activated line, the gaming state shifts to the general gaming state (RT3).

Further, when "Replay-Red Blank-Bell" indicating the combination of the symbols of "RT1 transition symbol 1-1" is displayed on the activated line, none of the winning combination is achieved, but the general gaming state (RT0) , In the general game state (RT2) and the general game state (RT3), when the combination of symbols "RT1 transition symbol 1-1" is displayed on the activated line, the game state shifts to the general game state (RT1). The same applies when a combination of the symbols "RT1 transition symbol 1-2" and "RT1 transition symbol 2" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, since the combination of the respective symbols of "RT1 transition symbol 1-1", "RT1 transition symbol 1-2" and "RT1 transition symbol 2" has the same function, they are collectively referred to as "RT1 transition symbol". It can also be called a combination of symbols.

FIG. 17 and FIG. 18 show a symbol combination table relating to a small winning combination. When the symbol combination shown in FIGS. 17 and 18 is displayed on the activated line, the payout number of medals associated with the symbol combination and the inserted number is paid out.

In this embodiment, in any game state, the game can be played only when the inserted number is three. However, the number of coins that can be played is not limited to this. For example, in the MB game state, the BB game state (RB1) or the BB game state (RB2), the game may be enabled only when the number of inserted coins is two. Further, in the general game state or the BB game state (general), the game may be made possible regardless of whether the number of inserted coins is two or three. ..

As shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, when “Replay-Replay-Red Blank” indicating the combination of symbols of “9-card combination 1” is displayed on the activated line, 9 medals are paid out. At this time, in the display window 4, the "bell" symbol is displayed in the upper area facing each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (that is, the "bell" is aligned on the top line), and the player has a small role. It is shown that it was established. The same applies to the case where the symbol combination “9-card combination 2” is displayed on the activated line. Since the combination of symbols "9-card combination 1" and "9-card combination 2" has the same function, it can be generically called a combination of symbols "9-card combination".

When "red 7-blue special-red 7" indicating the combination of symbols of "common combination 1" is displayed on the activated line, three medals are paid out. At this time, in the display window 4, the "bell" symbol is displayed in the lower area facing each of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R (that is, the "bell" is aligned on the bottom line), and the player has a small role. It is shown that it was established. The same applies when a combination of symbols "common combination 2" to "common combination 6" is displayed on the activated line. Since the combination of the symbols "common combination 1" to "common combination 6" has the same function, they may be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols "common combination".

Further, when "Bell-Bell-Bell" indicating the combination of symbols of "8 coin combination 1" is displayed on the activated line, 8 medals are paid out. Further, when "Bell-Bell-Green Special" indicating the combination of the symbols of "Eight coins 2" is displayed on the activated line, eight medals are paid out. The symbol combination displayed on the reel 3R differs between the symbol combination of "8-card combination 1" and the symbol combination of "8-card combination 2", and the symbols displayed on the reels 3L and 3C are the same. However, it is sufficient that the symbols on at least one or more reels are different, for example, the symbols displayed on the reels 3L and 3R are different, and the symbols displayed on the reel 3C may be the same, or all the reels. The symbols displayed on may be different.

Also, when "Replay-Bell-Red 7" indicating the combination of symbols of "11-card combination 1-1" is displayed on the activated line, 11 medals are paid out. At this time, in the display window 4, the "bell" symbol is displayed in the upper area facing the reel 3L, in the middle area facing the reel 3C, and in the lower area facing the reel 3R ( That is, the "bells" are lined up on the cross-down line), and it is indicated that the player has a small win. The same applies when a combination of symbols "11-card combination 1-2" to "11-card combination 1-6" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, when "red 7-bell-red blank" indicating a combination of symbols of "11-card combination 2-1" is displayed on the activated line, 11 medals are paid out. At this time, in the display window 4, the "bell" symbol is displayed in the lower area facing the reel 3L, in the middle area facing the reel 3C, and in the upper area facing the reel 3R ( That is, the "bells" are lined up on the cross-up line), and it is indicated that the player has a small win. The same applies when a combination of symbols "11-card combination 2-2" to "11-card combination 2-4" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, the combination of the symbols "11-card combination 1-1" to "11-card combination 1-6" and "11-card combination 2-1" to "11-card combination 2-4" has the same function. Because of this, it can be collectively referred to as a combination of symbols of "11-card combination".

Further, when "Replay-Blue Special-Red 7" indicating the combination of symbols of "10-card combination 1" is displayed on the activated line, 10 medals are paid out. The same applies when a combination of symbols of "10-card combination 2" to "10-card combination 6" is displayed on the activated line. Since the symbol combinations of "10-card combination 1" to "10-card combination 6" have similar functions, they can be collectively referred to as "10-card combination" symbol combinations.

When "Replay-red blank-red blank" indicating the combination of symbols of "one-card combination A1-1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. "1 sheet combination A1-2", "1 sheet combination A2-1", "1 sheet combination A2-2", "1 sheet combination A3-1", "1 sheet combination A3-2", "1 sheet combination A4" -1", "1 sheet combination A4-2", "1 sheet combination A5-1", "1 sheet combination A5-2", "1 sheet combination A6-1" and "1 sheet combination A6-2" The same applies when a combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "1 sheet combination A1-1", "1 sheet combination A1-2", "1 sheet combination A2-1", "1 sheet combination A2-2", "1 sheet combination A3-1", "1 sheet" Role A3-2", "One Role A4-1", "One Role A4-2", "One Role A5-1", "One Role A5-2", "One Role A6-1". Since the combination of the symbols of "1 sheet combination A6-2" has the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "1 sheet combination A".

Further, when "Red 7-Red Blank-Bell" indicating the combination of symbols of "1 sheet combination B1-1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. "1 sheet combination B1-2", "1 sheet combination B2-1", "1 sheet combination B2-2", "1 sheet combination B3-1", "1 sheet combination B3-2", "1 sheet combination B4" -1", "1 role B4-2", "1 role B5-1", "1 role B5-2", "1 role B6-1" and "1 role B6-2" The same applies when a combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line. In addition, "1 sheet combination B1-1", "1 sheet combination B1-2", "1 sheet combination B2-1", "1 sheet combination B2-2", "1 sheet combination B3-1", "1 sheet" Role B3-2", "One role B4-1", "One role B4-2", "One role B5-1", "One role B5-2", "One role B6-1" Since the combination of the symbols of "1 sheet combination B6-2" has the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "1 sheet combination B".

Further, when "Red 7-Replay-Replay" indicating the combination of the symbols of "1 coin combination C1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. Of "1 sheet combination C2-1", "1 sheet combination C2-2", "1 sheet combination C3", "1 sheet combination C4", "1 sheet combination C5-1" and "1 sheet combination C5-2" The same applies when a combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line. It should be noted that "1 sheet combination C1", "1 sheet combination C2-1", "1 sheet combination C2-2", "1 sheet combination C3", "1 sheet combination C4", "1 sheet combination C5-1" and Since the combination of the symbols of "single hand combination C5-2" has the same function, it may be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols of "single hand combination C".

Further, when "bell-red blank-red blank" indicating a combination of symbols of "one-card combination D1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to the case where the combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination D2" to "1 sheet combination D4" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, since the combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination D1" to "1 sheet combination D4" has the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination D".

Further, when "white 7-bell-red blank" indicating a combination of symbols of "one-card combination E1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. The same applies to the case where the combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination E2" to "1 sheet combination E6" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, since the combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination E1" to "1 sheet combination E6" has the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the symbol combination of "1 sheet combination E".

Further, when "Red 7-Red 7-Bell" indicating the combination of symbols of "1 sheet combination F1-1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. Also when a combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination F1-2" to "1 sheet combination F1-6" and "1 sheet combination F2-1" to "1 sheet combination F2-6" is displayed on the activated line. The same is true. In addition, the combination of each symbol of "1 sheet combination F1-1" to "1 sheet combination F1-6" and "1 sheet combination F2-1" to "1 sheet combination F2-6" has the same function. Because of this, it can be collectively referred to as a combination of symbols of "one-sheet hand F".

Further, when "Replay-Red blank-Green special" indicating the combination of symbols of "1 sheet combination G1-1" is displayed on the activated line, 1 medal is paid out. "1 sheet combination G1-2", "1 sheet combination G2", "1 sheet combination G3-1" to "1 sheet combination G3-3", "1 sheet combination G4-1" and "1 sheet combination G4-2" The same applies when a combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line. It should be noted that "1 sheet combination G1-1", "1 sheet combination G1-2", "1 sheet combination G2", "1 sheet combination G3-1" to "1 sheet combination G3-3", "1 sheet combination G4" Since the combination of the symbols "-1" and "1 sheet combination G4-2" has the same function, they can be collectively referred to as the combination of the symbols "1 sheet combination G".

Further, when "red special-blue special-green special" indicating a combination of symbols of "one-card combination H1" is displayed on the activated line, one medal is paid out. "1 sheet combination H2-1" to "1 sheet combination H2-6", "1 sheet combination H3-1" to "1 sheet combination H3-9", "1 sheet combination H4-1" to "1 sheet combination H4" The same applies when a combination of the symbols "-9", "1 sheet combination H5" and "1 sheet combination H6" is displayed on the activated line. It should be noted that "1 sheet combination H1", "1 sheet combination H2-1" to "1 sheet combination H2-6", "1 sheet combination H3-1" to "1 sheet combination H3-9", "1 sheet combination H4" -1" to "1 sheet combination H4-9", "1 sheet combination H5" and "1 sheet combination H6" have a similar function, so they are collectively referred to as "1 sheet combination". It can also be called a combination of H symbols.

In addition, in the present embodiment, with respect to the combination of symbols relating to the bonus combination, the combination of symbols relating to the replay combination, and the combination of symbols relating to the small combination, the above-mentioned names are given so that they can be distinguished from others, The name does not necessarily limit the role of the combination of the symbols.

Further, without providing the symbol combination table shown in FIGS. 14 to 18, for example, by using the symbol code shown in FIG. 13, the main CPU 93 performs control for identifying the symbol combination displayed on the activated line. May be. That is, the main CPU 93 only needs to be able to identify the symbol combination displayed on the activated line, and the control method is not limited to the one using the symbol combination table.

<Internal lottery table>
In the internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 23, lottery values and data pointers for each gaming state are associated with the winning numbers. The internal lottery table is usually stored in the main ROM 94 for each set value (for example, set values 1 to 6) of the pachi-slot machine 1. However, in the present embodiment, for convenience of explanation, an internal lottery table in which one set value (for example, set value 1) is defined will be used for description.

In the present embodiment, a random number value (random number value for lottery) extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is sequentially subtracted by a lottery value corresponding to each winning number, and the result of the subtraction is negative. An internal lottery is carried out by determining whether or not it has occurred (whether a so-called "carriage" has occurred).

Therefore, the larger the numerical value defined as the lottery value, the higher the probability that the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is determined. When "0" is defined as the lottery value, the data pointer (that is, the internal winning combination) associated with the winning number is not determined in the game state (that is, the lottery). It will not be). When the number of times of the determination process as to whether or not the result of the subtraction becomes negative exceeds the number of winning numbers, the result of the internal lottery process becomes “miss”.

The winning probability of each winning number can be represented by “lottery value corresponding to each winning number/the number of all random number values that may be extracted (65536)”. In the present embodiment, by varying the lottery value associated with a part or all of the winning numbers for each gaming state, the type of internal winning combination to be determined and the winning probability are changed, and as a result, the player I try to create ups and downs in my expectations.

The data pointer is data acquired as a result of the lottery performed by referring to the internal lottery table, and is data for designating an internal winning combination defined by an internal winning combination determination table described later.

That is, the data pointer is data used for determining the storage area type and 1-byte data in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determining table shown in FIG. 24 and the bonus internal winning combination determining table shown in FIG. is there. As the data pointer, a small win/replay data pointer and a bonus data pointer are individually defined corresponding to each winning number.

In addition, the method of the internal lottery process is not limited to the above-described method, and for example, a lottery random number value extracted from a predetermined numerical value range “0 to 65535” is selected according to each winning number. The internal lottery may be performed by sequentially adding the values and determining whether or not the result of the addition is a predetermined value (for example, whether or not the value is a predetermined value or more for each winning number).

Further, without providing the internal lottery tables shown in FIGS. 19 to 23, for example, the main CPU 93 may perform a predetermined calculation on the random number for lottery to perform control to determine the internal winning combination. .. That is, the main CPU 93 only needs to be able to determine the internal winning combination based on the extracted random number value for lottery, and its control method is not limited to the one using the internal lottery table.

(Internal lottery table for general gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 19, the internal gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the regular gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in RT0, RT1, RT2, RT3 and RT4. In the internal gaming state internal lottery table, the replay winning combination is won in the winning numbers "1" to "23", the small winning combination is winning in the winning numbers "24" to "36", and the winning numbers "37" to "50". In, the bonus combination (BB, MB1 or MB2) is configured to be won alone or in duplicate with the replay combination or the small combination.

In the internal gaming state internal lottery table, at least some of the lottery values defined by the winning numbers “1” to “23” are different for each of RT0 to RT4. In other words, the type and winning probability of the replay combination randomly selected in each of RT0 to RT4 are changed. At RT0, a lottery value “7198” is defined for the winning number “1”, a lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “2” to “12”, and a lottery value “897” is defined for the winning number “13”. Is defined, the winning number "14" is defined as a lottery value "445", the winning number "15" is defined as a lottery value "219", and the winning numbers "16" and "17" are defined as lottery values. "54" is defined, the winning numbers "18" and "19" are defined as a lottery value "27", and the winning numbers "20" to "23" are defined as a lottery value "0".

In RT1, the winning number “1” is defined as a lottery value “0”, the winning numbers “2” to “7” are defined as a lottery value “1200”, and the winning numbers “8” to “23” are defined. Has the same lottery value as RT0.

In RT2, the lottery numbers “1” to “7” are defined by the lottery value “0”, the lottery numbers “8” to “12” are defined by the lottery value “3280”, and the win number “13”. The same lottery value as RT0 is defined for "23".

In RT3, the winning numbers "1" to "12" are defined by the lottery value "0", the winning numbers "13" to "19" are defined by the same lottery value as RT0, and the winning number "20". The lottery value “11285” is defined for “”, and the lottery value “10000” is defined for the winning numbers “21” to “23”.

In RT4, the winning number "1" is defined as the lottery value "7198", the winning numbers "2" to "7" are defined as the lottery value "1200", and the winning numbers "8" to "12" are defined. The lottery value "0" is defined for the winning number, the lottery value "904" is defined for the winning number "13", the lottery value "452" is defined for the winning number "14", and the winning number "15" is defined for the winning number "15". The lottery value “226” is defined, the lottery numbers “16” and “17” are defined as the lottery value “66”, and the lottery numbers “18” and “19” are defined as the lottery value “33”. The lottery value “15279” is defined for the number “20”, and the lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “21” to “23”.

In the internal gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values defined by the winning numbers “24” to “36” differ only in the lottery values defined by the winning number “24” between RT0 to RT3 and RT4. The lottery values defined for the other winning numbers are the same. In RT0 to RT3, a lottery value “652” is defined for the winning number “24”, and in RT4, a lottery value “656” is defined for the winning number “24”. Further, in RT0 to RT4, the winning numbers “25” to “30” are defined by the lottery value “2176”, and the winning numbers “31” to “36” are defined by the lottery value “960”.

The lottery value defined for the winning number "24" is different between RT0 to RT3 and RT4, because RT4 is an internal winning state of the bonus combination, and the bonus combination is not randomly selected. The lottery value for the winning number "44", which will be described later, is defined as "0", and the lottery value for the small combination that could have been determined for the winning number "44" is added for the winning number "24". is there. Therefore, there is no change in the winning probability of the small winning combination in RT0 to RT4.

In the internal gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values defined for the winning numbers "37" to "50" differ only in RT4 and are the same in RT0 to RT3. In RT0 to RT3, lottery numbers “37” to “39” are defined by a lottery value “7”, win numbers “40” and “41” are defined by a lottery value “12”, and a win number “42”. The lottery value "6" is defined for "and 43", the lottery value "4" is defined for the winning number "44", and the lottery value "1" is defined for the winning numbers "45" to "47". The lottery value "4" is defined for the winning number "48", and the lottery value "1496" is defined for the winning numbers "49" and "50". Further, as described above, since RT4 is in the internal winning state of the bonus combination, the lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “37” to “50” in RT4.

(Internal lottery table for MB gaming state)
As shown in FIG. 20, the MB gaming state internal lottery table referred to in the MB gaming state defines the lottery value of each winning number in RT0, RT1, RT2 and RT3. In the MB gaming state internal lottery table, the winning numbers “1” to “24” are configured such that a small winning combination is won alone or in duplicate with a replay winning combination. In the MB gaming state, the internal winning of the small winning combination is not determined by the lottery using the internal lottery table, but the winning operation flag is always turned on for all the small winning combinations so that the small winning combination is achieved. You may be allowed to win internally.

In the MB gaming state internal lottery table, at least some of the lottery values defined by the winning numbers “2” to “24” are different for each of RT0 to RT3. That is, the type and winning probability of the replay combination drawn by each of RT0 to RT3 are varied. The winning probability of each replay combination in RT0 to RT3 in the MB gaming state and the winning probability of each replay combination in RT0 to RT3 in the general gaming state have the same winning probability. At RT0, the lottery value “56558” is defined for the winning number “1”, the lottery value “7198” is defined for the winning number “2”, and the lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “3” to “13”. Is defined, the lottery value “904” is defined for the winning number “14”, the lottery value “452” is defined for the winning number “15”, and the lottery value “226” is defined for the winning number “16”. The lottery value "66" is defined for the winning numbers "17" and "18", the lottery value "33" is defined for the winning numbers "19" and "20", and the winning numbers "21" to "21". The lottery value “0” is defined in “24”.

Further, in RT1, the lottery value “56556” is defined for the winning number “1”, the lottery value “0” is defined for the winning number “2”, and the lottery value is defined for the winning numbers “3” to “8”. "1200" is defined, and the same lottery value as RT0 is defined for the winning numbers "9" to "24".

In RT2, the winning number "1" is defined as a lottery value "47356", the winning numbers "2" to "8" is defined as a lottery value "0", and the winning numbers "9" to "13" are defined. The lottery value is defined as "3280", and the same lottery value as RT0 is defined as the winning numbers "14" to "24".

In RT3, the lottery value "22471" is defined for the winning number "1", the lottery value "0" is defined for the winning numbers "2" to "13", and the winning numbers "14" to "20". Has the same lottery value as RT0, the winning number "21" has a lottery value "11285", and the winning numbers "22" to "24" have a lottery value "10000".

(Internal lottery table for BB game state)
As shown in FIGS. 21 to 23, the internal lottery table for the BB game state referred to in the BB game state is generally, JACIN1 internal winning, JACIN2 internal winning, RB1, RB1 JACIN1 internal winning, RB1 JACIN2 internal winning, The lottery values of the respective winning numbers in the RB2, JACIN1 internal winning in RB2 and the JACIN2 internal winning in RB2 are defined. In the BB game state internal lottery table, the replay winning combination is won in the winning numbers “1” to “4”, the small winning combination is winning in the winning numbers “5” to “22”, and the winning numbers “23” to “26”. The bonus combination (JACIN1 or JACIN2) is configured to be won independently or in combination with the small combination. In the BB game state internal lottery table, the bonus combination (JACIN1 or JACIN2) may be duplicated with the replay combination so as to be won.

In the BB game state internal lottery table, the lottery values defined for the winning numbers "1" to "4" are generally the same in the JACIN1 internal winnings and the JACIN2 internal winnings, and in the RB1 and RB1 JACIN1 internal winnings and the RB1 The JACIN2 internal win is the same, and the JACIN1 internal win in RB2 and RB2 and the JACIN2 internal win in RB2 are the same. In general, in the JACIN1 internal winning and the JACIN2 internal winning, the lottery value “9032” is defined for the winning number “1”, and the lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “2” to “4”.

In addition, in the RB1, the JACIN1 internal winning in the RB1 and the JACIN2 internal winning in the RB1, the lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “1” to “4”. Also, in RB2, JACIN1 internal winning in RB2 and JACIN2 internal winning in RB2, lottery value “0” is defined for the winning number “1”, and lottery value “10506” is defined for the winning number “2”. The lottery value “16000” is defined for the number “3”, and the lottery value “2000” is defined for the winning number “4”.

As will be described later, the winning numbers “3” and “4” are assigned to predetermined replay combinations (for example, “7-series rep A” and “7-series rep B, which will be described later) that determine the transition from the bonus to the ART. )) is the internal winning number, and in the present embodiment, the lottery value is defined so that it is only selected in the RB2, RB2 JACIN1 internal winning and the RB2 JACIN2 internal winning. However, the specified lottery value is not limited to this, and for example, the lottery value may be specified so that the lottery value is also selected in the RB1, RB1 JACIN1 internal win and the RB1 JACIN2 internal win. In this case, the lottery value is defined so that the internal winning of JACIN1 in RB2 and RB2 and the internal winning of JACIN2 in RB2 are more advantageous than the internal winning of JACIN1 in RB1 and RB1 and the internal winning of JACIN2 in RB1. do it. That is, in the RB2, RB2 JACIN1 internal winnings and the RB2 JACIN2 internal winnings, there is a higher probability that the lottery value will be internally won for this predetermined replay role with a higher probability than the RB1, RB1 JACIN1 internal winnings and the RB1 JACIN2 internal winnings. It should be specified.

In the BB game state internal lottery table, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “5” to “22” are generally the same in the JACIN1 internal winning and the JACIN2 internal winning, and the RB1, RB1 JACIN1 internal winning and The internal winnings in JACIN2 in RB1 are the same except for the winning number "22", and the internal winnings in JACIN1 in RB2 and RB2 and the internal winnings in JACIN2 in RB2 are the same except for winning number "22". In general, in the JACIN1 internal winning and the JACIN2 internal winning, the lottery value "656" is defined for the winning number "5", the lottery value "1" is defined for the winning numbers "6" and "7", and the winning number " The lottery value “2176” is defined for 8” to “13”, the lottery value “960” is defined for the winning numbers “14” to “19”, and the lottery value “1” is defined for the winning number “20”. The lottery value "4" is defined for the winning number "21", and the lottery value "0" is defined for the winning number "22".

In addition, in the RB1, JACIN1 internal winning in RB1 and JACIN2 internal winning in RB1, lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “5” to “19”, and lottery value “5” for the winning number “20”. The winning number “21” is defined as the lottery value “0”. Also, in RB1, the lottery number "22" is defined as the lottery value "28506", and in RB1 JACIN1 internal lottery and RB1 JACIN2 internal lottery, the lottery number "22" is defined as lottery value "65531". There is.

In addition, in the RB2, the JACIN1 internal winning in RB2 and the JACIN2 internal winning in RB2, a lottery value “0” is defined for the winning numbers “5” to “19”, and a lottery value “5” for the winning number “20”. The winning number “21” is defined as the lottery value “0”. In RB2, a lottery value "0" is defined for the winning number "22", and a lottery value "37025" is defined for the winning number "22" in the JACIN1 internal winning in RB2 and the JACIN2 internal winning in RB2. There is.

In the BB gaming state internal lottery table, the lottery values defined in the winning numbers “23” to “26” are JACIN1 internal win, JACIN2 internal win, RB1 JACIN1 internal win, RB1 JACIN2 internal win, RB2 middle JACIN1 internal win and JACIN2 internal win in RB2 are the same, RB1 and RB2 are the same, and are generally different. In general, the winning numbers “23” and “24” are defined by a lottery value “0”, the winning number “25” is defined by a lottery value “34945”, and the winning number “26” is defined by a lottery value “2080”. Is prescribed.

In RB1 and RB2, the winning number "23" is defined by the lottery value "34945", the winning number "24" is defined by the lottery value "2080", and the winning numbers "25" and "26" are defined. The lottery value “0” is defined. In addition, in the JACIN1 internal winning, the JACIN2 internal winning, the JACIN1 internal winning in RB1, the JACIN2 internal winning in RB1, the JACIN1 internal winning in RB2, and the JACIN2 internal winning in RB2, the winning numbers “23” to “26” are the lottery value “0”. Is prescribed.

Note that, as described above, in FIGS. 19 to 23, the lottery value defined for each winning number in the set value of 1 (for example, the set value 1) has been described, but for example, other set values (for example, the set value). Of the lottery values defined for the respective winning numbers in the values 2 to 6), some or all may be defined as the same lottery values as the respective lottery values shown in FIGS. 19 to 23. In particular, bonus roles that can trigger an ART transition (for example, "BB", "MB1", "MB2", and "JACIN2"), small roles that can trigger an ART transition (for example, "determined role" described below), , For the replay combination that can be a trigger for the ART transition (for example, “7 set rep A” and “7 set rep B” described below), the same lottery value is set between the set values, and the ART is set between the set values. It is desirable to ensure the fairness of the game by ensuring that there is no difference in the transition probabilities. From the same point of view, also for replay roles (for example, “special single” and “special double” described later) that may indirectly serve as ART transitions, the same lottery value is set between the set values and the set values are set. There may be no difference in the transition probability to CZ between them.

<Small Winner/Replay Internal Winning Winning Decision Table>
In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 24, for the small winning/replay data pointer, a combination of symbols (winning operation flag) for which winning or operation (establishment) is permitted is identified. The data is associated.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 24, for convenience, the data of the internal winning combination for the small winning/replaying data pointer is omitted, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning operation flag). The details are shown in "Contents", and the names including the function of the internal winning combination are shown in "Remarks".

Here, in the present embodiment, it is possible to associate one data pointer with a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) that are permitted to be established. This makes it possible to determine a plurality of symbol combinations (winning operation flags) that are permitted to be established in one internal lottery process. These internal lottery methods are called “simultaneous winning” method and “overlapping winning” method.

In the present embodiment, one symbol combination (winning action flag) that is permitted to be established can be defined as an internal winning combination, and one data pointer can be set to a plurality of winning combinations. The combination of symbols (winning operation flag) can be defined as an internal winning combination as one unit, but in FIG. 24, the latter is defined as an internal winning combination.

In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 24, “0” to “68” are defined as the small winning combination/replaying data pointers, and the small winning combination/replaying data pointer “1” is set in the internal lottery process. When any of "-" to "68" is determined, it is allowed that the combination of symbols associated with each (see Figs. 14 to 18) is displayed on the activated line. There is. The small win/replay data pointer “0” indicates “miss”, and indicates that any combination of symbols is not permitted to be displayed on the activated line.

In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “1” indicates “RT0 REP” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (the winning operation flag). ) Is associated with “normal lip”.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "2" indicates "RT1 left middle right rep" as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 shift lip 1-1", "RT1 shift lip 1-2", "RT1 shift lip 2-1" to "RT1 shift lip 2-6" and " "RT2 transition rep 1" to "RT2 transition rep 6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "3" indicates "RT1 left/right middle rep" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established. As the (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2" "Transition Lip 1" to "RT2 Transition Lip 6", "Special Lip A1", "Special Lip A2-1" and "Special Lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations/replays, the small winning/replaying data pointer "4" indicates "RT1 left and right lips" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established. As the (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2" "Transition Lip 1" to "RT2 Transition Lip 6" and "Special Lip A1" are associated with each other.

In the internal winning combination determination table for small win/replay, the small win/replay data pointer "5" indicates "RT1 right/left rep" as the internal win, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established. As the (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2" "Transition Lip 1" to "RT2 Transition Lip 6", "Special Lip A1" and "Special Lip A3-1" to "Special Lip A3-6" are associated with each other.

In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations/replays, the small winning/replaying data pointer "6" indicates "RT1 right left middle rep" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to be established. As the (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2" "Transition Lip 1" to "RT2 Transition Lip 6", "Special Lip A2-1" and "Special Lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “7” indicates “RT1 right middle left rep” as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", " "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6" and "special lip A3-1" to "special lip A3-6" are associated with each other.

In the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "8" indicates "RT2 left middle right rep" as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 shift lip 1-1", "RT1 shift lip 1-2", "RT1 shift lip 2-1" to "RT1 shift lip 2-6" and " "RT3 transition lip" is associated.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "9" indicates "RT2 left and right middle rep" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be established. As the (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT3" "Transition Lip", "Special Lip A1", "Special Lip A2-1" and "Special Lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “10” indicates “RT2 middle rep” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be formed ( As a winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 shift lip 1-1", "RT1 shift lip 1-2", "RT1 shift lip 2-1" to "RT1 shift lip 2-6", "RT3 shift" "Rip" and "special lip A1" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations/replays, the small winning/replaying data pointer “11” indicates “RT2 right/left middle rep” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As the (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT3" "Transition lip", "special lip A2-1", and "special lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “12” indicates “RT2 right middle left rep” as an internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the establishment is permitted is established. As a combination (winning operation flag), "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", " "RT3 transition lip" and "special lip A3-1" to "special lip A3-6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “13” indicates “red lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning prize). As the operation flag), "special lip A1", "special lip A2-1", "special lip A2-2", "special lip A3-1" to "special lip A3-6" and "special lip A4-1" ~ "Special Lip A4-3" is associated.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “14” indicates “blue lip” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning "Special Lip B1" and "Special Lip B2-1" to "Special Lip B2-3" are associated with each other as operation flags).

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “15” indicates “green lip” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols (winning) "Special Lip C1", "Special Lip C2-1", "Special Lip C2-2", "Special Lip C3-1" to "Special Lip C3-3", "Special Lip C4-1" , "Special Lip C4-2", "Special Lip C5-1" and "Special Lip C5-2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “16” indicates “red-blue rep” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be formed ( "Special Lip D1-1", "Special Lip D1-2", "Special Lip D2-1", "Special Lip D2-2", "Special Lip D3-1" to "Special Lip D3" -4", "Special Lip D4-1" to "Special Lip D4-6", "BB Middle Lip A1-1", "BB Middle Lip A1-2", "BB Middle Lip A2-1" to "BB Middle" "Lips A2-4", "BB middle lip A3-1" to "BB middle lip A3-4" and "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "17" indicates "red/green rep" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established ( "Special Lip E1", "Special Lip E2-1" to "Special Lip E2-6", "Special Lip E3-1" to "Special Lip E3-4", "Special Lip E4-1" -"Special Lip E4-3", "Special Lip E5-1"-"Special Lip E5-18", and "Special Lip E6-1"-"Special Lip E6-3" are associated with each other.

In the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “18” indicates “blue-green rep A” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. "Special lip F1" and "special lip F5-1" to "special lip F5-3" are associated with each other as the (winning operation flag).

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “19” indicates “blue-green rep B” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be established. "Special Lip F2", "Special Lip F3-1" to "Special Lip F3-3", and "Special Lip F4-1" to "Special Lip F4-3" are associated with each other as a "winning action flag". ..

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “20” indicates “RT3 maintenance rep” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be formed ( As the winning operation flag, "normal lip", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", and "RT3 shift lip" are associated.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "21" indicates "RT3 left rep" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established ( As a winning operation flag), "normal lip", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2" -1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6" and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “22” indicates “RT3 middle rep” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be formed ( As a winning operation flag), "normal lip", "special lip A1", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2" , "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6" and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determining table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "23" indicates "RT3 right rep" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be formed ( As a winning operation flag), "normal lip", "special lip A2-1", "special lip A2-2", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", "RT1 transition lip 1-1" , "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “24” indicates “7 complete chance rep” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As (winning operation flag), "BB middle lip A1-1", "BB middle lip A1-2", "BB middle lip A2-1" to "BB middle lip A2-4", "BB middle lip A3-1" ~ "BB middle lip A3-4", "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8", "BB middle lip B4-4", "RT1 shift lip 1-1", "RT1 shift" "Rip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6", and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other.

In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “25” indicates “7 sets of rep A” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be established. As (winning operation flag), "BB middle lip A1-1", "BB middle lip A1-2", "BB middle lip A2-1" to "BB middle lip A2-4", "BB middle lip A3-1" ~ "BB middle lip A3-4", "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8", "BB middle lip B1", "BB middle lip B2-1", "BB middle lip B2" -2", "BB middle lip B3-1", "BB middle lip B3-2", "BB middle lip B4-1" to "BB middle lip B4-4", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", " "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6" and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other. There is.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "26" indicates "7 complete rep B" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As (winning operation flag), “BB middle lip A1-1”, “BB middle lip A1-2”, “BB middle lip A2-1” to “BB middle lip A2-4”, “BB middle lip A3-1” ~ "BB middle lip A3-4", "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8", "BB middle lip B1", "BB middle lip B2-1", "BB middle lip B2" -2", "BB middle lip B3-1", "BB middle lip B3-2", "BB middle lip B4-1" to "BB middle lip B4-4", "BB middle lip C1", "BB middle lip" Lip C2-1", "BB middle lip C2-2", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6" , “RT2 transition lip 1” to “RT2 transition lip 6” and “RT3 transition lip” are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "27" indicates the "common winning combination" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning As the operation flag, "common winning combination 1" to "common winning combination 6" are associated.

Also, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "28" indicates "red, blue, green, and one A" as the internal winning, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. (1 winning combination H1), "1 winning combination H2-1" to "1 winning combination H2-6", "1 winning combination H3-1" to "1 winning combination 3-9" , "1 sheet combination 4-1" to "1 sheet combination 4-9", "1 sheet combination H5" and "1 sheet combination H6" are associated with each other.

In the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "29" indicates "red/blue/green 1 sheet B" as the internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), “1 sheet combination H1” is associated.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “30” indicates “left middle right bell A” as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol As a combination (winning operation flag), "8 winning combinations 1", "1 winning combination A1-1", "1 winning combination A1-2", "1 winning combination A2-1", "1 winning combination A2-2" , "1 sheet combination B2-1", "1 sheet combination B2-2", "1 sheet combination B3-1", "1 sheet combination B3-2", "1 sheet combination C1", "1 sheet combination C2-" “1”, “1 role C2-2”, “1 role C3”, “1 role D1” to “1 role D4”, and “1 role H5” are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “31” indicates “left and right middle bell A” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established. As (winning action flag), “8-sheet combination 1”, “1-sheet combination A3-1”, “1-sheet combination A3-2”, “1-sheet combination A4-1”, “1-sheet combination A4-2”, "One-sheet combination B1-1", "One-sheet combination B1-2", "One-sheet combination B4-1", "One-sheet combination B4-2", "One-sheet combination C4", "One-sheet combination C5-1" , "1 sheet combination C5-2", "1 sheet combination C6", "1 sheet combination D1" to "1 sheet combination D4", and "1 sheet combination H6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "32" indicates "middle left and right bell A" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is permitted to be established. As (winning action flag), "8-sheet winning combination 1", "1-sheet winning combination A1-1", "1-sheet winning combination A1-2", "1-sheet winning combination A2-1", "1-sheet winning combination A2-2", "1 sheet combination A5-1", "1 sheet combination A5-2", "1 sheet combination C1", "1 sheet combination C2-1", "1 sheet combination C2-2", "1 sheet combination C3", "1 sheet combination E1" to "1 sheet combination E6" and "1 sheet combination H5" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “33” indicates the “middle right left bell A” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be established. As (winning action flag), “8-sheet combination 1”, “1-sheet combination A3-1”, “1-sheet combination A3-2”, “1-sheet combination A4-1”, “1-sheet combination A4-2”, "1 sheet combination A6-1", "1 sheet combination A6-2", "1 sheet combination C4", "1 sheet combination C5-1", "1 sheet combination C5-2", "1 sheet combination C6", "1 sheet combination E1" to "1 sheet combination E6" and "1 sheet combination H6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “34” indicates “right/left center bell A” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be established. As (winning action flag), "8-sheet winning combination 1", "1-sheet winning combination A1-1", "1-sheet winning combination A1-2", "1-sheet winning combination A2-1", "1-sheet winning combination A2-2", "1 sheet combination A5-1", "1 sheet combination A5-2", "1 sheet combination B1-1", "1 sheet combination B1-2", "1 sheet combination B3-1", "1 sheet combination B3" -2", "1 sheet combination B5-1", "1 sheet combination B5-2", and "1 sheet combination F1-1" to "1 sheet combination F1-6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “35” indicates “Right Middle Left Bell A” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the establishment is permitted is confirmed. As a combination (winning action flag), "8 winning combinations 1", "1 winning combination A3-1", "1 winning combination A3-2", "1 winning combination A4-1", "1 winning combination A4-2" , "1 sheet combination A6-1", "1 sheet combination A6-2", "1 sheet combination B2-1", "1 sheet combination B2-2", "1 sheet combination B4-1", "1 sheet combination" "B4-2", "one-sheet combination B6-1", "one-sheet combination B6-2", and "one-sheet combination F1-1" to "one-sheet combination F1-6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "36" indicates "left middle right bell B" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the establishment is permitted is confirmed. As a combination (winning operation flag), "8 winning combinations 2", "1 winning combination A3-1", "1 winning combination A3-2", "1 winning combination A4-1", "1 winning combination A4-2" , "1 sheet combination B1-1", "1 sheet combination B1-2", "1 sheet combination B4-1", "1 sheet combination B4-2", "1 sheet combination C4", "1 sheet combination C5-" "1", "1 role C5-2", "1 role C6", "1 role D1" to "1 role D4" and "1 role H6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "37" indicates "left and right middle bell B" as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established. As the (winning operation flag), “8 winning combinations 2”, “1 winning combinations A1-1”, “1 winning combinations A1-2”, “1 winning combinations A2-1”, “1 winning combinations A2-2”, "1 sheet combination B2-1", "1 sheet combination B2-2", "1 sheet combination B3-1", "1 sheet combination B3-2", "1 sheet combination C1", "1 sheet combination C2-1" , "1 sheet combination C2-2", "1 sheet combination C3", "1 sheet combination D1" to "1 sheet combination D4", and "1 sheet combination H5" are associated with each other.

In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations/replays, the small winning/replaying data pointer "38" indicates "middle left and right bell B" as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to be established. As (winning action flag), “8-sheet winning combination 2”, “1-sheet winning combination A3-1”, “1-sheet winning combination A3-2”, “1-sheet winning combination A4-1”, “1-sheet winning combination A4-2”, "1 sheet combination A6-1", "1 sheet combination A6-2", "1 sheet combination C4", "1 sheet combination C5-1", "1 sheet combination C5-2", "1 sheet combination C6", "1 sheet combination E1" to "1 sheet combination E6" and "1 sheet combination H6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer “39” indicates “middle right left bell B” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that is allowed to be established. As (winning action flag), “8-sheet combination 2”, “1-sheet combination A1-1”, “1-sheet combination A1-2”, “1-sheet combination A2-1”, “1-sheet combination A2-2”, "1 sheet combination A5-1", "1 sheet combination A5-2", "1 sheet combination C1", "1 sheet combination C2-1", "1 sheet combination C2-2", "1 sheet combination C3", "1 sheet combination E1" to "1 sheet combination E6" and "1 sheet combination H5" are associated with each other.

In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations/replays, the small winning/replaying data pointer “40” indicates “right/left middle bell B” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols permitted to be established. As (winning action flag), “8-sheet winning combination 2”, “1-sheet winning combination A3-1”, “1-sheet winning combination A3-2”, “1-sheet winning combination A4-1”, “1-sheet winning combination A4-2”, "1 sheet combination A6-1", "1 sheet combination A6-2", "1 sheet combination B2-1", "1 sheet combination B2-2", "1 sheet combination B4-1", "1 sheet combination B4" -2", "1 sheet combination B6-1", "1 sheet combination B6-2", and "1 sheet combination F2-1" to "1 sheet combination F2-6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determining table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “41” indicates “Right Middle Left Bell B” as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the establishment is permitted is confirmed. As a combination (winning operation flag), "8 winning combinations 2", "1 winning combination A1-1", "1 winning combination A1-2", "1 winning combination A2-1", "1 winning combination A2-2" , "1 sheet combination A5-1", "1 sheet combination A5-2", "1 sheet combination B1-1", "1 sheet combination B1-2", "1 sheet combination B3-1", "1 sheet combination" "B3-2", "one-sheet combination B5-1", "one-sheet combination B5-2", and "one-sheet combination F2-1" to "one-sheet combination F2-6" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “42” indicates “11 winning combinations” as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols permitted to be formed ( As a winning operation flag), "9 winning combinations 1", "9 winning combinations 2", "11 winning combinations 1-1" to "11 winning combinations 1-6" and "11 winning combinations 2-1" to "11 winning combinations" Role 2-4” is associated.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer "43" indicates the "special winning combination" as the internal winning combination, and the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning As the operation flag), all of the “single hand combination A”, the “single hand combination B3-1”, the “single hand combination B3-2”, the “single hand combination B4-1”, the “single hand combination B4-2”, All of "1 sheet combination B5-1", "1 sheet combination B5-2", "1 sheet combination B6-1", "1 sheet combination B6-2", "1 sheet combination C", "1 sheet combination E" , "1 sheet combination F" and "1 sheet combination G" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “44” indicates the “RB winning combination” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning prize). As the operation flag), "9 winning combinations 1", "9 winning combinations 2", "common winning combinations 1" to "common winning combinations 6", "8 winning combinations 1", "8 winning combinations 2" and "1 winning combinations A" "To "one-sheet combination H" are all associated.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “45” indicates “CB winning combination” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established (winning prize). As the operation flag), a combination of symbols related to all small wins is associated.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “46” indicates “RT0 REP+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As the (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all the small winning combinations and “normal lip” are associated.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer “47” indicates “RT1 left middle right rep+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and establishment is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, “normal lip”, “RT1 transition lip 1-1”, “RT1 transition lip 1-2”, “RT1 transition lip 2-1” -"RT1 transition lip 2-6" and "RT2 transition lip 1"-"RT2 transition lip 6" are associated with each other.

In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “48” indicates “RT1 left/right middle rep+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ~ "RT1 Transition Lip 2-6", "RT2 Transition Lip 1" to "RT2 Transition Lip 6", "Special Lip A1", "Special Lip A2-1" and "Special Lip A2-2" are associated with each other. There is.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer “49” indicates “RT1 left and right lip + CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ~ "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6", and "special lip A1" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "50" indicates "RT1 right/left lips+CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ~ "RT1 Transition Lip 2-6", "RT2 Transition Lip 1" to "RT2 Transition Lip 6", "Special Lip A1" and "Special Lip A3-1" to "Special Lip A3-6" are associated with each other. There is.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer "51" indicates "RT1 right left middle rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ~ "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6", "special lip A2-1" and "special lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer “52” indicates “RT1 right middle left rep+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and establishment is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, “normal lip”, “RT1 transition lip 1-1”, “RT1 transition lip 1-2”, “RT1 transition lip 2-1” -"RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT2 transition lip 1"-"RT2 transition lip 6", and "special lip A3-1"-"special lip A3-6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “53” indicates “RT2 left middle right rep+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and the establishment is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, “normal lip”, “RT1 transition lip 1-1”, “RT1 transition lip 1-2”, “RT1 transition lip 2-1” "To "RT1 transition lip 2-6" and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "54" indicates "RT2 left/right middle rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol that is allowed to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ~ "RT1 transition Lip 2-6", "RT3 transition Lip", "Special Lip A1", "Special Lip A2-1" and "Special Lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "55" indicates "RT2 middle rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ... "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT3 transition lip" and "special lip A1" are associated with each other.

In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "56" indicates "RT2 right/left middle rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and a symbol to be established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" ~ "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT3 transition lip", "special lip A2-1" and "special lip A2-2" are associated with each other.

In the internal winning combination determination table for small winning combinations/replays, the small winning/replaying data pointer "57" indicates "RT2 right middle left rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and the establishment is permitted. As a combination of symbols (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, “normal lip”, “RT1 transition lip 1-1”, “RT1 transition lip 1-2”, “RT1 transition lip 2-1” To "RT1 transition lip 2-6", "RT3 transition lip", and "special lip A3-1" to "special lip A3-6" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determining table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “58” indicates “red lip+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As (winning action flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, “special lip A1”, “special lip A2-1”, “special lip A2-2”, “special lip A3-1” to “special lip” "A3-6" and "special lip A4-1" to "special lip A4-3" are associated with each other.

In addition, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “59” indicates “blue lip+CB winning combination” as the internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As the (winning action flag), a combination of symbols relating to all the small winning combinations, “special lip B1” and “special lip B2-1” to “special lip B2-3” are associated.

In the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “60” indicates “green lip+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established. As a (winning action flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, "special lip C1", "special lip C2-1", "special lip C2-2", "special lip C3-1" to "special lip" “C3-3”, “special lip C4-1”, “special lip C4-2”, “special lip C5-1” and “special lip C5-2” are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determining table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “61” indicates “red/blue rep+CB winning combination” as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "special lip D1-1", "special lip D1-2", "special lip D2-1", "special lip D2-2", "Special Lip D3-1" to "Special Lip D3-4", "Special Lip D4-1" to "Special Lip D4-6", "BB Middle Lip A1-1", "BB Middle Lip A1-2", "BB middle lip A2-1" to "BB middle lip A2-4", "BB middle lip A3-1" to "BB middle lip A3-4" and "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4" -8" is associated.

In the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “62” indicates “red/green rep+CB winning combination” as an internal winning, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, "special lip E1", "special lip E2-1" to "special lip E2-6", "special lip E3-1" to "special" Lip E3-4", "Special Lip E4-1" to "Special Lip E4-3", "Special Lip E5-1" to "Special Lip E5-18" and "Special Lip E6-1" to "Special Lip E6" -3” is associated.

In the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “63” indicates “blue-green rep A+CB winning combination” as an internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning action flag), a combination of symbols relating to all the small winning combinations, "special lip F1" and "special lip F5-1" to "special lip F5-3" are associated.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replaying data pointer “64” indicates “blue-green rep B+CB winning combination” as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, "special lip F2", "special lip F3-1" to "special lip F3-3" and "special lip F4-1" to "special" Lip F4-3” is associated.

Further, in the small winning/replaying internal winning combination determining table, the small winning/replaying data pointer "65" indicates "RT3 maintenance rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", and "RT3 transition lip" are associated. ..

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer "66" indicates "RT3 left rep + CB winning combination" as an internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, "normal lip", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1" "Transition Lip 1-2", "RT1 Transition Lip 2-1" to "RT1 Transition Lip 2-6", and "RT3 Transition Lip" are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning/replay data pointer "67" indicates "RT3 middle rep + CB winning combination" as the internal winning combination, and the symbol of which the establishment is permitted is established. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small winning combinations, "normal lip", "special lip A1", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", "RT1 transition lip 1" −1”, “RT1 transition lip 1-2”, “RT1 transition lip 2-1” to “RT1 transition lip 2-6”, and “RT3 transition lip” are associated with each other.

Further, in the small winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table, the small winning combination/replay data pointer “68” indicates “RT3 right rep+CB winning combination” as the internal winning combination, and the winning of the symbol is permitted. As a combination (winning operation flag), a combination of symbols relating to all small wins, "normal lip", "special lip A2-1", "special lip A2-2", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip" "D4-6", "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2", "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition lip 2-6" and "RT3 transition lip" are associated with each other. ing.

<Bonus internal winning combination decision table>
In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 25, data for identifying a symbol combination (winning operation flag) in which winning or operation (establishment) is permitted is associated with the bonus data pointer. There is.

Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 25, for the sake of convenience, the data of the internal winning combination is omitted for the bonus data pointer, and the breakdown of the symbol combinations (winning operation flags) that are allowed to be established. It is shown in "Contents" and the name including the function of the internal winning combination is shown in "Remarks".

In the bonus internal winning combination determination table shown in FIG. 25, “1” to “5” are defined as the bonus data pointers, and any of the bonus data pointers “1” to “5” in the internal lottery process. When it is determined, it is allowed to display the symbol combination (see FIG. 14) associated with each symbol on the activated line.

In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "1" indicates "BB" as the internal winning combination, and "BB" is the symbol combination (winning operation flag) that is allowed to be established. It is associated.

Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “2” indicates “MB1” as the internal winning combination, and “MB1” is the symbol combination (winning operation flag) that is allowed to be established. Are associated with each other.

Further, in the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "3" indicates "MB2" as the internal winning combination, and "MB2" as the combination of symbols (winning operation flag) that is allowed to be established. -1" and "MB2-2" are associated with each other.

In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer "4" indicates "JACIN1" as the internal winning combination, and "JACIN1" as the combination of symbols (winning operation flag) that is allowed to be established. -1" to "JACIN 1-6" are associated with each other.

In the bonus internal winning combination determination table, the bonus data pointer “5” indicates “JACIN2” as the internal winning combination, and “JACIN2” as the combination of symbols (winning operation flag) that is allowed to be established. -1" to "JACIN2-3" are associated with each other.

[Relationship between stop operation sequence for internal winning combination and winning combination]
Next, with reference to FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, the relationship between the stop operation sequence for the internal winning combination and the winning combination will be described.

In FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, as the stop operation sequence, “left middle right” means that stop operation is performed in order of the stop button 19L, the stop button 19C, and the stop button 19R (that is, left first stop, middle second "Stop left, right third stop", and "left and right middle" means that stop operation is performed in order of stop button 19L, stop button 19R, stop button 19C (that is, left first stop, right second stop, middle) "3rd stop" means that the stop operation is performed in order of the stop button 19C, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19R (i.e., middle first stop, left second stop, right third stop). ), and "middle right left" means that stop operation is performed in order of stop button 19C, stop button 19R, stop button 19L (that is, middle first stop, right second stop, left third stop). However, "right left middle" means that the stop operation is performed in order of the stop button 19R, the stop button 19L, and the stop button 19C (that is, right first stop, left second stop, middle third stop), " "Right-middle-left" means that stop operation is performed in order of the stop button 19R, the stop button 19C, and the stop button 19L (that is, right first stop, middle second stop, left third stop).

<Outline of reel stop control for pachi-slot machines>
In the present embodiment, there may be a case in which a plurality of symbol combinations permitted to be established for one internal winning combination are associated with each other, and at what timing the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R are operated. Depending on the (stop operation timing) and the order in which the operations were performed (stop operation order), control may be performed so that the combination of symbols finally displayed also changes.

That is, regarding which symbol combination is the symbol combination finally displayed on the activated line (in other words, as the basic information when the main CPU 93 executes the reel stop control), It is determined based on the three elements of.

The first element is an internal winning combination determined by the internal lottery process. For example, when the internal winning combination is “miss” (the value of the data pointer for small winning combination/replay is “0”), no winning or operating symbol combination is displayed on the activated line. ..

The second element is the stop operation timing of the player (in other words, the position of the symbol when the player operates any of the stop buttons). For example, in the present embodiment, four symbols (however, one symbol for the reel 3R in the MB gaming state) is set as the maximum number of sliding pieces. Even if you have won the winning combination, if there are more than 4 symbols that make up the combination of symbols that are allowed to be established, depending on the timing of the player's stop operation, you will win the prize. There is a case that the combination of symbols that is allowed is not displayed. This is called "missing".

The third element is the player's stop operation sequence. For example, as shown in FIG. 26, when the internal winning combination is “RT0 rep” (the value of the small winning/replaying data pointer is “1”), whichever stop operation order is selected, The control is performed so that the symbol combination of "normal lip" is displayed on the activated line.

However, for example, if the internal winning combination is “RT1 left middle right rep” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “2”) and the stop operation sequence is “left middle right”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of "RT2 transition lip 1" to "RT2 transition lip 6" is preferentially displayed on the activated line, while the stop operation sequence is In the case of the other stop operation order, control is performed so that a combination of symbols other than "RT2 transition rep 1" to "RT2 transition rep 6" is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

In this way, based on the third element, the internal winning combination in which the winning combination of the symbols is changed is called "push order winning combination", and when it is the replay combination, it is called "push order replaying". In the case of a small winning combination, it may be referred to as a "pushing order small winning combination".

In the present embodiment, the main CPU 93 executes the following processing in order to realize the reel stop control described above.

First, the main CPU 93 determines an internal winning combination in an internal lottery process (see S14 of FIG. 63) described later, and when information about the internal winning combination is stored in the main RAM 95, a reel stop initial setting process described later (see FIG. In S15 of 63), various stop control information stored in the main ROM 94 is read out and stored in the main RAM 95 based on the internal winning combination.

Here, exemplifying information stored as various kinds of stop control information, in relation to the above-mentioned second element, at which symbol position on each reel the stop button is operated and which symbol position is stopped ( Information that directly or indirectly defines the number of sliding pieces), and in relation to the above-mentioned third element, in which stop operation sequence the stop button is operated, which combination of symbols is preferentially displayed. Examples of such information include information that directly or indirectly defines the information.

Next, the main CPU 93 stops each reel based on various stop control information stored in the main RAM 95 in a reel stop control process (see S21 of FIG. 63) described later. In particular, when the internal winning combination is the “push order combination”, appropriate stop control information is selected from the stored stop control information according to the stop operation sequence, or one stop operation is performed. After that, stop control information is generated (changed) to perform stop control.

Depending on the stop operation timing and the stop operation sequence, different stop controls may be executed even for the same internal winning combination, but the stop control is uniquely determined in advance and is the same. The same stop control is executed as long as it is an internal winning combination and has the same stop operation timing and the same stop operation sequence.

In the present embodiment, in a specific effect state that is advantageous for the player (for example, during special zone, during ART preparation, during ART, during CZ during ART, during addition zone preparation, during addition zone), "press" When the "winning combination" is determined as the internal winning combination, the stop operation sequence, which is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player, is notified. Specific control regarding the notification of the stop operation sequence will be described later.

In the present embodiment, the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player is determined by the third element, but the procedure is not limited to this, and may be determined by the second element, for example. The second element and the third element may be combined and determined.

<Relationship between the stop operation sequence and the winning combination for the internal winning combination in the general gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 26, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "RT0 rep" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "1"), which is the stop operation order. Even in this case, the control of displaying the symbol combination of "normal lip" on the activated line is performed.

Also, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "RT1 left middle right rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "2"), the stop operation sequence is "left middle right" Irrespective of the stop operation timing, a combination of symbols of "RT2 transition rep 1" to "RT2 transition rep 6" ("RT2 transition rep") is preferentially displayed on the activated line. On the other hand, while the control is performed, when the stop operation sequence is any other stop operation sequence, the control is performed so that the combination of symbols other than "RT2 shift lip" is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Here, in RT1, the establishment of the "RT2 transition rep" is the trigger for migrating to RT2, so "RT1 left middle right rep" (small win/replay data pointer value "2") is internally won. The stop operation sequence “left middle right” in the case of doing is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player.

Similarly, when the internal winning of "RT1 left/right middle rep" (small pointer/replay data pointer value is "3") is internally won, "stop left/right middle", "RT1 middle left/right rep" (small role/replay When the value of the data pointer is internally elected to "4"), the stop operation sequence is "middle left and right", and "RT1 middle right/left rep" (the value of the data pointer for small role/replay is "5") Stop operation order "Center Right Left", "RT1 Right Left Middle Rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "6") Stop operation order "Right Left Middle", and "RT1 Right Middle Left Rep" The stop operation sequence “Right Middle Left” when the internal winning of the small win/replay data pointer is “7” is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player.

Also, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "RT2 left middle right rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "8"), the stop operation sequence is "left middle right" Is controlled so that the combination of the symbols of "RT3 transition rip" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing, while the stop operation order is other stop operation order. "RT1 transition rep 1-1", "RT1 transition rep 1-2" or "RT1 transition rep 2-1" to "RT1 transition rep 2-6" ("RT1 transition rep") The combination is controlled so that it is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Here, in RT2, the establishment of the "RT3 transition rep" is the trigger for migrating to RT3. The stop operation sequence “left middle right” in the case of doing is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player.

Similarly, when the internal winning of "RT2 left and right middle rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "9"), the stop operation sequence "right and left middle", "RT2 middle rep" (small win/replay data Stop operation sequence when the value of the pointer is internally won to "10") "middle left and right" and "middle right left" (that is, the first stop operation to the stop button 19C), "RT2 right left middle lip" (small win When the value of the replay data pointer is "11" internally, the stop operation sequence is "right left middle" and "RT2 right middle left rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "12") The stop operation sequence “right middle left” when winning is a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "red lip" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "13"), no matter which stop operation order is selected, "special" Lip A1", "Special Lip A2-1", "Special Lip A2-2", "Special Lip A3-1" to "Special Lip A3-6" or "Special Lip A4-1" to "Special Lip A4-3" The control of displaying any combination of symbols on the activated line is performed. When the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbol combination of "special lip A1" can be displayed on the activated line, the symbol combination of "special lip A1" is given priority over the combination of other symbols. The control is performed so that it is displayed on the activated line, and the "red special" symbol of the reel 3L is displayed in the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is “blue rep” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “14”), no matter which stop operation order is selected, “special Control is performed in which a combination of symbols of "lip B1" or "special lip B2-1" to "special lip B2-3" is displayed on the activated line. When the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbol combination of "special lip B1" can be displayed on the activated line, the symbol combination of "special lip B1" is given priority over the other symbol combinations. The control is performed so that it is displayed on the activated line, and the "blue special" symbol of the reel 3C is displayed in the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "green lip" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "15"), no matter which stop operation order, "special" Lip C1", "Special Lip C2-1", "Special Lip C2-2", "Special Lip C3-1" to "Special Lip C3-3", "Special Lip C4-1", "Special Lip C4-2" , "Special lip C5-1" or "special lip C5-2" is displayed on the activated line in the combination of symbols is controlled. When the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbol combination of "special lip C1" can be displayed on the activated line, the symbol combination of "special lip C1" is given priority over the combination of other symbols. The control is performed so that it is displayed on the activated line, and the "green special" symbol of the reel 3R is displayed in the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "red-blue rep" (the value of the small-role/replay data pointer is "16"), no matter which stop operation order is selected, " Special Lip D1-1, Special Lip D1-2, Special Lip D2-1, Special Lip D2-2, Special Lip D3-1 to Special Lip D3-4, Special Lip "D4-1" to "special lip D4-6", "BB middle lip A1-1", "BB middle lip A1-2", "BB middle lip A2-1" to "BB middle lip A2-4", " Control in which a combination of symbols of "BB middle lip A3-1" to "BB middle lip A3-4" or "BB middle lip A4-1" to "BB middle lip A4-8" is displayed on the activated line Is done. In addition, when the stop operation timing is the timing at which the combination of the symbols of "special lip D1-1" or "special lip D1-2" can be displayed on the activated line, "special lip D1-1" or "special lip D1-1" The control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “Dip D1-2” is displayed on the activated line preferentially over the combination of the other symbols, and the “red special” symbol of the reel 3L and the “blue of the reel 3C are displayed. The "special" symbol is displayed on the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "red-green rep" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "17"), no matter which stop operation order is selected, " "Special Lip E1", "Special Lip E2-1" to "Special Lip E2-6", "Special Lip E3-1" to "Special Lip E3-4", "Special Lip E4-1" to "Special Lip E4-" 3", "Special Lip E5-1" to "Special Lip E5-18" or "Special Lip E6-1" to "Special Lip E6-3" A combination of symbols displayed on the activated line Is done. When the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbol combination of "special lip E1" can be displayed on the activated line, the symbol combination of "special lip E1" is given priority over the other symbol combinations. Control is performed so as to be displayed on the activated line, and the "red special" symbol of the reel 3L and the "green special" symbol of the reel 3R are displayed in the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "blue-green rep A" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "18"), whichever stop operation order is selected, Control is performed in which a combination of symbols of "special lip F1" or "special lip F5-1" to "special lip F5-3" is displayed on the activated line. When the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbol combination of "special lip F1" can be displayed on the activated line, the symbol combination of "special lip F1" is given priority over the other symbol combinations. The control is performed so as to be displayed on the activated line, and the "blue special" symbol of the reel 3C and the "green special" symbol of the reel 3R are displayed in the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is “blue-green rep B” (the value of the small-role/replay data pointer is “19”), whichever stop operation order is selected, "Special Lip F2", "Special Lip F3-1" to "Special Lip F3-3" or "Special Lip F4-1" to "Special Lip F4-3" A combination of symbols is displayed on the activated line The control is performed. When the stop operation timing is the timing at which the symbol combination of "special lip F2" can be displayed on the activated line, the symbol combination of "special lip F2" is given priority over the other symbol combinations. The control is performed so as to be displayed on the activated line, and the "blue special" symbol of the reel 3C and the "green special" symbol of the reel 3R are displayed in the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is “RT3 maintenance rep” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “20”), whichever stop operation order is selected, “ Control is performed such that a combination of symbols of "normal lip", "special lip D4-1" to "special lip D4-6" or "RT3 shift lip" is displayed on the activated line. In addition, in RT3, when the internal winning of “RT3 maintenance rep” (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is “20”) is internally performed, RT3 is maintained regardless of the stop operation order. It has become.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "RT3 left rep" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "21"), the stop operation sequence is "left center right" and "left center right". In the case of (that is, the first stop operation to the stop button 19L), control is performed such that a combination of symbols other than "RT1 transition rep" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing. On the other hand, if the stop operation sequence is any other stop operation sequence, "RT1 transition lip 1-1", "RT1 transition lip 1-2" or "RT1 transition lip 2-1" to "RT1 transition" is performed. The control is performed so that the symbol combination of any one of "Rip 2-6" ("RT1 transition rip") is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Here, in RT3, the establishment of the "RT1 transition rep" is a trigger for migrating to RT1, and since RT3 is not maintained, "RT3 left rep" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer). The stop operation sequence “left middle right” and “left right middle” when the player internally wins “21”) is a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player.

Similarly, the stop operation sequence "middle left and right" and "middle right left" when the internal winning of "RT3 middle rep" (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "22") (that is, the stop button 19C 1 stop operation), and "RT3 right rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "23") when the internal win is selected, the stop operation sequence is "right left middle" and "right middle left" (that is, the stop button). The first stop operation to 19R) is a stop operation procedure advantageous for the player.

In addition, "7 set chance rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is "24"), "7 set rep A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "25"), and "7 set" Lip B" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "26") is not determined as the internal winning combination in the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 19 to 23), and the BB gaming state (RB2, RB2 JACIN1). Internal winning and internal winning only in RB2). In addition, the "7 match chance lip" is an internal winning combination that does not result in a "red 7" symbol or a "white 7" symbol match (7 match) at any stop operation timing. And "7 set Lip B" is an internal winning combination that becomes a "red 7" symbol or a "white 7" symbol set (7 set) when the stop operation timing is an appropriate timing.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is “common combination” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “27”), whichever the stop operation sequence is, “common” The control is performed such that the symbol combination of any one of the combination 1" to "common combination 6" is displayed on the activated line.

Note that "red/blue/green 1 sheet A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "28") and "red/blue green 1 sheet B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "29") Is not determined as an internal winning combination by itself in the normal gaming state (see FIGS. 19 to 23), and the internal winning is always overlapped with “BB”. Therefore, "one red-blue-green sheet A" and "one red-blue-green sheet B" are definite winning combinations for which the winning of the bonus combination is confirmed. However, if "red/blue/green 1 sheet A" or "red/blue/green 1 sheet B" and "BB" are overlapped and internal win is selected, "red/blue/green 1 sheet A" or "red/blue/green sheet 1 B" The combination of symbols is controlled so that it is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and when the stop operation timing is appropriate timing, the "red special" symbol on the reel 3L and the "red special" symbol on the reel 3C. The “blue special” symbol and the “green special” symbol on the reel 3R are displayed on the display window 4.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right bell A” (small win/replay data pointer value is “30”), the stop operation sequence is “left middle right” and “left and right”. In the case of "medium" (that is, the first stop operation to the stop button 19L), the combination of the symbols of "8-piece hand 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing. On the other hand, when the stop operation order is the other stop operation order, a combination of symbols of any of the winning "1 hand" (see FIG. 24) is preferentially on the activated line. The control is performed so as to be displayed in. Then, the timing at which the symbols composing any of the combinations of the symbols of the "single winning combination" for which the stop operation timing has been won can be displayed on the activated line (1/2 on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R). Only when it is the stop operation timing), a combination of symbols of one of the winning "1 piece combinations" is displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation timing of the winning "1 piece combination" is displayed. If it is not possible to display the symbols constituting any of the symbol combinations on the activated line, the symbol combination of any of the "RT1 transition symbols", which is a part of the symbol combinations of "miss", is effective. It is supposed to be displayed on the line. Here, 8 medals are paid out when the "8 coin combination 1" is established, and 1 medal is paid out when the "1 coin combination" is established. In addition, in RT2 and RT3, if the “one-piece winning combination” is missed and the “RT1 transition symbol” is established, the transition to RT1 is made. Therefore, the stop operation sequence “left center right” and “left center right” when the player internally wins “left center right bell A” (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is “30”) is advantageous for the player. It is a procedure of stop operation. In the case of internally winning "Left Middle Right Bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "30"), only the stopping operation sequence "Left Middle Right" is advantageous for the player. May be

Similarly, the stop operation sequence "left center right" and "left center right" (that is, to the stop button 19L when the left and right center bell A) (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "31") is internally won. Stop operation), "middle left and right bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "32") or "middle right left bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "33") The order of stop operations in the case of being internally won is "left and right" and "middle right and left" (that is, the first stop operation to the stop button 19C), "right and left middle bell A" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "34". )) or “Right Middle/Left Bell A” (small win/replay data pointer value is “35”), the stop operation sequence is “Right/Middle Left” and “Right/Middle Left” (that is, the stop button 19R). The first stop operation) is a stop operation procedure advantageous for the player. Similarly, in the case of internally winning the “right and left middle bell A” (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is “31”), only the stop operation order “right and left middle” is a stop operation advantageous to the player. In the case of internal winning of "middle left and right bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "32"), only the stop operation sequence "middle left and right" is advantageous for the player. In the case of internal winning of "middle right left bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "33"), only the stop operation sequence "middle right left" is advantageous for the player. When the operation procedure is followed and the player is internally elected to "Right Left Middle Bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "34"), only the stop operation sequence "Right Left Middle" is advantageous to the player. When the player is internally elected to "Right Middle Left Bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "35"), the stop operation sequence "Right Middle Left" is the player only. Alternatively, the procedure of the stop operation may be advantageous.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right bell B” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “36”), and the stop operation sequence is “left middle right” Is controlled so that the combination of the symbols of "Eight-piece hand 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing, and when the stop operation sequence is "right and left middle". The control is performed so that the winning combination of any one of the symbols of "one hand" (see FIG. 24) is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the timing of the stop operation. If the stop operation order is any other stop operation order, the control is performed so that the winning combination of any one of the symbols of "one hand" is preferentially displayed on the activated line. , The timing at which the symbols constituting any one of the symbol combinations of the "one hand" for which the stop operation timing has been won can be displayed on the activated line (1/2 on the arrangement of symbols on the reels 3L, 3C, 3R The combination of symbols of any one of the winning "1 winning hands" is displayed on the activated line, and the stopping operation timing is any of the winning "1 winning hands". If it is not possible to display the symbols constituting the combination of symbols on the activated line, the combination of any of the symbols "RT1 transition symbol" which is a part of the combination of the symbols "miss" is the activated line. It is supposed to be displayed above. Here, eight medals are paid out when the "8-card combination 2" is established, and one medal is paid out when the "1-card combination" is established. In addition, in RT2 and RT3, if the “one-piece winning combination” is missed and the “RT1 transition symbol” is established, the transition to RT1 is made. Therefore, the stop operation sequence "left middle right" when the player internally wins the "left middle right bell A" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "30") is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player. Therefore, the stop operation sequence “left middle right” is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player as compared with the other stop operation sequences.

Similarly, the stop operation sequence when the internal winning of "left and right middle bell B" (the value of the data pointer for small win/replay is "37") is "left right middle", "middle left and right bell B" (for small win/replay) When the value of the data pointer is internally elected to "38"), the stop operation sequence is "middle left and right", and "middle right and left bell B" (the value of the data pointer for small role/replay is "39") Stop operation order "Middle Right Left", "Right Left Middle Bell B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "40"), the stop operation order "Right Left Middle" and "Right Middle Left Bell B" The stop operation sequence “Right Middle Left” when the internal winning of the small win/replay data pointer is “41” is the most advantageous stop operation procedure for the player. Similarly, the stop operation sequence "left center right", "middle left and right bell B" (small role) when the internal winning of "right and left middle bell B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "37") -When the value of the data pointer for replay is internally elected to "38", the stop operation sequence is "middle right left", "middle right and left bell B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "39") is internally elected. Stop operation sequence "middle left and right", "right left middle bell B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "40"), the stop operation sequence "right middle left" and "right" Middle left bell B” (small win/replay data pointer value is “41”), the stop operation sequence “Right Left Middle” is advantageous to the player compared to other stop operation sequences. It is a procedure of operation.

It should be noted that "11-card combination" (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "42") and "Special combination" (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "43") are independent in the normal game state. However, the internal winning combination is not determined (see FIGS. 19 to 23), and the internal winning is always duplicated with “BB”. Therefore, the “11-card combination” and the “special combination” are definite winning combinations in which the winning of the bonus winning combination is confirmed. When “11 winning combinations” and “BB” are internally won, the “11 winning combinations 1-1” to “11 winning combinations 1-6” or regardless of the stop operation timing and the stopping operation order. The control is performed such that the symbol combination of any one of "11-card combination 2-1" to "11-card combination 2-4" ("11-card combination") is preferentially displayed on the activated line. Further, when the "special combination" and "BB" are overlapped and the internal winning is performed, regardless of the timing of the stop operation, one of the symbols of the winning "1 sheet combination" (see FIG. 24) The control is performed so that the combination is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

Further, the "RB combination" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "44") is not determined as the internal winning combination in the normal gaming state, but is determined as the internal winning combination in the BB gaming state (FIG. 19). (See FIG. 23). When the "RB combination" is internally won in the BB game state, the symbol combination of either "9-piece combination 1" or "9-piece combination 2" is given priority regardless of the stop operation timing and the stop operation order. The control is performed so that it is displayed on the active line.

<Relationship between the stop operation sequence and the winning combination for the internal winning combination in the MB gaming state>
As shown in FIG. 27, in the MB gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "CB combination" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "45"), which is the stop operation order. Also, a symbol of either "11-card combination 1-1" to "11-card combination 1-6" or "11-card combination 2-1" to "11-card combination 2-4"("11-cardcombination") The combination is displayed on the activated line.

Similarly, in the MB gaming state, the internal winning combination is "RT0 rep + CB combination" (small win/replay data pointer value is "46"), "RT1 left middle right rep + CB combination" (small win/replay) Data pointer value is "47"), "RT1 left and right middle lip + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value is "48"), "RT1 left and right middle lip + CB role" (small role / replay data pointer Value of "49"), "RT1 middle right/left rep + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value is "50"), "RT1 right/left middle rep + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value Is "51"), "RT1 right middle left rep + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value is "52"), "RT2 left middle right rep + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value Is "53"), "RT2 left and right middle lip + CB combination" (small role/replay data pointer value is "54"), "RT2 middle lip + CB combination" (small combination/replay data pointer value is "55" )), "RT2 right middle left lip + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value is "56"), "RT2 right middle left lip + CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value is "57") ), “Red Lip+CB role” (small role/replay data pointer value is “58”), “Blue lip+CB role” (small role/replay data pointer value is “59”), “green lip+CB” "Position" (small role/replay data pointer value is "60"), "red-blue lip + CB role" (small role / replay data pointer value is "61"), "red-green lip + CB role" (small Role/replay data pointer value is "62", "Blue/green Lip A+CB role" (small role/replay data pointer value is "63"), and "Blue/green Lip B+CB role" (small role/replay) If the value of the data pointer is "64"), no matter which stop operation order is selected, "11-piece combination 1-1" to "11-piece combination 1-6" or "11-piece combination The control is performed so that the symbol combination of any one of "2-1" to "11-card combination 2-4" ("11-card combination") is displayed on the activated line.

On the other hand, in the MB gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "RT3 maintenance rep + CB combination" (small winning combination/replay data pointer value is "65"), the stop operation sequence is "middle left and right" and " In the case of "middle right left" (that is, the first stop operation to the stop button 19C), any one of "10-sheet combination 1" to "10-sheet combination 6" ("10-sheet combination") regardless of the stop operation timing. While the control is performed so that the combination of symbols in “)” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, when the stop operation order is any other stop operation order, “11 pieces are printed regardless of the stop operation timing. The combination of symbols of any one of the winning combination 1-1" to "11 winning combinations 1-6" or the "11 winning combinations 2-1" to "11 winning combinations 2-4" ("11 winning combinations") is given priority. The control is performed so that it is displayed on the activated line.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the end condition of the MB gaming state is that the payout of medals exceeding 10 sheets is made, when the “11 coin combination” is established, the MB gaming state is one game. Although it ends, when the "10-card combination" is established, the MB game state does not end in one game, and the next game is also controlled to the MB game state. That is, when the MB game state ends in one game, the player can increase the number of medals by only 8 (11-three inserted), but when the MB game state can play two games, the player can It is possible to increase 15 medals (first game: 10 coins-three inserted coins/second game: 11 coins-three inserted coins). Therefore, in the first game in the MB game state, the stop operation sequence "middle left and right" and "middle right left" when the "RT3 maintenance rip + CB combination" (small combination/replay data pointer value is "65") is internally won (That is, the first stop operation to the stop button 19C) is a stop operation procedure that is advantageous to the player. Also, in the second game in the MB game state, "RT3 maintenance rep + CB combination" (a small combination/replay data pointer value is "65") is "middle left and right" and "middle right left" (ie , The stop operation sequence other than the first stop operation to the stop button 19C is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player.

Similarly, in the first game in the MB game state, "RT3 left rep + CB combination" (small role/replay data pointer value is "66"), "RT3 middle rep + CB combination" (small combination/replay data pointer) Value is "67") or "RT3 right rep + CB combination" (small combination/replay data pointer value is "68") is internally won, the stop operation sequence "middle left and right" and "middle right left" ( That is, the first stop operation on the stop button 19C is a stop operation procedure advantageous for the player. Similarly, in the second game in the MB game state, “RT3 left rep + CB combination” (small role/replay data pointer value is “66”), “RT3 middle rep + CB combination” (small combination/replay) The value of the data pointer is "67", or "RT3 right rep + CB role" (small win/replay data pointer value is "68"), the "middle left and right" and "middle right left" (ie , The stop operation sequence other than the first stop operation to the stop button 19C is a procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player.

[Structure of storage area allocated to main RAM]
Next, the configuration of various storage areas assigned to the main RAM 95 will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 to 34.

<Internal winning combination storage area>
The internal winning combination storing area shown in FIG. 28 is composed of 34 internal winning storing areas 1 to 34. The internal winning combination storage area is configured to be able to store data (bits) corresponding to each symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 14 to 18), and as a result of the internal lottery process, the establishment is established. "1" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the allowed combination of symbols, and "0" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the not allowed combination of symbols.

<Display combination storage area>
The display combination storing area shown in FIG. 29 is composed of 34 storage areas of display combination storing areas 1 to 34. The display combination storing area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storing area described above, and as a result of the internal lottery processing, among the combinations of the symbols that are allowed to be established, of the symbols that can be displayed on the activated line. Data (bit) corresponding to the combination is set to "1", and data (bit) corresponding to the combination of the symbols that cannot be displayed is set to "0". Further, the display combination storing area is updated every time each reel of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped, based on the data (bit) stored in the later-described symbol code storing area. , The combination of symbols for which "1" is set becomes a display winning combination or a winning combination even after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped. That is, the display combination storing area is used for the main CPU 93 to identify the display combination or the established combination after all of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped.

<Design code storage area>
The symbol code storage area shown in FIG. 30 is composed of 34 symbol code storage areas 1 to 34. The symbol code storage area is configured in the same manner as the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area described above, and is effective among the combinations of symbols defined in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 14 to 18). "1" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that can be displayed on the line, and "0" is set to the data (bit) corresponding to the combination of symbols that cannot be displayed. Set. The data (bit) of the symbol code storage area is updated every time each reel of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is stopped.

<Storage area for carryover combination>
The carryover combination storage area shown in FIG. 31 stores data relating to the carryover combination. For example, in the case of internally winning the BB, when the bit 0 of the carryover combination storing area 1 is set to "1", the combination of the symbols of "BB" is displayed, and the BB game state (general) is entered, "0" is set to the corresponding bit.

Further, for example, in the case of internal winning in JACIN2, "1" is set in bits 2 to 4 of the carryover combination storing area 2, and the combination of symbols in any of "JACIN2-1" to "JACIN2-3" When it is displayed and shifts to the BB game state (RB2), "0" is set to the corresponding bit.

<Game status flag storage area>
In the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. 32, data relating to each game state of the general game state, the MB game state and the BB game state is stored. For example, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning state of the BB (between BB flags) is set, "1" is set to bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, and other bits of the gaming state flag storage area Is set to "0".

<Storing area flag storage area>
The storage area for the effect state flag shown in FIG. 33 is normally, during bonus, in special zone, during normal CZ, during ART preparation, during ART, during CZ during ART, during addition zone preparation, during addition zone, CZ medium high probability chance. And data relating to each effect state in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone are stored. For example, when shifting from normal to normal CZ, "1" is set in bit 3 of the effect state flag storage area 1, and "0" is set in bit 0 of the effect state flag storage area 1.

Further, for example, when the CZ medium-high accuracy chance is shifted to during the normal medium CZ, "1" is set to bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 2, and further, from the CZ medium-high accuracy chance to the CZ medium-high accuracy zone. When the transition is made, "1" is set in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2 and "0" is set in bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 2.

<Direction control information storage area>
The effect control information storage area shown in FIG. 34 is an area in which various kinds of information (data) relating to effect control managed by the main CPU 93 are stored and which is referred to when generating effect state command data described later.

As shown in FIG. 34, the information stored in the effect control information storage area is information (game state flag) indicating the above-mentioned game state flag (that is, game state) and the above-mentioned effect state flag (that is, effect state). Indicating information (effect state flag), information indicating a transmission state of instruction information described later (that is, a notification state of a stop operation procedure) (instruction information transmission state flag), and a stop operation sequence forming instruction information described below. Information (stop operation sequence), information indicating current CZ management information (current CZ management information) among CZ management information described below, and information indicating current ART management information among current ART management information described below (current ART management information), information indicating the number of pieces of ART management information 1 stocked (ART management information 1) out of ART management information described below (ART management information 1 stock number), and ART management information 2 of ART management information described below. Information indicating the number of stocks (stored) (ART management information 2 stock number), and information indicating the number of stocks (stored) of ART management information 3 among the ART management information described later (ART management information 3). The number of stocks) and the information (ART management information 4 stock number) indicating the number of stocked (stored) ART management information 4 among the ART management information described later.

In the "game state flag", effect control information is stored based on the data stored in the game state flag storage area shown in FIG. For example, if "1" is set in bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 1 shown in FIG. 32, "1" is stored in the "game state flag", and bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 3 is stored. When "1" is set to "," "18" is stored in the "game state flag".

Further, in the "production state flag", production control information is stored based on the data stored in the production state flag storage area shown in FIG. For example, if "1" is set in bit 0 of the effect state flag storage area 1 shown in FIG. 33, "1" is stored in the "effect state flag" and bit 2 of the game state flag storage area 2 is stored. If "1" is set to, "11" is stored in the "production state flag".

Further, in the "instruction information transmission state flag", production control information indicating whether or not the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is informed according to the production state and the content of the notification (that is, the transmission state of the instruction information) is included. Is stored. For example, if the production state is in the special zone, during ART preparation, during ART, during CZ during ART, during addition zone preparation or during addition zone, "1" is stored in the "instruction information transmission state flag", and the production state Is a CZ medium-high probability chance, "2" is stored in the "instruction information transmission state flag", and "0" is stored in the "instruction information transmission state flag" in other effect states.

Further, in the "stop operation sequence", effect control information indicating the stop operation sequence is stored according to the game state, the instruction information transmission state, and the internal winning combination. For example, "1" is stored in the "instruction information transmission state flag", and the internal winning combination is "RT1 left center right rep", "RT2 left center right rep", "left center right bell A" or "left". In the case of "middle right bell B", "1" indicating the stop operation sequence of "left middle right" is stored in "stop operation sequence". If the internal winning combination is “RT1 left/right center lip”, “RT2 left/right center lip”, “left/right center bell A” or “left/right center bell B”, the “stop operation order” is “left/right center”. “2” indicating the stop operation order is stored. When the internal winning combination is “RT1 center left/right lip”, “center left/right bell A” or “center left/right bell B”, “3” indicates the “center left/right” stop operation order. Is stored. If the internal winning combination is "RT1 center right/left lip", "center right/left bell A" or "center right/left bell B", "stop operation order" indicates "center right/left" stop operation order. Is stored. When the internal winning combination is “RT1 right-left middle lip”, “RT2 right-left middle lip”, “right-left middle bell A” or “right-left middle bell B”, “stop left-right” is “right-left middle”. “5” indicating the stop operation order is stored. When the internal winning combination is “RT1 right middle left lip”, “RT2 right middle left lip”, “right middle left bell A” or “right middle left bell B”, “stop operation order” is “ “6” indicating the stop operation sequence of “right middle left” is stored.

Further, for example, when "1" is stored in the "instruction information transmission state flag" and the internal winning combination is "RT3 left lip", the stop operation of "left first stop" is included in the "stop operation sequence". “7” indicating the order is stored. In addition, the internal winning combination is "RT2 middle lip", "RT3 middle lip", "RT3 maintenance lip + CB combination", "RT3 left lip + CB combination", "RT3 middle lip + CB combination" in the first game in the MB game state. Alternatively, in the case of “RT3 right lip+CB combination”, “8” indicating the stop operation order of “middle first stop” is stored in “stop operation order”. When the internal winning combination is “RT3 right rep”, “9” indicating the stop operation order of “right first stop” is stored in “stop operation order”. In addition, when the internal winning combination is “RT3 maintenance lip+CB combination”, “RT3 left lip+CB combination”, “RT3 middle lip+CB combination” or “RT3 right lip+CB combination” in the second game in the MB game state May be stored in the “stop operation order” other than “8”.

Further, for example, when “2” is stored in the “instruction information transmission state flag” and the internal winning combination is “left middle right bell B” or “left right middle bell B”, the “stop operation order” is set. Stores “7” indicating the stop operation sequence of “left first stop”. Further, when the internal winning combination is “middle left/right bell B” or “middle right/left bell B”, “8” indicating the stop operation order of “middle first stop” is stored in the “stop operation order”. .. Further, when the internal winning combination is “Right left middle bell B” or “Right middle left bell B”, “9” indicating the stop operation order of “right first stop” is stored in the “stop operation order”. It

In addition, when "1" is stored in the "instruction information transmission state flag" and the internal winning combination is not "push order combination" (for example, "common combination"), and "instruction information transmission state flag" When “0” is stored in “0”, “0” is stored in “stop operation sequence”.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the main control circuit 91 performs control as to whether or not to notify the procedure of the player's stop operation (that is, control of the effect state). When notifying the player of the stop operation procedure, any one of the stop operation orders “1” to “9” as instruction information is stored in the above-mentioned “stop operation order” and includes this instruction information. By transmitting the effect state command to the sub-control circuit 101, the procedure of the stop operation by the player is notified. On the other hand, when the procedure of the stop operation by the player is not notified, none of the stop operation orders “1” to “9” as instruction information is stored in the above-mentioned “stop operation order”, and the stop operation order “0” is stored. Is stored, the procedure of the stop operation by the player is not notified.

Further, in the present embodiment, the main control circuit 91 configured by the main control board 71 and the sub control circuit 101 configured by the sub control board 72 are provided only in one direction from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101. It is configured to be able to communicate (see FIG. 7).

That is, in the present embodiment, when the instruction information is not transmitted from the main control circuit 91, the sub control circuit 101 is configured so that it cannot notify the procedure of the player's stop operation. As a result, even if some illegal act is performed on the sub control circuit 101 (for example, illegal modification, illegal access to the communication path from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101), the equilibrium of the game is achieved. It is possible to ensure the game playability and prevent the game store from suffering an unexpected disadvantage.

In the present embodiment, for example, in the case of notifying the procedure of the player's stop operation, the effect state command is transmitted to the sub-control circuit 101, and in the case of not notifying the player's stop operation procedure, the effect is produced. It is also possible not to transmit the status command to the sub control circuit 101.

Further, in the "current CZ management information", performance control information indicating CZ management information of the currently executed or stocked (stored) CZ (normal CZ or ART CZ) is stored. In this embodiment, CZ management information 1 to 7 is defined as CZ management information. Details of the CZ management information will be described later. In the case of CZ management information 1, “1” is stored in “current CZ management information”, in the case of CZ management information 2, “2” is stored in “current CZ management information”, and CZ management information 3 , "3" is stored in the "current CZ management information", "4" is stored in the "current CZ management information" in the case of CZ management information 4, and "4" is stored in the CZ management information 5. “5” is stored in the “current CZ management information”, “6” is stored in the “current CZ management information” in the case of CZ management information 6, and “6” is stored in the “current CZ management information 7”. "7" is stored in "Information". Further, when the CZ is not executed and the stock (storage) is not performed, “0” is stored in the “current CZ management information”.

In the "current ART management information", effect control information indicating the ART management information of the currently executed ART (during ART) is stored. In this embodiment, ART management information 1 to 4 is defined as the ART management information. Details of the ART management information will be described later. In the case of ART management information 1, “1” is stored in “current ART management information”, and in the case of ART management information 2, “2” is stored in “current ART management information” and ART management information 3 In the case of, "3" is stored in the "current ART management information", and in the case of ART management information 4, "4" is stored in the "current ART management information". When ART is not executed, "0" is stored in "current ART management information".

In addition, "control number of 1 pieces of ART management information" to "4 number of stocks of ART management information" stores effect control information indicating the number of stocks of ART management information of the ART that is stocked (stored). Note that, in the present embodiment, a maximum of 255 pieces (storage) is possible for each of the ART management information 1 to the ART management information 4, but the number is not limited to this. For example, a larger number (stock) may be stocked, or a smaller number (for example, 10) may be stocked (stored). Further, one ART management information (for example, ART management information 1) and another ART management information (for example, ART management information 4) may have different stock (storable) stock numbers.

Although illustration is omitted, in the effect information storage area, values of various counters related to effect control (for example, CZ counter described later) and various flags (for example, added flag described later) are stored. Values are also stored, and these values are transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101 by the effect state command. Therefore, the sub-control circuit 101 can select appropriate effect data according to changes in these values. That is, the main control circuit 91 and the sub control circuit 101 cooperate with each other to enable effect control.

[Structure of lottery table used for production, etc.]
Next, with reference to FIGS. 35 to 62, various lottery tables stored in the main ROM 94 and used for effects and the like will be described.

<Lock lottery table when winning BB>
The BB winning lock lottery table shown in FIG. 35 is referred to in a normal process (see FIG. 80 and FIG. 81) described later to determine whether or not to execute the BB winning lock when the BB is internally won. Used for. That is, it is used to determine whether or not to execute a predetermined lock in the effect state “normal”. In addition, also in the other effect states, when the BB is internally won, whether or not to execute the BB winning lock may be determined using the table.

As shown in FIG. 35, in the BB winning lock lottery table, when “BB” is internally won, “red blue green 1 sheet A” (small win/replay data pointer value is “28”) or “ Based on whether or not a red and blue green sheet B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "29") is duplicated ("red and blue green and duplicate" or "other than that") and the lottery value Whether or not the lock is executed at the time of winning the BB is determined by a lottery.

In FIG. 35, for example, in the case of “overlap with red, blue and green”, it is determined that the BB winning lock is “none” with a probability of 96/128, and the BB winning lock is with a probability of 32/128. It is determined to be “present”. In addition, in the case of "other than that", it is determined that the BB winning lock is "none" with a probability of 127/128, and the BB winning lock is "present" with a probability of 1/128. It is determined. That is, when "BB" is double-winned with "one red-blue-green one A" or "one red-blue-green one B", the lock at the time of winning the BB is more easily executed than in the other cases. When the lock at the time of winning the BB is executed, more benefits are provided than when the lock is not executed (see FIG. 80).

Note that whether or not to execute the BB winning lock may be determined without using the BB winning lock lottery table shown in FIG. For example, if "BB" is duplicated with "1 red, blue, green, and A", it is not determined that the lock is executed at the time of winning the BB, and "BB" is duplicated with "1 red, blue, green, and B". When winning, it may be determined that the lock at the time of winning the BB is always executed. That is, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which the winning is repeated) may be associated with the presence/absence of execution of the BB winning lock in a one-to-one correspondence.

<CZ/ART transfer lottery table>
The CZ/ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 36 is referred to in the during-normal CZ process (see FIGS. 75 to 77) described later and the below-described normal process (see FIGS. 80 and 81), and the effect state “normal CZ "Medium" is used to determine whether or not to promote the CZ management information, and in the production state "normal", whether or not to shift to the production state "normal medium CZ medium" or the production state "ART". It is used to decide whether or not to shift to “medium”.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the CZ/ART transfer lottery table, the presence or absence of CZ/ART transfer is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. In the CZ/ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 36 and other lottery tables described later, the internal winning combination "red single" is "red lip" (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "13"). The internal winning combination "blue single" indicates "blue lip" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "14"), and the internal winning combination "green single" indicates "green lip" (small win. The value of the replay data pointer is “15”), and the internal winning combination “special double” is “red-blue rep” (small role/replay data pointer value is “16”), “red-green rep” ( Small win/replay data pointer value is "17", "Blue green rep A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "18") and "Blue green rep B" (small win/replay data) The pointer value is "18", and the internal winning combination "MB" is "MB1" (the value of the bonus data pointer is "2") and "MB2" (the value of the bonus data pointer is "3"). Is shown.

In FIG. 36, for example, when the internal winning combination is “red single”, it is determined with a probability of 124/128 that the CZ/ART transition is “non-winning”, and there is a probability of 4/128 with CZ/ART. It is determined that the transition is a “win”. When the internal winning combination is "blue single", the probability of CZ/ART transition is determined to be "non-winning" with a probability of 118/128, and the CZ/ART transition is "winning" with a probability of 10/128. Is determined. In addition, when the internal winning combination is “green single”, it is determined that the CZ/ART transition is “non-win” with a probability of 102/128, and the CZ/ART transition is “winning” with a probability of 26/128. Is determined. If the internal winning combination is “special double”, the probability of CZ/ART transition is determined to be “non-win” with a probability of 76/128, and the CZ/ART transition is determined to be “win” with a probability of 52/128. Is determined. That is, there is a high expectation that the internal winning combination will shift to CZ or ART in the order of “red single”, “blue single”, “green single”, and “special double”.

<Transition content lottery table at CZ/ART transition win>
The CZ/ART transition winning selection lottery table shown in FIG. 37 is referred to in the normal medium CZ process (see FIGS. 75 to 77) described later and the normal process (see FIGS. 80 and 81) described later, and is described above. When the lottery result using the CZ/ART transfer lottery table is “winning”, it is used to determine the winning content (transition content).

As shown in FIG. 37, in the transition content lottery table during CZ/ART transition win, the transition content is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. In the CZ/ART transition winning selection lottery table shown in FIG. 37 and other lottery tables described later, the internal winning combination "red-blue double" is "red-blue rep" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer). Indicates "16"), the internal winning combination "red-green double" indicates "red-green rep" (small winning/replay data pointer value is "17"), and the internal winning combination "blue-green double" , "Blue-green rep A" (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "18") and "blue-green rep B" (the value of the small role/replay data pointer is "18").

Further, in the CZ/ART transition winning selection lottery table shown in FIG. 37 and other lottery tables described later, “CZ management information 1” manages execution of a “red character chance zone” (red CZ) described later. The “CZ management information 2” is used to manage execution of a “blue character chance zone” (blue CZ) described later, and the “CZ management information 3” is described later. It is used to manage the execution of the "green character chance zone" (green CZ). The "CZ management information 4" manages the execution of the "red-blue character chance zone" (red-blue CZ) described later. The "CZ management information 5" is used to manage execution of a "red-green character chance zone" (red-green CZ) described later, and "CZ management information 6". Is used to manage the execution of the “blue-green character chance zone” (blue-green CZ) described later, and the “CZ management information 7” is the “red-blue-green character chance zone” (red-blue It is used to manage the execution of the green CZ). When the "ART win" is decided, the shift to "during ART" is confirmed.

In FIG. 37, for example, when the internal winning combination is “red single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 1” with a probability of 126/128, and the transition content with a probability of 1/128. It is determined to be "CZ management information 4", and the transition content is determined to be "CZ management information 5" with a probability of 1/128. When the internal winning combination is “blue single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 2” with a probability of 126/128, and the transition content is “CZ management information with a probability of 1/128”. 4”, and with a probability of 1/128, it is determined that the migration content is “CZ management information 6”. When the internal winning combination is “green single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 3” with a probability of 126/128, and the transition content is “CZ management information with a probability of 1/128”. 5”, and the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 6” with a probability of 1/128. That is, suggesting the contents of CZ to be transferred depending on whether the symbol displayed in the display window 4 is a "red special" symbol, a "blue special" symbol, or a "green special" symbol. You can do it.

Note that, in FIG. 37, for example, when the internal winning combination is “red single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 1” with a probability of 128/128, and the internal winning combination is “blue single”. If the internal winning combination is “green single”, the transition content is determined to be 128/128 with a probability of 128/128. If the internal winning combination is “red and blue double”, it is determined that the transition content is “CZ management information 4” with a probability of 128/128. When the winning combination is "red-green double", it is determined that the transition content is "CZ management information 5" with a probability of 128/128, and when the internal winning combination is "blue-green double", it is 128. It is also possible to determine that the migration content is “CZ management information 6” with a probability of /128. That is, depending on whether the symbol displayed in the display window 4 is the "red special" symbol, the "blue special" symbol, or the "green special" symbol, the contents of the CZ to be transferred are surely suggested. It may be done.

Further, the transfer content may be determined without using the transfer content lottery table at the time of CZ/ART transfer win shown in FIG. For example, when the internal winning combination is "red single", "CZ management information 1" is always determined as the transition content, and when the internal winning combination is "blue single", the transition content is always "CZ management information 1". If "2" is decided and the internal winning combination is "green single", the transition content is always "CZ management information 3", and if the internal winning combination is "red-blue double", the transition content is When "CZ management information 4" is always decided and the internal winning combination is "red-green double", "CZ management information 5" is always decided as the transition content, and when the internal winning combination is "blue-green double" In this case, "CZ management information 6" is always determined as the transfer content, and if the internal winning combination is "MB", the "ART winning" is always determined as the transfer content, and the internal winning combination is determined to be another specific internal player. In the case of a winning combination (for example, "red/blue/green one A" can be won without overlapping with "BB", "red/blue/green one A") The CZ management information 7” may be determined. That is, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which the winning is repeated) may be associated with the transition content in a one-to-one correspondence. Similarly, without using the CZ/ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 36, the presence/absence of CZ/ART transfer may be associated with the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which multiple wins have been made) in a one-to-one correspondence. Good.

<CZ/ART transition winning sign lottery table>
The CZ/ART transition win number game lottery table shown in FIG. 38 is referred to in the normal process (see FIGS. 80 and 81) described later, and the lottery result using the above-described CZ/ART transition lottery table is “win”. When the winning content (transition content) is determined by using the above-described CZ/ART transition winning content migration content lottery table, the performance state is changed from "normal" to the production status in accordance with the winning content (transition content). It is used to determine the number of precursor games until shifting to the state “during normal CZ” (that is, the number of games from the shift is determined until the actual shift).

As shown in FIG. 38, in the CZ/ART transition win precursor game number lottery table, the precursor game number is determined by lottery based on the transition content and the lottery value. Note that in the CZ/ART transition pre-winning game number lottery table shown in FIG. 38 and other lottery tables described later, the transition content “CZ single” indicates “CZ management information 1” to “CZ management information 3”, The transfer content "CZ double or more" indicates "CZ management information 4" to "CZ management information 7".

In FIG. 38, for example, when the transition content is “CZ single”, the number of precursor games “4” is determined with a probability of 16/128, and the number of precursor games “10” is determined with a probability of 12/128. The predictive game number "20" is determined with a probability of 72/128, and the predictive game number "24" is determined with a probability of 28/128. When the transition content is “CZ double or more”, the number of precursor games “4” is determined with a probability of 12/128, and the number of precursor games “10” is determined with a probability of 12/128. The predictive game number “20” is determined with the probability of, the predictive game number “24” is determined with the probability of 54/128, and the predictive game number “28” is determined with the probability of 8/128. That is, the higher the degree of expectation of the transition content, the easier the determination of a relatively long number of precursor games.

<Bonus ART transfer lottery table>
The bonus mid ART transition lottery table shown in FIG. 39 is referred to in a bonus mid process (see FIG. 79) described later, and in the effect state “during bonus” (that is, the BB game state), after that, the effect state “during ART”. It is used to decide whether or not to move to.

As shown in FIG. 39, in the bonus ART transition lottery table, the presence/absence of ART transition (and the content of ART management information) is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. It should be noted that, for example, in the effect state “bonus” when the ART transition has already been decided, such as the effect state “bonus in” which has shifted from the effect state “during ART”, only the content of the ART management information is present. Is determined by lottery, and the determined ART management information is added. Further, in the bonus ART transition lottery table shown in FIG. 39, the internal winning combination “7 complete” is “7 complete rep A” (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is “25”) and “7 complete rep B”. (The value of the small win/replay data pointer is "26"), and the internal winning combination "determined win" is "11 cards" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "42"). It is a thing.

Also, in the bonus bonus ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 39 and other lottery tables described later, “ART management information 1” is used as a “blue ball” described later to manage the number of notifications during ART. , "ART management information 2" is used to manage the number of notifications during ART as "yellow ball" described later, and "ART management information 3" is the number of notifications during ART as "green ball" described later. The “ART management information 4” is used to manage the number of notifications during ART as a “rainbow ball” described later.

In FIG. 39, for example, when the internal winning combination is “7 sets”, the “ART transfer+ART management information 1” is determined with a probability of 56/128, and the “ART transfer+ART management information 2” is determined with a probability of 40/128. Is determined, and “ART transfer+ART management information 3” is determined with a probability of 32/128. Further, when the internal winning combination is “JACIN2”, “ART transfer+ART management information 2” is determined with a probability of 96/128, and “ART transfer+ART management information 3” is determined with a probability of 31/128. “ART migration+ART management information 4” is determined with a probability of 1/128. When the internal winning combination is the “determined winning combination”, the “ART transfer+ART management information 4” is determined with a probability of 128/128. The internal winning combination “7 sets” can be determined only in the BB gaming state (RB2, JACIN2 internal winning in RB2 and JACIN2 internal winning in RB2) (see FIGS. 19 to 23), and thus the BB game. In the state, the BB gaming state (RB2, JACIN2 internal winning in RB2 and JACIN2 internal winning in RB2) is a gaming state with high expectations for the player.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the ART transfer is determined during the bonus, one ART management information is always added from the “ART management information 1” to the “ART management information 4”. There is. That is, although one ART management information is guaranteed, the number of guaranteed ART management information is not limited to this. For example, when the ART transition is decided during the bonus, but only one ART management information is given and the bonus ends, one ART management information (for example, “ART management information 1”) is further added. May be given. That is, when the ART transfer is determined, the addition of a plurality of (for example, two) ART management information may be guaranteed.

The contents of the ART management information may be determined without using the bonus ART transition lottery table shown in FIG. For example, when the internal winning combination is “7-matching rep A”, “ART management information 1” is always determined as the content of the ART management information, and when the internal winning combination is “7-matching rep B”, ART "ART management information 2" is always determined as the content of the management information, and when the internal winning combination is "JACIN2", "ART management information 3" is always determined as the content of the ART management information, and the internal winning combination is " In the case of the “determined hand”, “ART management information 4” may be always determined as the content of the ART management information. In other words, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which the winning is repeated) may be associated with the content of the ART management information in a one-to-one correspondence.

<Special zone ART transfer lottery table>
The special zone ART transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 40 is referred to in a special zone process (see FIG. 78) described later, and whether or not to shift to the production state “in addition zone” in the production state “special zone”. Used to determine It should be noted that the effect state "during special zone" is switched to the effect state "during addition zone" and then to the effect state "during ART". Since it is determined whether or not to transfer, in FIG. 40, it is described whether or not to win the “ART transfer”. However, the effect state "during special zone" may be an effect state in which it is determined whether or not to directly shift to the effect state "during ART".

As shown in FIG. 40, in the special zone ART transition lottery table, the presence or absence of ART transition is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. In the special zone ART transition lottery table shown in FIG. 40 and other lottery tables described later, the internal winning combination “push order bell” is “left middle right bell A”, “left right middle bell A”, “center left right”. Bell A, Middle Right Left Bell A, Right Left Middle Bell A, Right Middle Left Bell A, Left Middle Right Bell B, Left Right Middle Bell B, Middle Left Right Bell B, Middle Right left bell B, "right left middle bell B" and "right middle left bell B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "30" to "41"), and the internal winning combination "CB win" is The internal winning combination including the “CB winning combination” (small winning/replaying data pointer value is “45” to “68”) is shown, and the internal winning combination “special single” is “red lip”, “blue lip” and "Green Lip" (small win/replay data pointer value is "13" to "15"), and internal winning combination "determined winning combination" includes internal winning combinations including "BB" (for example, small winning combination/replay The value of the data pointer for use indicates "28", "29", "42" and "43").

In FIG. 40, for example, when the internal winning combination is the “common winning combination”, it is determined that the ART transition is “non-winning” with a probability of 116/128, and the ART transition is “winning” with a probability of 12/128. Is determined. When the internal winning combination is “special single”, it is determined with a probability of 128/128 that the ART transition is “winning”.

The presence/absence of ART transfer may be determined without using the ART zone lottery table in the special zone shown in FIG. For example, if the internal winning combination is "special single", "special double", or "fixed winning combination", it is always decided to switch to ART, and if it is another internal winning combination, it is switched to ART. May not be determined. That is, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which multiple winnings have been won) and the presence/absence of ART transition may be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.

<Number of lottery tables for the number of precursor games at the time of winning the ART transfer in the special zone>
41. The special zone ART transition lottery game lottery table shown in FIG. 41 is referred to in the special zone process (see FIG. 78) described later, and the lottery result using the special zone ART transition lottery table described above is “winning”. "," is used to determine the number of precursor games from the effect state "in the special zone" to the effect state "in the additional zone".

As shown in FIG. 41, in the special zone ART transition pre-winning game number lottery table, the number of precursor games is determined by lottery based on the lottery value.

In FIG. 41, for example, the number of precursor games “0” is determined with a probability of 32/128 (that is, immediately after the ART transition winning, the production state “shifts to the additional zone”), and the number of precursor games with a probability of 96/128. "1" is determined. In addition, if the production state “in the special zone” is within the range of the number of games that can be continued (for example, 10 games if there are 10 remaining games), the number of precursor games determined here is not limited to the above. ..

<Special addition execution lottery table>
The special addition execution lottery table shown in FIG. 42 is referred to in the CZ during ART process (FIGS. 68 to 70) and the CZ during normal process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and the effect state “during CZ during ART”. Or “in normal CZ”, it is used to determine whether or not the point counter is specially added. Specific control for specially adding the point counter will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 42, in the special addition execution lottery table, the presence or absence of execution of the special addition and the number of games to be executed are determined by lottery based on the effect state flag and the lottery value.

In FIG. 42, for example, when the effect state is “during normal CZ”, it is determined that the special addition is “none” (that is, not executed) with a probability of 118/128, and 3/128 is determined. It is determined that the special addition is “present (7th game)” with a probability of (that is, the special addition is executed in the seventh game), and the special addition is “present (10th game) with a probability of 7/128. Eye)” (that is, the special addition is executed in the tenth game). When the effect state is “during CZ during ART”, the special addition is determined to be “none” with a probability of 126/128, and the special addition is “present (with 7 games) with a probability of 1/128. It is determined that the special addition is “Yes (10th game)” with a probability of 1/128.

<CZ continuous mode lottery table>
The CZ continuation mode lottery table shown in FIG. 43 is referred to in the CZ mid-ART process (FIGS. 68 to 70) and the normal mid-CZ process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later. Or “in normal CZ”, it is used to determine the CZ continuation mode to be referred to when drawing whether or not to end the CZ.

As shown in FIG. 43, in the CZ continuation mode lottery table, the CZ continuation mode is determined by lottery based on the management information (including both CZ management information and ART management information) and the lottery value. In the CZ continuation mode lottery table shown in FIG. 43, “low probability (1%)” and “high probability (100%)” are defined as CZ continuation modes. In the CZ continuation mode "low probability (1%)", it is determined that the CZ end lottery result will be "non-winning" (that is, the CZ will be continued) with a probability of 1/100 during the CZ end lottery. , C/100 is a CZ lottery mode in which it is determined that the CZ end lottery result is “win” (that is, the CZ is finished) with a probability of 99/100. Further, in the CZ continuation mode “high probability (100%)”, it is possible to set the CZ end lottery result to “non-win” (that is, to continue the CZ) at a probability of 100/100 in the CZ end lottery. This is the determined CZ continuation mode. The CZ continuation mode is not limited to this. For example, "high probability (75%)" may be defined as the CZ continuation mode, or "medium probability (50%)" may be defined.

In FIG. 43, for example, when “CZ management information 7” is stored in the current CZ management information as management information or “1” or more is stored in the ART management information 4 stock number, The CZ continuation mode “high probability (100%)” is determined with a probability of 128/128. On the other hand, when the management information is not stored (in the case of "other"), the CZ continuation mode "low probability (1%)" is determined with a probability of 127/128, and the CZ with a probability of 1/128. The continuation mode “high probability (100%)” is determined. That is, when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 7” is executed, the CZ does not end, so that the ART transfer and the addition of the ART management information are substantially determined. The same applies when the CZ is executed when the ART management information 4 stock number is "1" or more.

<CZ middle and high probability chance transfer lottery table>
The CZ medium/high probability chance transfer lottery table shown in FIG. 44 is referred to in the CZ during ART process (FIGS. 68 to 70) and the CZ during normal process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and the effect state “during ART”. It is used to determine whether or not to shift to the effect state “CZ medium high probability chance” in “CZ medium” or “normal medium CZ”.

As shown in FIG. 44, in the CZ medium-high probability chance transfer lottery table, the presence or absence of the CZ medium-high probability chance transfer is determined by lottery based on the CZ management information and the lottery value.

In FIG. 44, for example, in the case of “CZ management information 1”, the probability of CZ middle-high probability transition is determined to be “non-win” with a probability of 72/128, and the CZ medium-high probability with a probability of 56/128. It is decided that the chance transfer is “winning”. Further, in the case of "CZ management information 2", it is determined with a probability of 126/128 that the CZ middle/high probability chance transition is "non-win", and with a probability of 2/128, the CZ middle/high probability chance transition is " Winning” is determined. Further, in the case of “CZ management information 3”, it is determined that the CZ medium-high probability chance transition is “non-win” with a probability of 122/128, and the CZ medium-high probability chance transition is “with a probability of 6/128. Winning” is determined. That is, when the CZ based on the "CZ management information 1" is executed, the performance state "CZ medium-high probability chance" is more than when the CZ based on the "CZ management information 2" or the "CZ management information 3" is executed. The expectation to move to is high.

<CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer lottery table>
The CZ middle/high-accuracy zone shift lottery table shown in FIG. 45 is referred to in the during-CRT during-CZ process (FIGS. 68 to 70) and the during-normal-CZ process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later. It is used to determine whether or not to shift to the effect state "in the CZ middle high-accuracy zone" in the "in CZ" or "in the middle CZ". In the present embodiment, not only in the effect state "CZ during medium CZ" or "during medium CZ during normal", but also when transitioning to the effect state "during CZ medium high accuracy zone" via the effect state "CZ medium high accuracy chance". In some cases, the state directly shifts to the "CZ middle high accuracy zone".

As shown in FIG. 45, in the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer lottery table, the presence/absence of the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value. In the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transition lottery table shown in FIG. 45 and other lottery tables described later, the internal winning combination “push order bell B” is “left middle right bell B”, “left right middle bell B”, and “middle bell”. Left and right bell B, "middle right left bell B", "right left middle bell B" and "right middle left bell B" (small win/replay data pointer value is "36" to "41"). ..

In FIG. 45, for example, when the internal winning combination is “special single”, it is determined with a probability of 127/128 that the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transition is “non-winning”, and with a probability of 1/128, the CZ is selected. It is decided that the middle-high accuracy zone transition is a "winning". Further, when the internal winning combination is “special double”, it is determined with a probability of 128/128 that the CZ middle/high probability zone transition is “winning”.

The presence/absence of CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer may be determined without using the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer lottery table shown in FIG. For example, if the internal winning combination is "special double" or "determined winning combination", it is always decided to switch to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone, and if it is another internal winning combination, it is switched to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone. It may not be decided. In other words, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which the winning is repeated) and the presence/absence of the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transition may be associated one to one.

<CZ Middle-high accuracy zone end lottery table>
The CZ medium-high accuracy zone end lottery table shown in FIG. 46 is referred to in an ART medium CZ medium process (FIGS. 68 to 70) and a medium medium CZ medium process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and the production state “CZ medium high”. In the “probability zone in progress”, it is used to determine whether or not to end the “in CZ middle-high confidence zone”.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone end lottery table, based on what game (“the number of games”) of the effect state “in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone”, the internal winning combination, and the lottery value. Whether or not the CZ middle-high accuracy zone has ended is determined by a lottery. In addition, in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone end lottery table shown in FIG. 46 and other lottery tables described later, the internal winning combination “replay (other than special)” is “red lip”, “blue lip”, “green lip”, “red lip”. Replays other than "Blue Lip", "Red Green Lip", "Blue Green Lip A" and "Blue Green Lip B" (small role/replay data pointer value is "13" to "19") (small role/replay) The values of the data pointer for use are "1" to "12" and "20" to "23").

In FIG. 46, for example, when the “number of games” is the first game (that is, the value of the “high-precision zone counter” described later is “1”) and the internal winning combination is “miss”, 128/ With the probability of 128, it is determined that the end of the CZ medium-high accuracy zone is “non-win” (that is, the effect state “in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone” continues). When the “number of games” is the second game (that is, the value of the “high-precision zone counter” described later is “2”) and the internal winning combination is “miss”, there is a probability of 26/128. It is decided that the end of the CZ medium-high accuracy zone is “non-win” (that is, the production state “in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone” continues), and the end of the CZ medium-high accuracy zone is “win” with a probability of 102/128. It is determined that there is (i.e., the effect state "CZ medium-high accuracy zone in" is completed). When the “number of games” is the third game (that is, the value of the “high-precision zone counter” described later is “3”) and the internal winning combination is “miss”, there is a probability of 4/128. It is decided that the end of the CZ medium-high accuracy zone is "non-win" (that is, the production state "in the CZ middle-high accuracy zone" continues), and the end of the CZ middle-high accuracy zone is "winning" with a probability of 124/128. It is determined that there is (i.e., the effect state "CZ medium-high accuracy zone in" is completed). In other words, the probability that the production state "ends in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone" will increase as the production state continues.

Note that the presence/absence of the CZ middle/high accuracy zone end may be determined without using the CZ middle/high accuracy zone end lottery table shown in FIG. For example, when the "number of games" is the first game, it is not determined that the CZ middle and high probability zone ends, no matter which internal winning combination, and when the "number of games" is the second game, Only when the winning combination is "Loss" or "Replay (other than special)" is it decided that the CZ middle and high accuracy zone ends, and when the "Number of games" is the third game, the internal winning combination is "Other". ", the end of the CZ medium-high accuracy zone may not be determined. That is, depending on the “number of games”, the determined internal winning combination (double winning mode) and the presence/absence of the end of the CZ middle/high probability zone may be associated one to one.

<CZ ART management information temporary stock lottery table>
The CZ ART management information temporary stock lottery table shown in FIG. 47 is referred to in the CZ during ART process (see FIGS. 68 to 70) and the CZ during normal process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and is in the rendering state. The “during CZ during ART” or “during CZ during normal” is used to determine whether or not to temporarily stock (store) the ART management information (whether or not to temporarily stock).

As shown in FIG. 47, in the CZ ART management information temporary stock lottery table, the presence or absence of the ART management information temporary stock is determined by lottery based on the CZ management information, the internal winning combination, and the lottery value. In the CZ ART management information provisional stock lottery table shown in FIG. 47 and other lottery tables described later, the internal winning combination “push order bell A” is “left middle right bell A”, “left right middle bell A”, "Middle left and right bell A", "middle right left bell A", "right left middle bell A" and "right middle left bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "30" to "35") Is.

In FIG. 47, for example, when the internal winning combination is “push order bell B” and the “CZ management information 1”, there is a 88/128 probability that the ART management information temporary stock is “non-winning”. It is determined that there is a chance that the ART management information provisional stock is “winning” with a probability of 40/128. Further, in the case of "CZ management information 2", the ART management information temporary stock is determined to be "non-winning" with a probability of 118/128, and the ART management information temporary stock is "with a probability of 10/128". Winning” is determined. Further, in the case of "CZ management information 3", it is determined with a probability of 128/128 that the ART management information temporary stock is "winning". That is, when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 3” is executed, the internal winning combination is “push order” more than when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 1” or the “CZ management information 2” is executed. When it is “Bell B”, there is a high expectation that the ART management information will be provisionally stocked.

Further, in FIG. 47, for example, when the internal winning combination is “MB” and “CZ management information 1”, the ART management information provisional stock is “non-winning” with a probability of 127/128. It is decided that the ART management information provisional stock is “winning” with a probability of 1/128. In the case of "CZ management information 2", the ART management information provisional stock is determined to be "winning" with a probability of 128/128. Further, in the case of “CZ management information 3”, it is determined with a probability of 127/128 that the ART management information temporary stock is “non-win”, and with a probability of 1/128, the ART management information temporary stock is “ Winning” is determined. That is, when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 2” is executed, the internal winning combination is “MB” than when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 1” or the “CZ management information 3” is executed. In this case, there is a high expectation that ART management information will be provisionally stocked.

In the present embodiment, at least one piece of ART management information is provisionally stocked when the production state "CRT during CZ during ART" or "CZ during normal" is started. Therefore, when all the lottery results using the CZ ART management information provisional stock lottery table shown in FIG. 47 are “non-win” and the point counter described later is “100” or more, the ART is We try to prevent the situation where management information is not stocked (stored).

<CZ ART management information provisional stock content lottery table>
The in-CZ ART management information provisional stock lottery content table shown in FIG. 48 is referred to in the in-ART CZ process (see FIGS. 68 to 70) and the Normal CZ process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and is described above. When the lottery result using the CZ ART management information temporary stock lottery table is “winning”, it is used to determine the winning content (ART management information temporary stock content).

As shown in FIG. 48, in the CZ ART management information provisional stock lottery content table, when the game is not a special addition execution game, the ART state based on the effect state, the CZ management information, the internal winning combination, and the lottery value. If the management information provisional stock content is determined by lottery and the game is a special addition execution game, the ART management information provisional stock content is determined by lottery based on the effect state, the CZ management information, and the lottery value. In the CZ mid ART management information provisional stock lottery content table shown in FIG. 48, the effect state “normal CZ in progress (at the start)” is the first game in the effect state “normal CZ” (that is, the CZ counter The value is "1"), and the effect state "CZ during ART (at the start)" is the first game in the effect state "CZ during ART" (that is, the value of the CZ counter is "1"). It means that.

In addition, in the CZ mid ART management information provisional stock lottery content table shown in FIG. 48, the effect state “in the CZ middle high accuracy zone (first and second games)” is the first game in the effect state “in the CZ high accuracy zone” and The second game (that is, the values of the “high-accuracy zone counter” to be described later) are “1” and “2”), and the effect state “in the CZ middle high-accuracy zone (third game)” is the effect state “CZ high-accuracy”. The third game in "in zone" (that is, the value of the "high-accuracy zone counter" described later is "3") is displayed, and the effect state "CZ medium-high accuracy zone (fourth game)" indicates the effect state "CZ high-accuracy". This indicates the fourth game in the "in zone" (that is, the value of the "high-precision zone counter" described later is "4").

In FIG. 48, for example, the effect state is "CZ during ART" or "CZ during normal", and the internal winning combination is "special double", "BB (overlap with red blue green)" or "BB (other than that). )” is an internal winning combination (“other internal winning combination”), and if it is “CZ management information 1”, “ART management information 1” is provisionally stocked with a probability of 92/128. Is determined, that the "ART management information 2" is provisionally stocked with a probability of 33/128, and the "ART management information 3" is provisionally stocked with a probability of 3/128. In the case of “CZ management information 2”, it is determined that “ART management information 2” is temporarily stocked with a probability of 110/128, and “ART management information 3” is temporarily stored with a probability of 18/128. It is decided to be stocked. In the case of “CZ management information 3”, it is determined that “ART management information 1” is temporarily stocked with a probability of 102/128, and “ART management information 2” is temporarily stocked with a probability of 24/128. It is decided to be stocked, and it is decided that “ART management information 3” is provisionally stocked with a probability of 2/128. That is, when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 2” is executed, the internal winning combination is “other internal” than when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 1” or the “CZ management information 3” is executed. There is a high expectation that temporary management of ART management information that is advantageous to the player will be obtained when the player is a "winning combination".

The ART management information temporary stock content may be determined without using the CZ ART management information temporary stock lottery content table shown in FIG. For example, when the production state is "CZ during ART" or "CZ during normal", and the internal winning combination is "special double" or "BB (other than that)" or "special addition execution game" In the case of any of the CZ management information, it is decided that the "ART management information 3" is always provisionally stocked, and when the internal winning combination is "BB (red, blue, green and red)," which CZ management is Also in the case of information, it is determined that the “ART management information 4” is always provisionally stocked, and when the internal winning combination is “other internal winning combination”, “CZ management information 1” or “CZ management information 2” If it is, it is decided that the "ART management information 1" is always provisionally stocked, and if it is "CZ management information 3" or "CZ management information 4 or more", "ART management information 2". May be decided to be provisionally stocked. That is, the internal winning combination determined in accordance with the effect state and the CZ management information (overlapping mode) and the ART management information provisional stock content may be associated one-to-one. Similarly, without using the CZ ART management information temporary stock lottery table shown in FIG. 47, the presence/absence of the ART management information temporary stock is determined based on the CZ management information. ) May be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.

<CZ normal point addition lottery table>
The CZ normal point addition value lottery table shown in FIG. 49 is referred to in an ART CZ mid-process (see FIGS. 68 to 70) and a normal mid-CZ process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and a rendering state. It is used to determine the points (point addition value) to be given in “during CZ during ART” or “during CZ during normal”.

As shown in FIG. 49, in the CZ normal point addition value lottery table, when ART management information is not provisionally stocked, points are added based on the CZ management information, the internal winning combination, and the lottery value. If the value is determined by lottery and the ART management information is temporarily stocked, the point addition value is determined by lottery based on the temporarily stocked ART management information, CZ management information, and the lottery value. It In addition, in the production state "CZ during ART" or "CZ during normal", when the player internally wins "BB", the point addition value that the point counter described later always becomes "100" or more is determined, and the ART addition is performed. The addition of migration and ART management information is settled.

In FIG. 49, for example, when the internal winning combination is “push order bell B” and “CZ management information 1”, the point addition value “12” is determined with a probability of 124/128. The point addition value “16” is determined with a probability of /128. In the case of "CZ management information 2", the point addition value "12" is determined with a probability of 124/128, and the point addition value "16" is determined with a probability of 4/128. In the case of “CZ management information 3”, the point addition value “16” is determined with a probability of 128/128. That is, when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 3” is executed, the internal winning combination is “push order” more than when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 1” or the “CZ management information 2” is executed. When it is “Bell B”, the degree of expectation that the point addition value that is advantageous to the player is determined is high.

Further, in FIG. 49, for example, when the internal winning combination is “MB” and the “CZ management information 1”, the point addition value “12” is determined with a probability of 124/128, and 4/ The point addition value “16” is determined with a probability of 128. In the case of "CZ management information 2", the point addition value "16" is determined with a probability of 128/128. In the case of "CZ management information 3", the point addition value "12" is determined with a probability of 124/128, and the point addition value "16" is determined with a probability of 4/128. That is, when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 2” is executed, the internal winning combination is “MB” than when the CZ based on the “CZ management information 1” or the “CZ management information 3” is executed. When, it is expected that a point addition value that is advantageous to the player will be determined.

The point addition value may be determined without using the CZ normal point addition value lottery table shown in FIG. 49. For example, in the case of "CZ management information 1", if the internal winning combination is "miss" or "replay (other than special)", the point addition value "0" is always determined, and the internal winning combination is "special". In the case of "single", "special double" or "common combination", the point addition value "16" is always determined, and when the internal winning combination is "push order bell A", the point addition value "8" When the internal winning combination is “push order bell B”, “CB combination” or “MB”, the point addition value “12” is always determined and “ART management information 1 temporary stock time” In the case of “,” the point addition value “20” is always determined, and in the case of ART management information 2 temporary stock, the point addition value “28” is always determined, and ART management information 3 or 4 temporary stock is stored. , The point addition value “36” may be determined without fail. Then, the more advantageous the CZ management information, the more advantageous this correspondence may be. That is, it is possible to associate the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which the winning is repeated) and the point addition value in a one-to-one correspondence according to the CZ management information.

<CZ middle/high accuracy point addition value lottery table>
The CZ medium/high accuracy point addition value lottery table shown in FIG. 50 is referred to in an ART CZ mid-process (see FIGS. 68 to 70) and a normal mid-CZ mid process (see FIGS. 75 to 77), which will be described later, and is in a rendering state. It is used to determine the points (point addition value) to be given in the effect state “in the CZ medium high-accuracy zone” in “during CZ during ART” or “during medium CZ during normal operation”.

As shown in FIG. 50, in the CZ middle/high probability point addition value lottery table, the point addition value is determined by lottery based on the effect state and the lottery value. In addition, when the effect state “CZ medium high accuracy zone” continues for four games, addition of ART and addition of ART management information are determined.

Further, in the CZ medium-high accuracy point addition value lottery table shown in FIG. 50, the effect state "in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (first game)" is the first game in the effect state "in the CZ high-accuracy zone" (that is, described later. The value of the "high accuracy zone counter" indicates "1"), and the effect state "CZ middle high accuracy zone (second game)" is the second game in the effect state "CZ high accuracy zone" (that is, described later). The value of the “high-accuracy zone counter” indicates “2”), and the effect state “in the CZ middle high-accuracy zone (3rd game)” is the third game in the effect state “in the CZ high-accuracy zone” (that is, described later). The value of the “high accuracy zone counter” is “3”).

In FIG. 50, for example, when the effect state is “in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (first game)”, the point addition value “12” is decided with a probability of 122/128, and the point is added with a probability of 6/128. The addition value "16" is determined. Further, when the effect state is "in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (second game)", the point addition value "16" is determined with a probability of 122/128, and the point addition value "20" with a probability of 6/128. Is determined. Further, when the effect state is “in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (3rd game)”, the point addition value “20” is determined with a probability of 122/128, and the point addition value “28” with a probability of 6/128. Is determined. That is, as the effect state “in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone” continues, the degree of expectation that the point addition value that is advantageous to the player is determined increases.

<ART initial mode lottery table>
The in-art mode initial lottery table shown in FIG. 51 is referred to in an in-art process (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and is used to determine the in-art mode at the start of the effect state “during ART”. .. The ART mode is used to determine whether or not to shift from the effect state “ART in” to the effect state “add-on zone”.

As shown in FIG. 51, in the ART mode initial lottery table, the ART mode is determined by lottery based on the lottery trigger and the lottery value. In addition, in the ART mode initial lottery table shown in FIG. 51 and other lottery tables described later, the lottery trigger “ART transition” indicates that the ART winning is achieved in the production state “normal”, “normal CZ medium” or “bonus medium”. Indicates that the production state has changed to "during ART" (so-called "first win"), and the lottery opportunity "additional zone end" ends the production state "additional zone" and transitions to the production state "arting". It shows that you have done.

In FIG. 51, for example, when the lottery trigger is “ART transition”, the ART mode “1” is determined with a probability of 8192/16384, and the ART mode “2” is determined with a probability of 7712/16384. The mode “3” during ART is determined with a probability of 480/16384. Note that the ART mode “4” may be determined with a predetermined probability (for example, a probability of 1/16384).

<CZ lottery mode lottery table during ART>
The ART CZ lottery mode lottery table shown in FIG. 52 is referred to in the ART process (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and determines the ART CZ lottery mode at the start of the effect state “during ART”. Used for. The CZ during ART lottery mode is used to determine whether or not to shift from the effect state “during ART” to the effect state “during CZ during ART”.

As shown in FIG. 52, in the ART CZ lottery mode lottery table, the ART CZ lottery mode is determined by lottery based on the lottery trigger, the set value, and the lottery value. In the ART CZ lottery mode lottery table shown in FIG. 52, when the lottery trigger “CZ end (CZ lottery mode in ART 1)” is “1” in the ART CZ lottery mode in the production state “during ART”. Indicates that the production state has transitioned to "CZ during ART", the production state "CZ during ART" has ended, and the production state has transitioned to "ART during", and the lottery trigger "CZ end (CZ during ART lottery mode during ART"). 2)”, when the CZ lottery mode during ART is “2” in the effect state “during ART”, the state shifts to “during CZ during ART”, and the state “during CZ during ART” ends. Shows that the production state has changed to "during ART", and the lottery trigger "CZ end (CZ lottery mode during ART 3)" produces when the CZ lottery mode during ART is "3" in the production state "during ART". This indicates that the state has transitioned to "during CZ during ART", the effect state "during CZ during ART" has ended, and the state has transitioned to "during ART".

In FIG. 52, for example, in the case where the lottery trigger is “ART transition” and the setting value is “1”, the CZ lottery mode during ART “2” is determined with a probability of 126/128, and 2/128 The CZ lottery mode during ART “3” is determined with a probability. When the set value is “2”, the CZ lottery mode during ART is determined “2” with a probability of 127/128, and the CZ lottery mode during ART “3” is determined with a probability of 1/128. .. When the set value is “3”, the CZ lottery mode during ART “2” is determined with a probability of 123/128, and the CZ lottery mode during ART “3” is determined with a probability of 5/128. .. When the set value is “4”, the CZ lottery mode during ART “2” is determined with a probability of 127/128, and the CZ lottery mode during ART “3” is determined with a probability of 1/128. .. When the set value is "5", the CZ lottery mode during ART "2" is decided with a probability of 118/128, and the CZ lottery mode during ART "3" is decided with a probability of 10/128. .. When the set value is “6”, the CZ lottery mode during ART “2” is determined with a probability of 127/128, and the CZ lottery mode during ART “3” is determined with a probability of 1/128. .. That is, when the set value is an odd number, the expectation that the CZ lottery mode during ART that is advantageous to the player is determined is higher when the set value is an odd number. However, the higher the set value, the higher the degree of expectation that the CZ lottery mode during ART, which is advantageous to the player, will be determined. The other lottery triggers are similar.

<CZ ceiling lottery table during ART>
The CZ ceiling lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 53 is referred to in the process during ART (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and is used to determine the number of CZ ceiling replays at the start of the effect state “during ART”. To be The CZ ceiling replay count is used to determine whether to shift from the rendering state “during ART” to the rendering state “during CZ during ART” according to the winning number of the replay combination.

As shown in FIG. 53, in the CZ ceiling lottery table during ART, the number of CZ ceiling replays is determined by lottery on the basis of the lottery trigger, the CZ during ART ART lottery mode, and the lottery value. In the CZ ceiling lottery table during ART shown in FIG. 53, the lottery opportunity “CZ end” indicates that the effect state “during CZ during ART” has ended and the state has shifted to “during ART”.

In FIG. 53, for example, when the lottery trigger is “ART transition” or “CZ end” and the CZ lottery mode during ART is “1”, the number of CZ ceiling replays “32” is 1/128 with a probability of 1/128. The CZ ceiling replay count "64" is determined with a probability of 1/128, and the CZ ceiling replay count "255" is determined with a probability of 126/128. When the CZ lottery mode during ART is "3", the number of CZ ceiling replays "32" is determined with a probability of 64/128, and the number of CZ ceiling replays "64" is determined with a probability of 12/128. , And the probability of CZ ceiling replay “128” is determined with a probability of 6/128, and the probability of CZ ceiling replay “255” is determined with a probability of 46/128. That is, the higher the CZ lottery mode during ART, the higher the degree of expectation that the number of CZ ceiling replays that is advantageous to the player will be determined.

<ART management information promotion lottery table>
The ART management information promotion lottery table shown in FIG. 54 is referred to in the ART management information setting process (see FIG. 74) described later, and when the ART management information is set in the effect state “during ART”, the ART management information is set. Is used to determine whether to update (promote) the more advantageous ART management information.

As shown in FIG. 54, in the ART management information promotion lottery table, the presence or absence of promotion of ART management information and its content (promotion destination) are determined by lottery based on the ART management information, the promotion mode, and the lottery value. It

In FIG. 54, for example, when “ART management information 1” is set and the promotion mode is “1”, it is determined with a probability of 127/128 that the promotion destination is “no promotion”, It is determined with a probability of 1/128 that the promotion destination is “ART management information 3”. When the promotion mode is "2", the promotion destination is determined to be "no promotion" with a probability of 43/128, and the promotion destination is "ART management information 3" with a probability of 85/128. It is decided. That is, the higher the promotion mode is, the higher the degree of expectation is that the ART management information that is advantageous to the player will be updated. In FIG. 54, for example, when “ART management information 1” is set, the lottery value that determines that the promotion destination is “ART management information 2” is defined with the same expectation. You may

<CZ transfer lot table during ART 1>
55. In the ART CZ transfer lottery table 1 shown in FIG. 55 is referred to in the ART process (see FIGS. 71 to 73) which will be described later, and when the “ART management information 4” is not set in the effect state “during ART”. In addition, it is used to determine whether or not to shift to the effect state “during ART CZ”.

As shown in FIG. 55, in the CZ transition during ART lottery table 1, the presence or absence of CZ transition is determined by lottery based on the CZ during lottery mode, the internal winning combination, and the lottery value.

In FIG. 55, for example, when the internal winning combination is “red single” and the CZ lottery mode during ART is “1”, the CZ transition is “non-winning” with a probability of 120/128. It is determined that the CZ transition is “winning” with a probability of 8/128. In addition, when the CZ lottery mode during ART is “2”, it is determined that the CZ transition is “non-win” with a probability of 118/128, and the CZ transition is “win” with a probability of 10/128. It is decided that there is. When the CZ lottery mode during ART is “3”, it is determined that the CZ transition is “non-win” with a probability of 115/128, and the CZ transition is “win” with a probability of 13/128. It is decided that there is. That is, the higher the CZ lottery mode during ART, the higher the degree of expectation of shifting to CZ.

Further, in FIG. 55, for example, when the CZ lottery mode during ART is "0" and the internal winning combination is "red single", the CZ transition is "non-winning" with a probability of 127/128. Is determined, and it is determined that the CZ transition is “winning” with a probability of 1/128. If the internal winning combination is "blue single", the CZ transition is determined to be "non-winning" with a probability of 125/128, and the CZ transition is "winning" with a probability of 3/128. Is determined. If the internal winning combination is "green single", it is determined that the CZ transition is "non-winning" with a probability of 112/128, and the CZ transition is "winning" with a probability of 16/128. Is determined. When the internal winning combination is "special double", the CZ transition is determined to be "non-winning" with a probability of 76/128, and the CZ transition is "winning" with a probability of 52/128. Is determined. That is, there is a high expectation that the internal winning combination will shift to CZ in the order of “red single”, “blue single”, “green single”, and “special double”.

<CZ transfer lottery table during ART 2>
56. In the ART CZ transfer lottery table 2 shown in FIG. 56, referred to in the ART process (see FIG. 71 to FIG. 73) described later, and in the effect state “during ART”, “ART management information 4” is set. In addition, it is used to determine whether or not to shift to the effect state “during ART CZ”.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the CZ transition lottery table 2 during ART, the presence or absence of CZ transition is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In FIG. 56, for example, when the internal winning combination is "red single", it is determined with a probability of 64/128 that the CZ transition is "non-winning", and there is a probability of 64/128 that the CZ transition is "winning". Is determined. If the internal winning combination is "blue single", it is determined that the CZ transition is "non-winning" with a probability of 51/128, and the CZ transition is "winning" with a probability of 77/128. Is determined. If the internal winning combination is "green single", it is determined that the CZ transition is "non-winning" with a probability of 38/128, and the CZ transition is "winning" with a probability of 90/128. Is determined. When the internal winning combination is “special double”, it is determined with a probability of 128/128 that the CZ transition is “winning”. That is, there is a high expectation that the internal winning combination will shift to CZ in the order of “red single”, “blue single”, “green single”, and “special double”.

<Transition content lottery table when winning CZ during ART>
The CZ shift during lot selection table during ART during CART shown in FIG. 57 is referred to in the process during ART (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and the CZ during lot transition table during ART described above 1 in the effect state “during ART”. Alternatively, when the lottery result using the CZ transition lottery table during ART 2 is “winning”, it is used for determining the winning content (transition content).

As shown in FIG. 57, in the transition content lottery table during CZ transition winning during ART, the transition content is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In FIG. 57, for example, when the internal winning combination is “red single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 1” with a probability of 126/128, and the transition content with a probability of 1/128. It is determined to be "CZ management information 4", and the transition content is determined to be "CZ management information 5" with a probability of 1/128. When the internal winning combination is “blue single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 2” with a probability of 1126/128, and the transition content is “CZ management information with a probability of 1/128”. 4”, and with a probability of 1/128, it is determined that the migration content is “CZ management information 6”. When the internal winning combination is “green single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 3” with a probability of 126/128, and the transition content is “CZ management information with a probability of 1/128”. 5”, and the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 6” with a probability of 1/128. That is, suggesting the contents of CZ to be transferred depending on whether the symbol displayed in the display window 4 is a "red special" symbol, a "blue special" symbol, or a "green special" symbol. You can do it.

In FIG. 57, for example, when the internal winning combination is “red single”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 1” with a probability of 128/128, and the internal winning combination is “blue single”. In the case of “”, it is determined with a probability of 128/128 that the migration content is “CZ management information 2”, and when the internal winning combination is “green single”, the migration content has a probability of 128/128. If the internal winning combination is “red-blue double”, it is determined that the transition content is “CZ management information 4” with a probability of 128/128. When the winning combination is “red-green double”, the transition content is determined to be “CZ management information 5” with a probability of 128/128, and when the internal winning combination is “blue-green double”, 128. It is also possible to determine that the migration content is “CZ management information 6” with a probability of /128. That is, depending on whether the symbol displayed in the display window 4 is the "red special" symbol, the "blue special" symbol, or the "green special" symbol, the contents of the CZ to be transferred are surely suggested. It may be done.

Further, the transition content may be decided without using the transition content lottery table at the time of CZ transition during ART win in ART shown in FIG. For example, when the internal winning combination is "red single", "CZ management information 1" is always determined as the transition content, and when the internal winning combination is "blue single", the transition content is always "CZ management information 1". If "2" is determined and the internal winning combination is "green single", the transition content is always "CZ management information 3", and if the internal winning combination is "red-blue double", the transition content is When "CZ management information 4" is definitely decided and the internal winning combination is "red-green double", "CZ management information 5" is always decided as the transition content, and when the internal winning combination is "blue-green double" "CZ management information 6" is always decided as the transfer content, and the internal winning combination is won without the other specific internal winning combination (for example, "1 red A blue green A" is won with "BB"). In the case of “1 piece of red, blue, green, A” which is determined to be possible, “CZ management information 7” may be always determined as the migration content. That is, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which the winning is repeated) may be associated with the transition content in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, similarly, without using the CZ transfer lottery table 1 in ART shown in FIG. 55 and the CZ transfer lottery table 1 in ART shown in FIG. 56, the presence/absence of CZ transfer is determined by the determined internal winning combination (double winning mode). ) May be associated with each other on a one-to-one basis.

<CZ during ART/Additional zone transition lottery table for the number of precursor games at the time of winning>
The CZ during ART/additional zone transition winning game lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to in the processing during ART (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and the above-mentioned CZ during ART transition lottery table 1 for ART or CZ during ART. If the lottery result using the transition lottery table 2 is “winning” and the winning content (transition content) is determined using the above-mentioned transition content lottery table during CZ transition in ART, the winning content (transition) It is used to determine the number of predictive games from the effect state “during ART” to the effect state “during CZ during ART” according to the content).

In addition, the CZ during ART/additional zone transition winning game number lottery table shown in FIG. 58 is referred to in the during-ART process (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and the below-described ART mode transition lottery table is used. When the lottery result is to shift to the "ART mode 4", it is used to determine the number of precursor games from the rendering state "in ART" to the rendering state "addition zone".

As shown in FIG. 58, in the CZ during ART/Additional Zone Transition Winning Preliminary Games Number Lottery Table, the number of precursor games is determined by lottery based on the transition content and the lottery value.

In FIG. 58, for example, when the transition content is “CZ single”, the number of precursor games “4” is determined with a probability of 4/128, and the number of precursor games “7” is determined with a probability of 32/128. The number of precursor games "11" is determined with a probability of 82/128, and the number of precursor games "15" is determined with a probability of 10/128. When the transition content is “CZ double or more”, the number of precursor games “4” is determined with a probability of 4/128, and the number of precursor games “7” is determined with a probability of 22/128. The number of predictive games “11” is determined with the probability of, and the number of predictive games “15” is determined with the probability of 20/128. That is, the higher the degree of expectation of the transition content, the easier the determination of a relatively long number of precursor games.

Further, in FIG. 58, for example, when the transition content is “additional zone”, the number of precursor games “12” is determined with a probability of 4/128, and the number of precursor games “16” is determined with a probability of 10/128. The predictive game number “20” is determined with a probability of 60/128, the predictive game number “24” is determined with a probability of 50/128, and the predictive game number “28” is determined with a probability of 4/128. .. That is, when the transition content is the "additional zone", a specific number of precursor games that are not determined when the transition content is "CZ single" or "CZ double or more" can be determined.

<ART mode switching lottery table>
59. The ART mode switching lottery table shown in FIG. 59 is referred to in an ART process (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later, and determines whether or not to transfer the ART mode in the effect state “during ART”. Used for.

As shown in FIG. 59, in the during-ART mode transition lottery table, the destination during-ART mode is determined by lottery based on the current during-ART mode, the internal winning combination, and the lottery value. In the ART mode switching lottery table shown in FIG. 59, the internal winning combination “push order bell A (ART management state 3 only)” means that the production state is “ART in progress” in which the ART management information 3 is set. Only in the above, the above-mentioned “push order bell A” is shown to be a target of the lottery, and the internal winning combination “push order bell B (ART management state 2 only)” means that the ART management information 2 is set. It is shown that the above-mentioned “push order bell B” is the target of the lottery only in the effect state “during ART”.

In FIG. 59, for example, when the internal winning combination is the “CB combination” and the current ART mode is “1”, there is a probability of 16376/16384 that the “ART mode 1” is the transition destination. It is determined (that is, the ART mode is not transferred), and “ART mode 2” is determined as the transfer destination with a probability of 8/16384 (that is, the ART mode is promoted). When the current ART mode is “2”, “ART mode 2” is determined as the transfer destination with a probability of 16304/16384 (that is, the ART mode is not transferred), and 80/16384 With the probability of, the "ART mode 3" is determined as the transfer destination (that is, the ART mode is promoted). If the current ART mode is “3”, the “ART mode 1” is determined as the transition destination with a probability of 80/16384 (that is, the ART mode has fallen), and 20/16384 “ART Mode 2” is determined as a transition destination with a probability (that is, the ART Mode is fallen), and “ART Mode 3” is determined as a transition destination with a probability of 16234/16384 (that is, the ART Mode is "During no transition), "ART Mode 4" is determined as the transition destination with a probability of 50/16384 (that is, the ART Mode is promoted). That is, as the ART mode is higher, the degree of expectation of shifting to the additional zone is higher.

<Additional guarantee lottery table in the additional zone>
The add-on zone in-addition-guaranteed lottery table shown in FIG. 60 is referred to in the add-on zone processing (see FIGS. 66 and 67) described later, and in the effect state “in the add-on zone”, the add-on zone ART management information stock lottery described below When the lottery result using the table is “non-win”, it is used to determine whether or not the addition of ART management information is guaranteed (that is, whether or not the addition zone is continued).

As shown in FIG. 60, in the add-on guarantee lottery table in the add-on zone, the presence or absence of the add-on guarantee is determined by lottery based on the presence or absence of the add-on history and the lottery value. In addition, in the addition zone lottery table in the addition zone shown in FIG. 60, the addition history “none” indicates that the addition of the ART management information by the addition guarantee is not yet performed in the production state “in the addition zone”. "Available" indicates that ART management information has already been added by the addition guarantee in the production state "in addition zone".

In FIG. 60, for example, in the case of the addition history “none”, the addition guarantee “none” is determined with a probability of 120/128, and the addition guarantee “present” is determined with a probability of 8/128. In the case of the addition history “present”, the addition guarantee “absence” is determined with a probability of 127/128, and the addition guarantee “present” is determined with a probability of 1/128. That is, when the additional security is not guaranteed, the expectation of the additional security is higher than when the additional security is performed. In the case of the addition history “absent”, the addition history “present” may be determined with a probability of 128/128. That is, the additional zone may be continued at least once.

<ART management information stock lottery table in additional zone>
The add-on zone ART management information stock lottery table shown in FIG. 61 is referred to in the add-on zone process (see FIGS. 66 and 67) described later, and the ART management information is stocked (stored) in the effect state “in the add-on zone”. It is used to determine whether or not to allow.

As shown in FIG. 61, in the in-addition zone ART management information stock lottery table, the presence or absence of the ART management information stock is determined by lottery based on the internal winning combination and the lottery value.

In FIG. 61, for example, when the internal winning combination is “miss” or “replay (other than special)”, it is determined with a probability of 127/128 that the ART management information stock is “non-win”, and 1/128. With the probability of, the ART management information stock is determined to be “winning”. When the internal winning combination is “common winning combination”, “push order bell”, “CB winning combination” or “MB”, it is determined with a probability of 90/128 that the ART management information stock is “non-winning”. , 38/128, the ART management information stock is determined to be “winning”. When the internal winning combination is the “other” internal winning combination, the ART management information stock is determined to be “winning” with a probability of 128/128. That is, in the performance state "in addition zone", the internal winning combination other than the above-mentioned "miss", "replay (other than special)", "common combination", "push order bell", "CB combination" or "MB" If is determined, it is determined that the ART management information is stocked (stored), and that the effect state “in addition zone” continues.

<ART management information stock contents lottery table in additional zone>
62. The additional zone in-art management information stock content lottery table shown in FIG. 62 is referred to in the additional zone processing (see FIG. 66 and FIG. 67) described later, and the lottery result using the additional zone in-art management information stock lottery table described above. Is selected, the winning content (contents of ART management information stock) is determined.

As shown in FIG. 62, in the ART management information stock content lottery table in the additional zone, the ART management information stock content is determined by lottery based on the number of additions and the lottery value. In the addition zone ART management information stock content lottery table shown in FIG. 62, as for the number of additions, the ART management information is added in the production state “in the addition zone” (that is, the production state “in the addition zone” continues. ) It indicates the number of times.

In FIG. 62, when the number of additions is “multiple of 5 (excluding multiple of 10)”, “ART management information 2” is determined with a probability of 124/128, and “ART management information with a probability of 4/128”. Information 3" is determined. When the number of additions is “a multiple of 10,” “ART management information 3” is determined with a probability of 127/128, and “ART management information 4” is determined with a probability of 1/128. When the number of additions is “other”, “ART management information 1” is determined with a probability of 126/128, “ART management information 2” is determined with a probability of 1/128, and is 1/128. “ART management information 3” is determined with a probability. That is, when the number of additions is a multiple of a predetermined number (for example, 5 times) in the production state “in the addition zone”, an ART management state that is more advantageous to the player than the case of other additions is determined. Expectations are high.

The ART management information stock content may be determined without using the additional zone ART management information stock lottery table shown in FIG. 61 and the additional zone ART management information stock content lottery table shown in FIG. 62. For example, if the internal winning combination is “miss”, “replay (other than special)”, “push order bell” or “CB winning combination”, the ART management information is not stocked and the internal winning combination is “MB”. In some cases, "ART management information 1" is stocked, when the internal winning combination is "common combination", "ART management information 2" is stocked, and the internal winning combination is specified among "others". In the case of the internal winning combination (for example, “special single”), the “ART management information 3” is stocked, and the internal winning combination different from the specific internal winning combination of “Other” ( For example, in the case of "special double"), stocking of "ART management information 4" may be decided. That is, the determined internal winning combination (a mode in which multiple winnings have been won) and the ART management information stock content may be associated with each other in a one-to-one correspondence.

The lottery values and the elements used for the lottery defined in the lottery tables shown in FIGS. 35 to 62 are merely examples, and can be appropriately changed. For example, in a lottery table in which a “set value” is not defined as an element used in the lottery, different lottery values may be defined based on the “set value”. In this case, basically, the higher the set value, the more advantageous the lottery may be for the player.

[Main control processing]
Next, various kinds of processing executed by the main CPU 93 of the main control circuit 91 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 to 89.

<Main control processing>
FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the main control processing. The main control process described below is started when the pachi-slot machine 1 is powered on.

First, when the power of the pachi-slot machine 1 is turned on, the main CPU 93 executes a power-on process (S10). In this power-on processing, it is judged whether the backup data backed up when the power is turned off is normal or whether the setting value has been changed (setting change), etc., and the initialization processing is executed according to the judgment result. .. For example, when the backup data is normal and the setting has not been changed, the main CPU 93 returns the pachi-slot machine 1 to the power-off state. Further, when the backup data is normal and the setting is changed, all the storage areas are initialized as a process when changing the setting. Also, if the backup data is not normal, the progress of the game is awaited (disabled) until a new setting change is made.

Although illustration is omitted, in step S10, the main CPU 93 generates initialization command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated initialization command data is assigned to the main RAM 95 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of generating and storing an initialization command. The initialization command is, for example, a command for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as whether or not the setting value has been changed and the setting value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes initialization processing at the end of one game (one unit game) (S11). In this initialization processing, a storage area designated in advance so as to be initialized at the end of one game is initialized. For example, a process of clearing the data stored in the internal winning combination storage area and the display combination storage area of the main RAM 95 is executed.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes medal acceptance/start check processing (S12). In this medal reception/start check processing, when the number of medals inserted by the player is detected and the number of inserted medals makes it possible to start the game, or when there is an automatic insertion request described later. It enables the detection of the player's start operation. In the present embodiment, for example, when three medals have been inserted, the start switch 79 is controlled so that the start operation can be detected. Then, when the start operation is performed, the main CPU 93 prohibits the reception of medals and shifts the processing to S13.

Although illustration is omitted, in step S12, the main CPU 93 generates medal insertion command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated medal insertion command data is assigned to the main RAM 95 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of generating and storing a medal insertion command. Here, the medal insertion command is a command for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as whether or not a medal has been inserted, the value of the inserted number counter, and the value of the credit counter.

Next, the main CPU 93 extracts the necessary random number value and stores it in the random number value storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S13). In the present embodiment, at least a random number value (random number value for lottery) used in an internal lottery process described later and a random number value (random number value for effect) used in a game start ART related process to be described later, respectively. It is extracted from 0 to 65535, 0 to 16383, or 0 to 127.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the internal lottery process shown in FIG. 64 (S14). In this internal lottery processing, for example, the internal winning combination is determined based on the random number value for lottery or the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the game start ART related process shown in FIG. 65 (S15). In this game start ART related process, for example, the effect state transition control and the management thereof are performed based on the effect random number value and the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop initialization processing (S16). In the reel stop initialization process, various stop control information of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R described above is stored in the corresponding area of the main RAM 95 based on the result of the internal lottery process (internal winning combination).

Next, the main CPU 93 generates start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated start command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S17). That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of generating and storing the start command. The start command enables the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the type of internal winning combination, the type of game state, the type of effect state, the presence or absence of lock execution and its content, and the bonus end number counter value. It is a command.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the game start lock execution process shown in FIG. 82 (S18). In the game start lock execution process, control for invalidating a game operation (for example, a stop operation) of the player over a predetermined period is executed based on the establishment of various lock execution conditions.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes wait processing (S19). In this wait processing, it is determined whether or not a predetermined time has passed since the start of the previous game (start of the last unit game), and if it is determined that the predetermined time has not passed, the predetermined time has passed. The waiting time to wait is exhausted. The predetermined time in this wait processing, that is, the wait time, is set to 4.1 seconds from the start of the previous unit game, for example.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel rotation start processing (S20). In this reel rotation start processing, processing for requesting rotation start of all reels 3L, 3C, 3R is executed. The reel rotation control is executed by the interrupt process shown in FIG. 87 (more specifically, the reel control process shown in step S324).

By controlling the driving of the stepping motor by this interrupt processing, the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is started, and the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R becomes a constant speed (for example, 80 rotations/minute). Accelerate until it reaches. After that, when the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed, this constant speed rotation is maintained. When the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R reaches a constant speed and the above reel index is detected, the stop operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is permitted.

Although illustration is omitted, in step S20, the main CPU 93 generates reel rotation start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated reel rotation start command data is assigned to the main RAM 95. Stored in the communication data storage area. That is, the main CPU 93 performs processing for generating and storing the reel rotation start command. The reel rotation start command is, for example, a command for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize that the rotation of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R has started.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel stop control processing (S21). In the reel stop control process, the stop control of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R is performed based on the internal winning combination, the stop control information, and the stop operation of the player. Although illustration is omitted, in step S21, the main CPU 93 generates reel stop command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated reel stop command data is assigned to the main RAM 95 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 93 performs processing for generating and storing the reel stop command. The reel stop command is a type of reel to be stopped, a stop start position (that is, a symbol position when the stop button is operated) and the number of sliding pieces or a planned stop position (that is, a symbol position where the reel is actually planned to stop). ) Etc. is a command for making the sub CPU 102 recognizable.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a prize search process (S22). In this winning retrieval process, after all the reels 3L, 3C, 3R are stopped, the symbol combination displayed on the activated line and the symbol combination table are collated to identify the symbol combination displayed on the activated line. It

Specifically, the data stored in the symbol code storage area (see FIG. 30) and the data in the symbol combination table (see FIGS. 14 to 18) are collated, and if there is a match as a result of the collation, , And stores the data corresponding to the matched symbol combination (display combination) in the display combination storage area (see FIG. 29) and acquires the payout number (payout number counter value) associated with the symbol combination.

Although illustration is omitted, in step S22, the main CPU 93 generates winning operation command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and the generated winning operation command data is assigned to the main RAM 95 for communication. Store in the data storage area. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of generating and storing a winning operation command. The winning operation command is, for example, a command for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the type of display combination and the payout number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a medal payout process for paying out the number of medals corresponding to the payout number counter value acquired as a result of the prize search process (S23). In this medal payout process, the payout of medals and the update of the number of credits are performed based on the payout number counter value.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes RT gaming state update processing (S24). In this RT game state update process, a process for updating the RT game state is executed based on the fact that a predetermined RT game state transition trigger has been established (see FIG. 10).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus end check process shown in FIG. 83 (S25). In this bonus end check process, when each end condition (transition condition) defined in the MB game state, the BB game state, or the RB game state (RB1 game state and RB2 game state) is satisfied, the end condition ( Processing according to the (transition condition) is executed.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a bonus operation check process shown in FIG. 84 (S26). In this bonus operation check process, if each starting condition (transition condition) of the BB gaming state or the MB gaming state is satisfied in the general gaming state, the RB gaming state (RB1 gaming state and RB2 gaming state) is started in the BB gaming state. When the condition (transition condition) is satisfied, or when the re-game operation condition is satisfied in the general game state and the BB game state, the processing according to the start condition (transition condition) or the operation condition is executed. ..

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the game end ART related processing shown in FIG. 85 (S27). In the game-related ART-related processing, for example, transition control or management of the effect state is performed based on the display combination or the like.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a game end time lock execution process shown in FIG. 86 (S28). In the game end-time lock execution processing, control for invalidating a game operation (for example, an input operation or a start operation) of the player over a predetermined period is executed based on the establishment of various lock execution conditions. It After executing the processing of step S28, the main CPU 93 returns to the processing of step S11.

<Internal lottery process>
FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the internal lottery processing executed in step S14 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 sets an internal lottery table (see FIGS. 19 to 23) corresponding to the game state in the main RAM 95 (S40). In this process, one of the internal lottery tables is set in the main RAM 95 according to the game state (each game state of the normal game state, each game state of the MB game state, or each game state of the BB game state).

Next, the main CPU 93 acquires a random number value (random number value for lottery) stored in the random value storage area (S41). Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the predetermined area of the internal lottery table set in step S40, acquires one lottery value associated with each winning number of the corresponding setting value, and obtains the lottery value from the random number value. Is subtracted (S42). That is, the main CPU 93 checks whether or not the internal winning combination associated with the winning number is determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the subtraction result of the process of step S42 is less than 0 (S43). Here, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is not less than 0 (NO), it updates the random number value and the winning number (S44).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not all the winning numbers in the internal lottery table being used have been checked (S45), and when determining that all the winning numbers have not been checked (NO), , And returns to the process of step S42.

On the other hand, when determining that all the winning numbers have been checked (YES), the main CPU 93 sets 0 as the value of the data pointer (S46). That is, the main CPU 93 determines “miss” as the internal winning combination.

In step S43, when the main CPU 93 determines that the subtraction result is less than 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the internal lottery table set in the main RAM 95 and refers to the winning combination/replay data pointer from the winning number. The value and the value of the bonus data pointer are acquired (S47).

After executing the processing of step S46 or S47, the main CPU 93 refers to the internal winning combination/replay internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 24), and based on the value of the small winning/replay data pointer, wins the internal winning combination. Is acquired (S48).

In the processing of this step S48, the internal winning combination for small win/replay is referred to, and the internal winning combination associated with the value of the small win/replay data pointer acquired in the processing of step S46 or S47 is shown. A 34-byte data value (that is, a combination of symbols that are allowed to be established) is determined.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination data acquired in step S48 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 28) (S49). In the process of step S49, the 34-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination determined in the process of step S48 is stored in the internal winning combination storing areas 1 to 34.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 31) is 0 (S50). When determining that the value of the carryover combination storing area is 0 (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus internal winning combination determination table (see FIG. 25), and internally based on the value of the bonus data pointer. The winning combination is acquired (S51).

In the process of step S51, the bonus internal winning combination determination table is referred to, and a 34-byte data value indicating the internal winning combination corresponding to the value of the bonus data pointer acquired in the process of step S46 or S47 is determined. It

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the internal winning combination obtained in step S51 in the internal winning combination storage area (see FIG. 31) (S52). In the process of step S52, for example, when BB is acquired as the internal winning combination in step S51, "1" is set to bit 0 corresponding to BB of the carryover storage area.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the carryover combination storing area (see FIG. 31) is 0 (S53). In the process of step S53, it is determined whether or not "1" is set to any bit of the internal carryover combination storing area in step S52.

When it is determined in step S53 that the value of the internal carryover combination storing area is not 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 updates the gaming state flag based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area ( S54). In this process, when BB is determined as the internal winning combination in the general gaming state, "1" is set in bit 4 of the gaming state flag storage area 1, the gaming state is updated to RT4, and the BB gaming state When JACIN1 or JACIN2 is determined as the internal winning combination in (general), "1" is set to bit 2 or 3 of the game status flag storage area 2, and the gaming status is the BB gaming status (JACIN1 internal winning). Alternatively, when the BB game state (JACIN2 internal winning) is updated and JACIN1 or JACIN2 is determined as the internal winning combination in the BB game state (RB1 or RB2), the bit 5 or 6 of the game state flag storage area 2 is set to " 1" is set, or "1" is set to bit 0 or 1 of the game state flag storage area 3, and the game state is a BB game state (in RB1 or RB2 JACIN1 internal winning) or a BB game state (in RB1) Or JACIN2 internal winning in RB2) will be updated.

When it is determined in step S50 that the value of the internal carryover combination storage area is not 0 (NO), when it is determined that the value of the internal carryover combination storage area is 0 (YES), or after executing the processing of step S54. The main CPU 93 updates the internal winning combination storing area based on the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area (S55), and ends the internal lottery process. That is, the main CPU 93 reflects the internal winning combination stored in the internal carryover combination storing area in the internal winning combination storing area to determine the internal winning combination in the unit game.

<ART related processing at game start>
FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing the game-related ART-related processing executed in step S15 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is in the additional zone (S60). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 0 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in the additional zone (YES), it executes the additional zone processing shown in FIGS. 66 and 67 (S61), and ends the game start ART-related processing. To do. On the other hand, when determining that the current effect state is not in the additional zone (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S62.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is in the additional zone preparation (S62). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in bit 7 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When determining that the current effect state is in the additional zone preparation (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the additional zone preparation process (S63), and ends the game start ART-related process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not in the additional zone preparation (NO), the process proceeds to step S64.

In the additional zone preparation process in step S63, the main CPU 93 sets the instruction information transmission state flag to “1”, for example, and performs a stop operation procedure for shifting the game state to RT3. Control is performed so that the notification of the procedure is performed. Further, the CZ transfer lottery is performed in the same manner as the processing during ART (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later. If the player wins the CZ transition during the preparation for the additional zone, the CZ transition will be performed during the ART after the end of the additional zone. However, when winning the CZ transition during preparation for the additional zone, it is possible to transition to the CZ during the ART after the precursor game number is exhausted after the transition to the ART after the end of the additional zone.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current presentation state is CZ during ART (S64). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 6 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in CZ during ART (YES), it executes the CZ process in ART shown in FIGS. 68 to 70 (S65), and the ART related process at the start of game. To finish. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not CZ during ART (NO), the process proceeds to step S66.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current presentation state is ART (S66). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in bit 5 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is ART (YES), it executes the ART in-process shown in FIGS. 71 to 73 (S67), and ends the game start ART-related process. On the other hand, when determining that the current effect state is not ART (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S68.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current presentation state is ART preparation (S68). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in the bit 4 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is the ART preparation (YES), it executes the ART preparation processing (S69), and ends the game start ART related processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not under ART preparation (NO), the process proceeds to step S70.

In the ART preparatory process of step S69, the main CPU 93 sets the instruction information transmission state flag to "1", for example, and performs a stop operation procedure for shifting the game state to RT3. Control is performed so that the procedure is notified. Further, the CZ transfer lottery is performed in the same manner as the processing during ART (see FIGS. 71 to 73) described later. If the player wins the CZ transition during the preparation for the ART, the transition to the CZ during the ART is performed after the number of precursor games is exhausted after the transition to the ART. However, when the CZ transition is won during the ART preparation, the transition to the CZ during the ART may be directly performed along with the transition of RT3.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is the normal CZ (S70). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 3 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is the normal CZ (YES), the normal CPU CZ processing shown in FIGS. 75 to 77 is executed (S71), and the game start ART-related processing is executed. To finish. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not CZ during normal operation (NO), the process proceeds to step S72.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is in the special zone (S72). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When determining that the current effect state is in the special zone (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the special zone processing shown in FIG. 78 (S73), and ends the game start ART-related processing. On the other hand, when determining that the current effect state is not in the special zone (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S74.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is bonus (S74). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 1. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in the bonus state (YES), it executes the bonus medium process shown in FIG. 79 (S75) and ends the game start ART related process. On the other hand, when determining that the current effect state is not bonus (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S76.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the normal process shown in FIGS. 81 and 82 (S76). That is, the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is normal (bit 0 of the effect state flag storage area 1 is set to "1"), and executes the processing according to it. When this process ends, the process moves to step S77.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the stop operation sequence based on the value of the instruction information transmission state flag and the internal winning combination (S77). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether the value of the instruction information transmission state flag is "0" to "2" and the internal winning combination, and determines the "stop operation sequence" in the effect control information storage area (see FIG. 34). Processing for storing any value of "0" to "9". Specifically, for example, when the internal winning combination is “left and right center bell B” and the value of the instruction information transmission state flag is “0”, “0” is stored in the “stop operation sequence”. By doing so, the stop operation order is not notified. Further, when the value of the instruction information transmission state flag is "1", "1" is stored in the "stop operation order" so that the stop operation order "left and right middle" is notified. When the value of the instruction information transmission state flag is "2", "7" is stored in the "stop operation sequence" so that the stop operation sequence "left first stop" is notified. .. When this process ends, the process moves to step S78.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates effect state command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated effect state command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S78). .. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of generating and storing the effect state command. The effect state command is, for example, a command for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize various information stored in the effect control information storage area (see FIG. 34 ). When this process ends, the game-related ART related process ends.

Here, for example, when the effect state is in the additional zone, in addition to the various information shown in FIG. 34, the value of an additional zone counter, which will be described later, whether or not additional security is guaranteed, the number of additional times, and the additional flag are turned on. Information such as ON/OFF is stored as effect state command data, and when the effect state is ART, the type of a counting target combination, the value of the notification counter, and the type of the omen state (that is, in addition zone transition Information such as the omen state or the omen state of transitioning to CZ during ART), the value of the number of omen games, the value of the mode during ART, the value of the promotion mode, the value of the CZ ceiling replay count, etc. are stored as effect state command data, When the effect state is CZ during ART and CZ during normal, the value of the CZ counter, the value of the point counter, the number of games for which special addition is executed, the value of the CZ continuation mode, the ART management information temporary stock, which will be described later. Information such as contents, point addition value, high-accuracy zone counter value, etc. is stored as effect state command data, and when the effect state is in the special zone, the value of the special zone counter, which will be described later, whether or not the ART transition is won, etc. Information is stored as effect state command data, and when the effect state is normal, the type of the precursory state (that is, whether it is a precursory state of transitioning to ART or a precursory state of transition to CZ during normal), number of precursor games Value, the value of the number of ceiling games, and the like are stored as effect state command data.

In the present embodiment, when the value of the instruction information transmission state flag is "0", no value is stored in the "stop operation sequence" of the effect control information storage area (see FIG. 34). (That is, the area is not used) and the effect state command may be transmitted, or a value different from each parameter value described above may be stored and the effect command may be transmitted. .. In this case, for example, information indicating only the type of internal winning combination (that is, it is possible to identify whether the winning combination is a replay combination, a small combination, or a bonus combination, but the detailed content thereof cannot be identified). The effect state command may be transmitted such that the indicated value is included.

<Processing in the additional zone>
66 and 67 are flowcharts showing the process in the additional zone, which is executed in step S61 of the game start ART-related process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 sets the instruction information transmission state flag to "1" (S500). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so that the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player is informed during the additional zone. When this process ends, the process moves to step S501.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the start time of the additional zone (S501). In other words, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game is the first game that has transitioned from the addition zone, the special zone, or the ART zone to the addition zone. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the start time of the additional zone (YES), it sets "0" as an initial value in the additional zone counter (S502), and sets "0" as an initial value in the additional number. (S503), "none" is set as the addition history (S504). The additional zone counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in the additional zone. When the main CPU 93 finishes these processes, or when it is determined that it is not the start time of the additional zone (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to step S505.

Next, the main CPU 93 increments the additional zone counter by "1" (S505), and subsequently determines whether or not the additional zone counter is "1" (S506). When the main CPU 93 determines that the add-on zone counter is “1” (YES), it refers to the add-on security lottery table in the add-on zone (see FIG. 60) and determines whether or not the add-on is guaranteed based on the add-on history. It is determined (S507). When this process ends, the process moves to step S509.

On the other hand, when determining that the additional zone counter is not "1" (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the additional flag is on (S508). The addition flag is information for identifying whether ART management information is already stocked (that is, already added) in the set in the addition zone. When determining that the added flag is ON (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S514, and when it judges that the added flag is not ON (NO), shifts the processing to step S509. ..

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART management information stock lottery table in the additional zone (see FIG. 61), and draws the ART management information stock based on the internal winning combination (S509). As a result of the lottery, the ART management is performed. It is determined whether or not the information stock is won (S510). When determining that the ART management information stock has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S514.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART management information stock has been won (YES), it refers to the ART management information stock content lottery table in the additional zone (FIG. 62) and based on the number of additions, the ART management information. The stock contents are determined, the number of ART management information stocks is updated according to the determination result (S511), the number of additions is added by "1" (S512), and the addition completion flag is turned on (S513). When these processes are completed, the process moves to step S514.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone counter is "7" (S514). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the end of the set in the additional zone. When determining that the additional zone counter is not "7" (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the additional zone processing.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the additional zone counter is "7" (YES), then it is determined whether the additional flag is on (S515). That is, at the end of the set in the addition zone, it is determined whether or not the addition has already been completed. When determining that the additional zone is on (YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" as an initial value in the additional zone counter (S516), and ends the additional zone processing. That is, the main CPU 93 performs processing for starting a new set in the additional zone in response to winning the additional lottery in the set in the additional zone. Although illustration is omitted, the main CPU 93 turns off the added flag that has been turned on in the process of step S516.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S515 that the addition completion flag is not on (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not addition addition is guaranteed (S517). In other words, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "addition" guarantee has been determined in the process of step S507. When the main CPU 93 determines that there is additional security (YES), it refers to the ART management information stock content lottery table in the additional zone (see FIG. 62) and determines the ART management information stock content based on the number of additional times. , The number of ART management information stocks is updated according to the determination result (S518), the number of additions is added by "1" (S519), "existence" is set as the addition history (S520), and the addition zone counter is set to the initial value. "0" is set (S521), and the process in the additional zone is completed. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of starting a new set in the additional zone in response to the fact that the additional lottery is not won in the relevant set in the additional zone but the additional guarantee is made.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no additional guarantee (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not there is CZ management information (S522). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is already-selected CZ management information when the addition zone ends. When determining that there is CZ management information (YES), the main CPU 93 clears the additional zone, sets CZ during ART (S523), and ends the additional zone processing. That is, the process of shifting from the additional zone to the CZ during ART is performed. When determining that there is no CZ management information (NO), the main CPU 93 clears the additional zone, sets ART (S524), and ends the additional zone processing. That is, the process of shifting from the additional zone to the ART is performed.

It should be noted that in the present embodiment, even if the ART management information stock is won during the set of the additional zone processing, the set continues until the seventh game. In the seventh game, for example, the fact that the additional lottery has been won (that is, the additional zone continues) and the winning content (that is, the type of ART management information that has been stocked) are notified by the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like. It has become so. Therefore, in the additional zone, it is possible to continue the expectation of additional until the end of the set. However, the mode of the processing in the additional zone is not limited to this, and can be appropriately changed. For example, when the ART management information stock is won during the set of the processing in the additional zone, the process may be immediately shifted to the next set. In this case, the above-mentioned notification may be performed in the game in which the ART management information stock is won.

<Processing during CZ during ART>
68 to 70 are flowcharts showing the CZ during ART process executed in step S65 of the ART related process at game start shown in FIG. 65.

First, the main CPU 93 sets "1" in the instruction information transmission state flag (S530). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is informed during the CZ during ART. When this process ends, the process moves to step S531.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the start time of CZ during ART (S531). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game is the first game that has transitioned from the addition zone or ART to CZ during ART. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the start time of CZ during ART (YES), it sets “0” as the initial value in the CZ counter and the point counter (S532). Here, the CZ counter is a counter for counting the number of games played during CZ during ART (or during CZ during normal play), and the point counter is CZ successful (that is, the temporary stocked ART management information is added. Counter) that manages a numerical value (point) for determining whether the CZ fails (that is, the temporarily stocked ART management information is not added). When the main CPU 93 finishes this process or determines that it is not the time of starting CZ during ART (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to step S533.

Next, the main CPU 93 increments the CZ counter by "1" (S533), and subsequently determines whether the CZ counter is "1" (S534). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is “1” (YES), it refers to the special addition execution lottery table (see FIG. 42 ), and the presence/absence of special addition is executed based on the effect state flag. The number of games to be played is determined (S535). When this process ends, the process moves to step S536.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ continuation mode lottery table (see FIG. 43) and determines the CZ continuation mode based on the management information (S536). When this process ends, the process moves to step S538.

On the other hand, when determining that the CZ counter is not "1" (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the CZ counter is "3" or less (S537). In the present embodiment, in the CZ during ART, the first game to the third game (that is, the CZ counter is “3” or less) are positioned as the CZ introduction state, and the fourth game and thereafter (that is, the CZ counter is “4”). The above) are positioned as the CZ execution state. Then, in the CZ introduction state, the point counter is not updated or the like, but whether or not the CZ management information is promoted is determined. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CZ introduction state.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is equal to or less than “3” (that is, the CZ introduction state) (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ transition lottery table 1 during ART (see FIG. 55) to display the ART. Based on the middle CZ lottery mode and the internal winning combination, the CZ transition is lottery (S538). That is, the main CPU 93 determines by lottery whether or not to promote the CZ management information. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ transition has been won (S539). If the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the CZ transition (YES), it moves the process to step S540, and if it determines that it has not won the CZ transition (NO), finishes the CZ mid-ART process. To do.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the transition content lottery table during CZ transition winning during ART (see FIG. 57), determines the transition content based on the internal winning combination (S540), and executes the CZ management information update processing. (S541), CZ during ART processing is ended.

In the CZ management information update process of step S541, the main CPU 93 performs a process of updating (promoting) the current CZ management information based on the newly won CZ management information so as to be more advantageous. For example, when the current CZ management information is “1” (red CZ) and the newly won CZ management information is “2” (blue CZ), the CZ management information is “4” (red). If the current CZ management information is “1” (red CZ) and the newly won CZ management information is “3” (green CZ), the CZ management information is updated to blue CZ). If the current CZ management information is updated to "5" (red-green CZ) and the current CZ management information is "2" (blue CZ), and the newly won CZ management information is "3" (green CZ) , CZ management information is updated to “6” (blue-green CZ). Further, for example, when the current CZ management information is “4” (red-blue CZ), the newly won CZ management information is “3” (green CZ), “5” (red-green CZ) or “6”. "(Blue-green CZ)", the CZ management information is updated to "7" (red-blue-green CZ). That is, when the main CPU 93 newly wins the CZ management information associated with an attribute different from the one or more attributes (red, blue, or green) associated with the current CZ management information, CZ management information formed by combining a plurality of attributes is determined, and the CZ management information is updated.

Therefore, when the current CZ management information is "1" (red CZ) and the newly won CZ management information is "1" (red CZ), the CZ management information remains "1". Is. That is, when the CZ management information associated with the same attribute as the attribute associated with the current CZ management information is newly won, the CZ management information is not updated. However, also in this case, a separate lottery may be performed, and when the lottery is won, at least the CZ management information more advantageous than the current CZ management information may be updated.

Also, the manner in which the CZ management information is updated is not limited to that described above. For example, the CZ management information may be updated by simply adding the numerical value indicated by the CZ management information. Specifically, when the current CZ management information is "1" (red CZ) and the newly won CZ management information is "1" (red CZ), the CZ management information is changed to "2". (Blue CZ) (that is, “1”+“1”), and if the newly won CZ management information is “2” (blue CZ), the CZ management information is “3” (green). CZ) (that is, “1”+“2”), and if the newly won CZ management information is “3” (green CZ), the CZ management information is “4” (red-blue CZ). Is updated (that is, “1”+“3”). Then, when such an addition result is "7" (red, blue, green, CZ) or more, the addition of the ART management information may be determined.

In the process of step S537, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is not “3” or less (that is, the CZ introduction state, not the CZ execution state) (NO), the special addition execution game continues. Or not (S542). That is, in the process of step S535, it is the seventh game when the special addition is determined to be “present (7th game)”, or the special addition is determined to be “present (10th game)”. In this case, it is determined whether or not it is the 10th game. When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S549.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the special addition execution game (NO), subsequently, it determines whether or not it is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (S543). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (YES), it moves the process to step S549. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the push order bell B is won (S544). That is, the main CPU 93 causes the "left center right bell B", "left right center bell B", "center left right bell B", "center right left bell B", "right left center bell B" or "right center left bell B" ( It is determined whether or not the value of the small win/replay data pointer is internally won to any of "36" to "41"). When the main CPU 93 determines that the push order bell B has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S549.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push order bell B is won (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ middle/high probability chance lottery table (see FIG. 44), and based on the CZ management information, the CZ middle/high probability chance. The transfer is selected by lottery (S545), and as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the CZ middle/high probability transfer has been won (S546). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the CZ middle-high probability chance transition (NO), the process proceeds to step S549. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ middle/high probability chance has been won (YES), it sets the CZ middle/high probability chance (S547) and sets the instruction information transmission state flag to "2" (S548). .. That is, the main CPU 93 sets "1" in bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 2 and controls the push order bell B so that only the procedure of the stop operation of the first stop operation is notified in the game. To do. When these processes are completed, the process moves to step S549.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is the CZ medium-high probability chance (S549). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is the CZ medium-high probability chance (YES), the CZ-during-ART process is ended. On the other hand, when determining that the current effect state is not the CZ medium-high probability chance (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is a special addition execution game (S550). When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the point special addition processing (S551), and shifts the processing to step S554.

If the current value of the point counter is less than "51" in the point special addition process of step S551, the main CPU 93 performs the process of determining the point addition value with the added point counter value of "92". .. For example, if the current value of the point counter is "10", a process of determining "82" as the point addition value is performed. Here, in the normal point addition value, "8" is the minimum addition value except for "0" (that is, when points are not added) (see FIG. 49). That is, when the current point is less than the specific value (51) and the special addition is executed, the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ is successful (the point is “100” or more) if the point is added once more. Perform the process of adding points. In this case, for example, if the points are added two more times, the process of adding CZ success may be performed. Further, this “how many more times” is determined by a lottery, and the lottery result is set. In accordance therewith, processing for adding points may be performed. Specifically, when the current value of the point counter is “10”, “3 more times” is determined with a probability of 32/128, and when this is determined, the point addition value is “66” ( That is, 100 points are reached with 8×3=24, and “2 more times” is determined with a probability of 32/128. If this is determined, “74” (that is, 8 points) is added as the point addition value. X2=16 is reached, 100 points are reached), "1 more time" is decided with a probability of 64/128, and if this is decided, processing to decide "82" as the point addition value is performed. You may

Further, in the point special addition processing of step S551, the main CPU 93 determines the point addition value at which the value of the added point counter becomes “100” or more if the current value of the point counter is “51” or more. Perform processing. For example, if the current value of the point counter is "60", the process of determining "40" as the point addition value is performed. That is, when the current point is the specific value (51) or more and the special addition is performed, the main CPU 93 always performs the process of adding the point that is the CZ success (the point is “100” or more). .. As in the case where the current point is less than the specific value (51), if the point is added once more, the process of adding the point that is CZ successful (the point is “100” or more) is performed with a predetermined probability. It may be performed.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not the special addition execution game (NO), it refers to the CZ ART management information provisional stock lottery table (see FIG. 47) and based on the CZ management information and the internal winning combination. , The ART management information temporary stock is drawn (S552), and as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the ART management information temporary stock is won (S553). When the main CPU 93 determines that the ART management information temporary stock has been won (YES), it refers to the CZ ART management information temporary stock content lottery table (see FIG. 48) to show the effect state, CZ management information, and internal winning. The content of the temporary stock of ART management information is determined based on the winning combination, and the number of temporary stocks of ART management information is stored according to the determination result (S554). When the main CPU 93 finishes this process or determines that it has not won the ART management information temporary stock (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to step S555.

Although illustration is omitted, in the CZ during ART process, the process in step S554 is performed at least once regardless of the lottery result in step S552. That is, at least one piece of ART management information is always provisionally stocked in the CZ during ART as an initial setting. The timing at which this initialization is performed can be set as appropriate, and may be, for example, when the CZ during ART is started (that is, when the determination result of S531 is YES), or when the CZ execution state is set. It may be at the start time (that is, when the determination result of S537 is NO).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a special addition execution game (S555). When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S570. On the other hand, when determining that the game is not the special addition execution game (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (S556). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (YES), the process proceeds to step S563.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not in the CZ medium high accuracy zone (NO), it refers to the CZ medium normal point addition value lottery table (see FIG. 49) to refer to the CZ management information and the inside. The point addition value is determined based on the winning combination and the like, and the point counter is updated according to the determination result (S557). When this process ends, the process moves to step S558.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the point addition value is “12” or more (S558). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the point addition value “12” or more is determined in the process of step S557. When the main CPU 93 determines that the point addition value is not “12” or more (NO), the process proceeds to step S570.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the point addition value is “12” or more (YES), it refers to the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer lottery table (see FIG. 45), and based on the internal winning combination, the CZ is selected. The middle-high accuracy zone transition is selected by lottery (S559), and as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the CZ middle-high accuracy zone transition has been won (S560). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the CZ medium-high accuracy zone transition (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S570.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transition has been won (YES), it sets the inside of the CZ middle/high accuracy zone (S561). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “1” in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as an initial value in the high-accuracy zone counter (S562), and ends the CZ during ART process. The high-accuracy zone counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone.

In the process of step S556, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in the CZ medium high-precision zone (YES), the CZ counter is decremented by 1 (S563), and the high-precision zone counter is set to “1”. 1” is added (S564). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so as to maintain the value of the CZ counter in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone. In the process of step S533 instead of the process of step S563, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone, and it is determined that the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone. In this case, the process of not adding "1" to the CZ counter may be performed. When these processes are completed, the process is transferred to step S565.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the high accuracy zone counter is "4" (S565). When determining that the high-accuracy zone counter is not “4” (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ medium-high accuracy point addition value lottery table (see FIG. 50), and based on the effect state, the point addition value. Is determined and the point counter is updated according to the determination result (S566). When this process ends, the process moves to step S567.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone end lottery table (see FIG. 46), and draws the end of the CZ middle-high accuracy zone based on the number of games and the internal winning combination (S567), and the result of the lottery. , CZ It is determined whether or not the player has won the end of the medium-high accuracy zone (S568). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not to end the CZ middle high accuracy zone based on the value of the high accuracy zone counter and the internal winning combination. When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the end of the CZ middle high-accuracy zone (NO), it ends the CZ middle processing during ART. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the end of the CZ middle-high accuracy zone (YES), it clears the CZ middle-high accuracy zone (S569). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When this process ends, the process moves to step S570.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the point counter is “100” or more (S570). When determining that the point counter is not "100" or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the CZ counter is "13" or more (S571). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is not “13” or more (NO), the CZ during ART process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is “13” or more (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ end lottery process (S572). In this CZ end lottery process, when the internal winning combination is “miss” or “replay (other than special)” described above, the CZ during ART is selected based on the CZ continuation mode determined in the process of step S536. It is determined whether or not to end. When this process ends, the process moves to step S573.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ end lottery is won (S573). When determining that the CZ end lottery has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the CZ during ART process (that is, continues during CZ during ART). On the other hand, when it is determined that the CZ end lottery is won (YES), the stored ART management information provisional stock number is cleared (S574). When this process ends, the process moves to step S575.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the notification counter is “0” (S575). Here, the notification counter is a counter for counting the number of times of notification for each piece of ART management information during ART. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a notification count that has not been exhausted during the ART. When determining that the notification counter is "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART management information stocks is "1" or more (S576). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is ART management information that has not been digested in the ART. When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of ART management information stock is not “1” or more (NO), the CZ during ART is cleared, the normal is set (S577), and the CZ during ART process is ended. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of shifting from CZ during ART to normal when CZ failure occurs and there is no undigested notification count or ART management information.

In the process of step S575, the main CPU 93 determines that the notification counter is not “0” (NO), or in the process of step S576 that the number of ART management information stocks is “1” or more ( If YES, the CZ during ART is cleared, the CZ during ART is set (S578), and the CZ during ART process is terminated. That is, the main CPU 93 performs the process of shifting from CZ during ART to during ART when there is unreported number of notifications or ART management information although the CZ has failed.

In the process of step S565, the main CPU 93 determines that the high-accuracy zone counter is “4” (YES), or in the process of step S570, it determines that the point counter is “100” or more ( In (YES), the number of ART management information stocks is updated based on the stored number of temporary ART management information stocks (S579), CZ during ART is cleared, and the inside of ART is set (S580), and CZ during ART is set. Medium processing ends. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of reflecting the ART management information temporarily stocked in the CZ during ART on the number of stocks of ART management information (addition confirmation), and shifting from CZ during ART to ART.

However, when the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S565 that the high-accuracy zone counter is "4" (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process of increasing the point counter to "100" or more, and then the process of step S570. You may move it.

In the present embodiment, when the point addition value is determined in the above-described CZ execution state, the liquid crystal display device 11 or the like produces an effect according to the determined point addition value and the CZ management information. ing. Specifically, a battle effect between a character (allied character) and an enemy character according to CZ management information described later is performed, and the point addition value is displayed as damage given to the enemy character in this battle effect. For example, when "8" is determined as the point addition value, it is displayed that the teammate character makes an attack with a small action (low expectations) against the enemy character, and causes a small amount of damage. To be done. Further, when "36" is determined as the point addition value, it is displayed that the ally character makes an attack with a large action (high expectations) on the enemy character and causes a lot of damage. To be done. When "0" is determined as the point addition value, the enemy character attacks the ally character, so that the damage is not displayed. The same applies to the CZ execution state during the normal CZ.

<Processing during ART>
71 to 73 are flowcharts showing the in-ART process executed in step S67 of the game start ART-related process shown in FIG. 65.

First, the main CPU 93 sets "1" in the instruction information transmission state flag (S590). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified during the ART. When this process ends, the process moves to step S591.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the start time of ART (S591). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the first game during the ART preparation, the CZ during ART, or the addition zone to the ART. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the start time of ART (NO), the process proceeds to step S596. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is the start time of ART (YES), it refers to the ART in-mode initial lottery table (see FIG. 51) and determines the ART in-mode based on the lottery trigger. (S592). When this process ends, the process moves to step S593.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the ART CZ lottery mode lottery table (see FIG. 52) and determines the ART CZ lottery mode based on the lottery trigger and the set value (S593). When this process ends, the process moves to step S594.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ ceiling lottery table during ART (see FIG. 53) and determines the number of CZ ceiling replays based on the lottery trigger and the CZ during lottery mode (S594). When this process ends, the process moves to step S595.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes the ART management information setting process shown in FIG. 74 (S595). In this ART management information setting processing, processing such as setting the current ART management information from the ART management information stored in the ART management information stock number is performed. Details will be described later. When this process ends, the process moves to step S596.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current ART management information is “ART management information 4” (S596). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current ART management information is “ART management information 4” (YES), it refers to the CZ transfer lottery table 2 during ART (see FIG. 56) and based on the internal winning combination. , CZ transfer is drawn by lot (S597). When this process ends, the process moves to step S599. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current ART management information is not the “ART management information 4” (NO), it refers to the CZ transition during ART table 1 (see FIG. 55) to refer to the CZ during ART mode. Based on the internal winning combination and the internal winning combination, the CZ transition is drawn by lot (S598). When this process ends, the process moves to step S599.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a CZ shift has been won (S599). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the CZ transition (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S606. On the other hand, if it is determined that the player has won the CZ transition (YES), the transition content lottery table (see FIG. 57) at the time of winning the CZ transition during ART is referred to, and the transition content is determined based on the internal winning combination (S600). ). That is, the main CPU 93 determines the CZ management information in the case of shifting to CZ during ART. When this process ends, the process moves to step S601.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ shift has already been won (S601). Here, in the present embodiment, even if the player has already won the CZ shift during the ART, the CZ shift lottery is continuously performed until the shift to the CZ during the ART. Therefore, in this process, when the main CPU 93 has already won the CZ transition, it determines whether or not the CZ transition has been won. When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ migration has already been won (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ management information update process (S602), and moves the process to step S606. In this CZ management information update process, the same process as the process of step S541 of FIG. 68 is performed, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ shift win has not been completed (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the additional zone shift win has been completed (S603). That is, as will be described later, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it has already been determined to shift to the additional zone based on the fact that the ART mode is “4”. When the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone transfer has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S605.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone transfer has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ during ART/additional zone transfer win precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 58), and based on the content of the transition. The number of predictive games is determined, and the number of predictive games is set according to the determination result (S604). When this process ends, the process moves to step S605.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a CZ management information setting process (S605). In the CZ management information setting process, the main CPU 93 performs a process of setting the CZ management information according to the determined migration content as the current CZ management information. When this process ends, the process moves to step S606.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone transfer has been won (S606). When the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone transfer has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S610. On the other hand, when it is determined that the additional zone transfer has not been won (NO), the ART mode is selected based on the current ART mode and internal winning combination by referring to the ART mode transfer lottery table (see FIG. 59). Is determined (S607). When this process ends, the process moves to step S608.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the ART mode is "4" (S608). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the player has won the additional zone transition. When the main CPU 93 determines that the ART mode is not “4” (NO), the process proceeds to step S610. On the other hand, when it is determined that the mode during ART is “4” (YES), the CZ during ART/additional zone transition win precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 58) is referred to, and based on the transition content, The number of precursor games is determined, and the number of precursor games is set according to the determination result (S609). When this process ends, the process moves to step S610.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning combination to be counted has been won (S610). As described above, in the present embodiment, when the ART management information is “1” or “4”, “push order bell A” and “push order bell B” are counted objects, and the ART management information is “2”. In the case of ", the push order bell A" is the counting target combination, and when the ART management information is "3", the "push order bell B" is the counting target combination. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the count target combination corresponding to the current ART management information has been won. When determining that the winning combination to be counted has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S618.

On the other hand, when determining that the winning combination has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the notification counter (S611), and subsequently determines whether the notification counter is "0". Yes (S612). When determining that the notification counter is not "0" (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S618. On the other hand, when determining that the notification counter is "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the number of ART management information stocks is "1" or more (S613). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is undigested ART management information. When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of ART management information stock is “1” or more (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the ART management information setting process shown in FIG. 74 (S614), and moves the process to step S618.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of ART management information stocks is not “1” or more (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ or additional zone shift has been won (S615). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ or additional zone transfer has been won (YES), it updates the number of precursor games to “0”, clears ART, and sets CZ or additional zone in ART. (S616), the processing during ART is terminated. That is, when the number of notifications during the ART and the number of ART management information stocks in the ART are “0”, the main CPU 93 does not pass the number of precursor games and does not pass the number of precursor games in the case of winning the CZ or the additional zone shift. Processing for shifting from inside to CZ during ART or to the additional zone is performed.

On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ or additional zone transfer has not been won (NO), it clears the ART status, sets normal (S617), and ends the ART processing. That is, when the number of notifications during ART and the number of ART management information stock during ART become “0”, the main CPU 93 shifts from the state of ART to the normal state when the player has not won the CZ or additional zone shift (( That is, the process of ending ART is performed.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of precursor games is “1” or more (S618). When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of precursor games is not “1” or more (NO), the process proceeds to S622. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of precursor games is “1” or more (YES), the number of precursor games is subtracted by “1” (S619), and subsequently, the number of precursor games is “0”. It is determined whether there is any (S620). When determining that the number of precursor games is not “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S622.

On the other hand, when determining that the number of precursor games is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 clears the ART state, sets the CZ state during the ART period or the addition zone period (S621), and executes the during-ART process. finish. That is, when the number of precursor games becomes “0”, the main CPU 93 performs a process of shifting from during ART to CZ during ART or to the additional zone.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not a replay has been won (S622). In the present embodiment, the replay that is determined to have been won in this process is the above-mentioned “replay (other than special)”. However, replays other than this "replay (other than special)" may be judged to have been won in this process, and this process is also performed for other internal winning combinations (for example, "miss"). It may be determined that the player has won. When determining that the replay has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the ART process.

On the other hand, when determining that the replay has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the CZ shift has been won (S623). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ shift has been won (YES), the processing during ART is terminated. That is, when the CZ transition is won during the ART, the main CPU 93 controls so as not to determine the CZ transition based on the number of CZ ceiling replays.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ transition win has not been completed (NO), the CZ ceiling replay count is decremented by "1" (S624), and subsequently, the CZ ceiling replay count is "0". It is determined (S625). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ ceiling replay count is not “0” (NO), it ends the ART process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of CZ ceiling replays is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ transition content lottery process upon arrival at the ceiling (S626).

In the ceiling arrival CZ transition content lottery process in step S626, the main CPU 93 determines the CZ management information 1 with a probability of 40/128, the CZ management information 2 with a probability of 40/128, and 45/128, for example. The CZ management information 3 is determined with a probability of 1, the CZ management information 4 is determined with a probability of 1/128, the CZ management information 5 is determined with a probability of 1/128, and the CZ management information 6 is determined with a probability of 1/128. Perform the processing to determine. When this process ends, the process moves to step S627.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the additional zone transfer has been won (S627). When the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone transfer has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ during ART/additional zone transfer win precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 58) and based on the content of the transition The number of games is determined, and the number of precursor games according to the determination result is set (S628). When this process ends, the process moves to step S629. When the CZ transition is determined based on the number of CZ ceiling replays being “0” and the additional zone transition has not been won, the number of precursor games is not determined (that is, It is also possible to shift from during ART to during CZ during ART (without passing the number of precursor games).

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the additional zone shift has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ management information setting process (S629) and ends the ART process. In this CZ management information setting process, the same process as the process of step S605 of FIG. 71 is performed, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the ART, the counting target combination for which the number of times of notification is counted varies depending on the type of the ART management information. That is, it is possible to change the end timing during the ART and the profit obtained by the execution during the ART depending on which combination is to be counted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the ART and further improve the interest.

Further, in the present embodiment, of the notification target combinations (“push order bell A” and “push order bell B”) during ART, the case where “push order bell A” is the counting target combination and the “push order bell A”. In some cases, "B" becomes a target to be counted, and the "push order bell A" has a higher probability of being internally won than the "push order bell B". That is, when the “push order bell B” is the counting target combination, the player can be more advantageous than when the “push order bell A” is the counting target combination. Therefore, since the degree of advantage can be further changed during the ART, the interest during the ART can be improved.

Further, in the present embodiment, even if the counting target combination is different, the profit obtained when the notification target combination is realized is the same. Therefore, the player can easily estimate the profit obtained during the ART from the type of the winning combination to be counted and the winning probability thereof, and thus the interest during the ART can be improved. Further, it is possible to easily design the payout of the gaming machine while preventing the game from becoming monotonous during the ART.

<ART management information setting process>
FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the ART management information setting process executed in step S595 or step S614 of the ART in-process shown in FIGS.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is an ART transition (S640). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the above-mentioned "first hit" of the ART. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time to shift to the ART (NO), it subsequently determines whether it is the time to release the ART management information stock (S641). That is, in the processing in step S614 of FIG. 72, it is determined whether or not the ART management information is newly set. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time to release the ART management information stock (NO), it shifts the processing to step S648.

If the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S640 that it is an ART transition time (YES) or in the process of step S641 that it is an ART management information stock release time (YES), the regulation is determined. The ART management information is set according to the determined priority (S642). Here, in the present embodiment, it is defined that the priority order becomes higher in the order of “ART management information 4”, “ART management information 1”, “ART management information 2”, and “ART management information 3”. Therefore, for example, if the number of stocks of 1 piece of ART management information is “1” and the number of stocks of 4 pieces of ART management information is “1”, in this processing, “ART management information 4” having higher priority is ART managed. It is set as information. When this process ends, the process moves to step S643.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the number of ART management information stocks (S643). That is, the main CPU 93 subtracts the value of the stock number of the ART management information 1 to the ART management information 4 according to the ART management information set in the process of step S642. For example, in the process of step S642, when "ART management information 4" is set as the ART management information, the value of the stock number of the ART management information 4 is subtracted by "1". When this process ends, the process moves to step S644.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether "ART management information 1" or "ART management information 2" has been set (S644). When the main CPU 93 determines that “ART management information 1” or “ART management information 2” is not set (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S647. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that “ART management information 1” or “ART management information 2” is set (YES), it refers to the ART management information promotion lottery table (see FIG. 54) to promote the promotion. Whether or not to promote is determined based on the mode, and the promotion mode is set according to the determination result (S645). In the present embodiment, "1" is set as the initial value of the promotion mode.

That is, in the process of step S645, the main CPU 93 determines whether to transfer (promote) "ART management information 1" or "ART management information 2" to "ART management information 3" that is more advantageous for the player. Along with the decision, if it is decided to promote, a process of setting "2" as the promotion mode is performed. In the promotion mode “2”, the ART management information is easier to promote than in the promotion mode “1” (see FIG. 54). Therefore, when the ART management information is promoted, there is a high expectation that the ART management information will be promoted when the ART management information is set next time. The promotion mode “2” is held until it is determined that there is no promotion in the process of step S645 (that is, when the promotion mode is “2”, the promotion lottery is performed and the promotion lottery is won). If not, promotion mode "1" is set). However, the promotion mode “2” may be held until the end of ART. When this process ends, the process moves to step S646.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes ART management information update processing (S646). In the ART management information update process, for example, when the “ART management information 1” is promoted to “ART management information 3” as a result of the promotion lottery described above, the main CPU 93 changes the current ART management information to “ART management information”. The information 3" is updated. In this case, in the process of step S643, the stock number of the ART management information 1 is already subtracted by "1", and therefore the stock number of the ART management information 3 is not again subtracted by "1". When this process ends, the process moves to step S647.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets the counting target combination based on the set ART management information (S647). That is, when the ART management information is "1" or "4", the main CPU 93 sets "pushing order bell A" and "pushing order bell B" as counting target hands, and when the ART management information is "2" , "Push order bell A" is set as a count target combination, and when the ART management information is "3", "push order bell B" is set as a count target combination. When this process ends, the process moves to step S648.

Next, the main CPU 93 sets "5" or "50" as an initial value in the notification counter based on the set ART management information (S648), and ends the ART management information setting process. That is, the main CPU 93 sets "5" as the initial value of the notification counter when the ART management information is any of "1" to "3", and when the ART management information is "4", initializes the notification counter. Set "50" as the value. Note that this process is performed even when the ART is restored (that is, other than the above-mentioned "first hit" of the ART), so that the ART management information is "4" and the notification counter is "1" ( That is, when the notification is finished once more, it ends, and when the state shifts to another effect state (for example, during bonus) and then returns to ART again, "50" is set again in the notification counter. In such a case, the number of times of notification is substantially added.

As described above, in this embodiment, when setting ART management information, it is determined whether or not the ART state management information is promoted to more advantageous ART state management information, and when it is determined that the ART state management information is promoted, When setting the ART management information thereafter, the ART management information is configured to be easily promoted. Therefore, during the ART, for example, even when the ART management information relatively disadvantageous to the player is set, the player's expectation can be maintained.

<Normal CZ processing>
75 to 77 are flowcharts showing the during-normal CZ processing executed in step S71 of the game start ART-related processing shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 sets "0" in the instruction information transmission state flag (S660). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified during the normal CZ. When this process ends, the process moves to step S661.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of the normal CZ (S661). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first game that has shifted from normal to normal CZ. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the start time of the normal CZ (YES), it sets “0” as an initial value in the CZ counter and the point counter (S662). In the normal CZ processing, the point counter becomes CZ success (that is, the temporary stocked ART management information is held and moves to ART) or CZ failure (does not move to ART). Is used to determine The main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S663 when this processing ends or when it is determined that it is not the start time of the normal CZ (NO).

Next, the main CPU 93 increments the CZ counter by "1" (S663), and subsequently determines whether the CZ counter is "1" (S664). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is “1” (YES), it refers to the special addition execution lottery table (see FIG. 42 ), and the presence/absence of special addition is executed based on the effect state flag. The number of games to be played is determined (S665). When this process ends, the process moves to step S666.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ continuation mode lottery table (see FIG. 43) and determines the CZ continuation mode based on the management information (S666). When this process ends, the process moves to step S668.

On the other hand, when determining that the CZ counter is not "1" (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the CZ counter is "3" or less (S667). In the present embodiment, in the normal CZ, the first game to the third game (that is, the CZ counter is "3" or less) are positioned as the CZ introduction state, and the fourth game and thereafter (that is, the CZ counter is "4"). The above) are positioned as the CZ execution state. Then, in the CZ introduction state, the point counter is not updated or the like, but whether or not the CZ management information is promoted is determined. That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is in the CZ introduction state.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is “3” or less (that is, the CZ introduction state) (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ/ART transfer lottery table (see FIG. 36) and internally wins. Based on the winning combination, the CZ/ART transition is drawn by lot (S668). That is, the main CPU 93 determines by lottery whether or not to promote the CZ management information or shift to the ART. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ/ART transition has been won (S669). If the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the CZ/ART transition (YES), it moves the process to step S670, and if it determines that it has not won the CZ/ART transition (NO), the normal CZ Medium processing ends.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ/ART transition winning selection lottery table (see FIG. 37), determines the contents of the transition based on the internal winning combination (S670), and executes the CZ management information update process. (S671), the normal mid-CZ process ends. In this CZ management information update process, the same process as the process of step S541 of FIG. 68 is performed, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the processing of step S667 that the CZ counter is not "3" or less (that is, the CZ introduction state, not the CZ execution state) (NO), the special addition execution game continues. Or not (S672). That is, in the process of step S665, it is the 7th game when the special addition is determined to be “present (7th game)”, or the special addition is determined to be “present (10th game)”. In this case, it is determined whether it is the tenth game. When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S679.

On the other hand, when determining that the game is not the special addition execution game (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not it is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (S673). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (YES), it moves the process to step S679. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not in the CZ middle-high accuracy zone (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the push order bell B is won (S674). That is, the main CPU 93 causes the "left center right bell B", "left right center bell B", "center left right bell B", "center right left bell B", "right left center bell B" or "right center left bell B" ( It is determined whether or not the value of the small win/replay data pointer is internally won to any of "36" to "41"). When the main CPU 93 determines that the push order bell B has not been won (NO), the process proceeds to step S679.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the push order bell B is won (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ middle/high probability chance lottery table (see FIG. 44), and based on the CZ management information, the CZ middle/high probability chance. The transfer is selected by lot (S675), and as a result of the selection, it is determined whether or not the CZ medium-high probability transfer is won (S676). If the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the CZ middle-high probability chance transition (NO), it moves the process to step S679. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ medium/high probability chance has been won (YES), it sets the CZ medium/high probability chance (S677) and sets the instruction information transmission state flag to “2” (S678). .. That is, the main CPU 93 sets "1" in bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 2 and controls the push order bell B so that only the procedure of the stop operation of the first stop operation is notified in the game. To do. When these processes are completed, the process is transferred to step S679.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is a CZ medium-high probability chance (S679). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in bit 1 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is the CZ medium/high probability chance (YES), the normal medium CZ medium process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not the CZ medium-high probability chance (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is a special addition execution game (S680). When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 executes point special addition processing (S681), and shifts the processing to step S684. In this point special addition process, the same process as the process of step S551 of FIG. 69 is performed, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not the special addition execution game (NO), it refers to the CZ ART management information provisional stock lottery table (see FIG. 47) and based on the CZ management information and the internal winning combination. , ART management information provisional stock is drawn by lot (S682), and as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the ART management information provisional stock is won (S683). When the main CPU 93 determines that the ART management information temporary stock has been won (YES), it refers to the CZ ART management information temporary stock content lottery table (see FIG. 48) to show the effect state, CZ management information, and internal winning. The content of the temporary stock of ART management information is determined based on the winning combination, and the number of temporary stocks of ART management information is stored according to the determination result (S684). When the main CPU 93 finishes this process or determines that it has not won the ART management information temporary stock (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to step S685.

Although illustration is omitted, in the normal CZ process, the process of step S684 is performed at least once regardless of the lottery result of step S682. That is, in the normal CZ, at least one piece of ART management information is always provisionally stocked as an initial setting. The timing at which this initial setting is performed can be set as appropriate, and may be, for example, when the normal CZ is started (that is, when the determination result of S661 is YES), or when the CZ execution state is set. It may be at the start time (that is, when the determination result of S667 is NO).

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a special addition execution game (S685). When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S700. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not the special addition execution game (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (S686). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not “1” is set in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S693.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not in the CZ medium high accuracy zone (NO), it refers to the CZ medium normal point addition value lottery table (see FIG. 49) to refer to the CZ management information and the inside. The point addition value is determined based on the winning combination and the like, and the point counter is updated according to the determination result (S687). When this process ends, the process moves to step S688.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the point addition value is “12” or more (S688). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the point addition value “12” or more is determined in the process of step S687. When the main CPU 93 determines that the point addition value is not “12” or more (NO), the process proceeds to step S700.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the point addition value is “12” or more (YES), it refers to the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transfer lottery table (see FIG. 45), and based on the internal winning combination, the CZ is selected. The middle-high accuracy zone transition is selected by lottery (S689), and as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the CZ middle-high accuracy zone transition has been won (S690). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the CZ middle-high accuracy zone shift (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S700.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ middle/high accuracy zone transition has been won (YES), it sets the inside of the CZ middle/high accuracy zone (S691). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “1” in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 sets "0" as an initial value in the high-accuracy zone counter (S692), and ends the normal CZ processing.

In the process of step S686, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is in the CZ medium high-precision zone (YES), the CZ counter is decremented by 1 (S693), and the high-precision zone counter is set to “1”. 1” is added (S694). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so as to maintain the value of the CZ counter in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone. In the process of step S663 instead of the process of step S693, it is determined whether or not the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone, and it is determined that the current effect state is in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone. In this case, the process of not adding "1" to the CZ counter may be performed. When these processes are completed, the process moves to step S695.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the high accuracy zone counter is "4" (S695). When determining that the high-accuracy zone counter is not “4” (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ medium-high accuracy point addition value lottery table (see FIG. 50), and based on the effect state, the point addition value. Is determined and the point counter is updated according to the determination result (S696). When this process ends, the process moves to step S697.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ medium-high accuracy zone end lottery table (see FIG. 46), and draws the end of the CZ medium-high accuracy zone based on the number of games and the internal winning combination (S697). , CZ It is determined whether or not the player has won the end of the medium-high accuracy zone (S698). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not to end the CZ middle high accuracy zone based on the value of the high accuracy zone counter and the internal winning combination. When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the end of the CZ middle-high accuracy zone (NO), it ends the normal middle-CZ middle process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the player has won the end of the CZ middle-high accuracy zone (YES), it clears the middle of the CZ middle-high accuracy zone (S699). That is, the main CPU 93 sets “0” in bit 2 of the effect state flag storage area 2. When this process ends, the process moves to step S700.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the point counter is “100” or more (S700). When determining that the point counter is not "100" or more (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the CZ counter is "13" or more (S701). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is not “13” or more (NO), the normal CZ processing is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ counter is “13” or more (YES), it executes the CZ end lottery process (S702). In this CZ end lottery process, when the internal winning combination is “miss” or “replay (other than special)” described above, based on the CZ continuation mode determined in the process of step S666, the normal medium CZ is selected. It is determined whether or not to end. When this process ends, the process moves to step S703.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ end lottery has been won (S703). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the CZ end lottery (NO), it ends the normal mid-CZ processing (that is, continues the normal mid-CZ). On the other hand, if it is determined that the CZ end lottery is won (YES), the stored ART management information provisional stock number is cleared (S704), the normal CZ is cleared, the normal is set (S705), The normal CZ processing is ended (that is, the CZ has failed and the normal CZ processing is ended).

In the process of step S695, the main CPU 93 determines that the high-precision zone counter is "4" (YES), or in the process of step S700, the point counter is "100" or more ( In (YES), the number of ART management information stocks is updated based on the stored number of temporary ART management information stocks (S706), the normal CZ state is cleared, and the ART preparation is set (S707). The CZ processing is ended (that is, the CZ is successful, and the normal CZ processing is ended). That is, the main CPU 93 reflects the ART management information provisionally stocked in the normal CZ on the number of stocks of ART management information, and then shifts from the normal CZ to the ART during preparation for ART. ..

In addition, in the process of step S695, when the main CPU 93 determines that the high-precision zone counter is “4” (YES), the main CPU 93 performs a process of increasing the point counter to “100” or more, and then the process of step S700. You may move it.

As described above, in this embodiment, it is determined whether or not to temporarily add (temporarily stock) the ART management information in the normal CZ to which the ART management information for managing the ART can be added, and the value of the point counter is determined. When the predetermined granting condition that the value is “100” or more is satisfied, the provisionally provided ART management information is permanently granted (formally stocked). That is, in the normal CZ, it is determined whether or not the grant condition is satisfied for the information (advantageous state management information) for shifting or continuing to the advantageous state, and the content of the grant is determined. It has become so. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game during the normal CZ from becoming monotonous. The same applies to the addition of ART management information in CZ during ART.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the ART management information is provisionally provided, the determination of the number of points is preferentially performed so that the predetermined provision condition is more easily satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to further improve the interest of the game during the normal CZ. The same applies to the addition of ART management information in CZ during ART.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the normal CZ, when the special condition that the special addition is determined is satisfied, the special point number that determines that the predetermined grant condition is satisfied is determined. It is configured to be done.

Specifically, if the current number of points is a specific value (for example, "51") or more, by determining a special number of points that sets the number of points to a predetermined value (for example, "100") or more. , So that the predetermined granting condition is satisfied.

In addition, when the current number of points is less than a specific value, even if a relatively disadvantageous number of points (for example, “8”) is determined in determining the normal number of points, that point When the number of points is determined, the number of points is set to a predetermined value (for example, “100”) or more, and a special point number is determined, so that the degree of expectation that the predetermined grant condition is satisfied is dramatically increased. ing.

Therefore, for example, even when the situation of determining the number of points in the normal medium CZ is not good, it is possible to maintain the expectation of granting during the ART in the normal medium CZ, so that the interest in the game in the normal medium CZ can be maintained. Can be further improved. The same applies to the addition of ART management information in CZ during ART.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to determine whether the normal medium CZ is the normal normal medium CZ or the CZ medium high-accuracy zone. By giving preferential treatment to the decision, it is configured to more easily satisfy the predetermined granting condition. Further, when the number of games controlled in the CZ medium-high accuracy zone is "4", a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the playability in the normal medium CZ can be made more diverse, the interest of the game in the normal medium CZ can be further improved. The same applies to the addition of ART management information in CZ during ART.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when “push order bell B” is determined as an internal winning combination and a CZ middle/high probability chance is entered, a part of an advantageous stop operation procedure related to “push order bell B” (for example, , The stop operation sequence of the first stop operation) is notified, and when the stop operation can be performed by an advantageous stop operation procedure, it is determined that the normal CZ is in the CZ middle high-accuracy zone. Is configured. That is, in the normal CZ, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the stop operation sequence can be correctly answered, the normal CZ shifts to the more advantageous CZ medium high accuracy zone. Therefore, the degree of advantage in the normal CZ can be changed according to the situation of the game operation (for example, stop operation) by the player, so that the interest of the game in the normal CZ can be further improved. it can. The same applies to the addition of ART management information in CZ during ART.

<Special zone processing>
FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the special zone mid-process performed in step S73 of the game start ART-related process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 sets "1" in the instruction information transmission state flag (S720). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is notified in the special zone. When this process ends, the process moves to step S721.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the start time of the special zone (S721). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first game that has shifted from the normal state to the special zone. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the start time of the special zone (YES), it sets “0” as the initial value in the special zone counter (S722). The special zone counter is a counter for counting the number of games played in the special zone. When the main CPU 93 finishes this process or determines that it is not the start time of the special zone (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the process to step S723.

Next, the main CPU 93 increments the special zone counter by "1" (S723), and subsequently determines whether or not the ART transition has been won (S724). When the main CPU 93 determines that the ART transition has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S730. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 refers to the special zone ART transition lottery table (see FIG. 40) and randomly selects the ART transition based on the internal winning combination (S725). ), as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the player has won the ART transition (S726). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the ART transition (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the special zone counter is “10” (S727).

When determining that the special zone counter is "10" (YES), the main CPU 93 sets "0" to the number of precursor games (S728), and moves the process to step S730. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the special zone counter is not “10” (NO), it refers to the number-of-preceding-games lot drawing table for ART transition during special zone lottery table (see FIG. 41) to determine the number of precursor games. Then, the number of precursor games according to the determination result is set (S729), and the process proceeds to step S730.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of precursor games is “0” (S730). When determining that the number of precursor games is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 clears the special zone, sets the additional zone (S732), and ends the special zone processing. That is, the main CPU 93 succeeds in the special zone and performs a process of shifting from the special zone to the additional zone. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of precursor games is not "0" (NO), the number of precursor games is subtracted by "1" (S731), and the special zone processing is ended.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S726 that it has not won the ART transition (NO), it subsequently determines whether the special zone counter is "10" (S733). When determining that the special zone counter is not "10" (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the special zone processing. On the other hand, when it is determined that the special zone counter is "10" (YES), the inside of the special zone is cleared, the normal is set (S734), and the inside special zone processing is ended. That is, the main CPU 93 performs the process of shifting from the special zone to the normal state when the special zone fails.

<Processing during bonus>
FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the special zone processing executed in step S75 of the game start ART-related processing shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 sets "0" in the instruction information transmission state flag (S740). That is, the main CPU 93 controls so that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified during the bonus. However, in the case of being configured to be able to win an internal winning combination in which the profit fluctuates according to the player's stop operation procedure during the bonus, and to be configured to perform a stop operation procedure advantageous to the player In this process, the instruction information transmission state flag may be set to "1". When this process ends, the process moves to step S741.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the bonus bonus ART transition lottery table (see FIG. 39) and draws the ART transition based on the internal winning combination (S741). As a result of the lottery, whether or not the ART transition is won. It is determined (S742). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the ART transition (NO), it ends the bonus processing. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the ART transition (YES), it subsequently determines whether or not the ART transition has already been won (S743). That is, the main CPU 93 has already won the ART transition during this bonus, is in the bonus when transitioning from the normal CZ, the ART preparation, the ART or the CZ during ART, or normally. It is determined whether or not BB (red, blue, green, and red) is in the bonus when it is won and transferred.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the ART transfer has already been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S746. On the other hand, when it is determined that the ART transfer win has not been completed (NO), it is subsequently determined whether or not the additional zone win has been completed (S744). That is, the main CPU 93 is in the bonus when the addition zone is in progress or when the transition is made from the preparation for the addition zone, is in the bonus when the BB is elected and transitions in the special zone, or normally the BB is It is determined whether or not it is in a bonus when the winning BB winning lock is executed and the game is transferred.

When determining that the additional zone has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S746. On the other hand, if it is determined that the additional zone has not been won (NO), the ART transition win is set (S745). That is, the main CPU 93 performs processing for shifting to the ART state after the bonus preparation is completed and the ART preparation is completed. When this process ends, the process moves to step S746.

Next, the main CPU 93 updates the number of ART management information stocks according to the winning content (S746), and ends the bonus processing. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of stocking (adding) the winning ART management information.

Thus, in the present embodiment, in the BB gaming state, the RB1 gaming state and the RB2 gaming state, when JACIN1 and JACIN2 are not carried over, it is possible to determine JACIN1 or JACIN2 as an internal winning combination. , In the RB2 gaming state, when the internal winning is given to a predetermined winning combination (for example, “7 matching Lip A” and “7 matching Lip B”) that is determined as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than in the RB1 gaming status, It is configured so that the grant is decided. Therefore, since it is possible to expect a transition to the RB2 game state in which the probability of a predetermined winning combination being determined is high in any of the game states of the BB game state, the expectation regarding the grant during the ART is further enhanced during the bonus. Can be increased.

In addition, in the present embodiment, as will be described later, when JACIN2 is determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that a specific effect is executed to increase the degree of expectation regarding the grant during ART. Even if is decided as an internal winning combination, if the BB game state ends without shifting to the RB2 game state, a specific effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused due to the increased feeling of expectation regarding the transition during the ART during the bonus.

In addition, in the present embodiment, it is possible to adopt a privilege other than the grant in ART as a privilege to be given when the predetermined combination (for example, “7-series rep A” and “7-series rep B”) is internally won. It is possible. For example, when the player is internally elected for a predetermined combination, the player can download a special image or a special song by capturing an image with the image capturing function (camera) of the mobile terminal owned by the player. The privilege of displaying the following two-dimensional code on the liquid crystal display device 11 may be given. In addition, for example, when the internal combination is won for the predetermined winning combination, a special image may be displayed or a special song may be output on the pachi-slot machine 1. That is, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to further increase the sense of expectation regarding the granting of another privilege during the bonus.

<Normal processing>
80 and 81 are flowcharts showing the normal processing executed in step S76 of the game start ART-related processing shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 sets "0" in the instruction information transmission state flag (S760). That is, the main CPU 93 normally controls so that the procedure of the stop operation advantageous to the player is not notified. When this process ends, the process moves to step S761.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is a normal start time (S761). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the first game that has shifted from the other effect state to normal. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is a normal start time (YES), it subsequently determines whether it is a transition time from the ART state or the bonus state (S762). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is time to shift to normal due to the end of ART or the end of BB. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is during the transition from the ART state or the bonus state (YES), the ceiling game number is set to "1198" (S763). The ceiling game number is usually a counter for counting the number of games played during a period in which neither the ART nor the bonus is transitioned.

In the process of step S761, the main CPU 93 determines that it is not a normal start time (NO), in the process of step S762, when it is determined that it is not the time of transition from during ART or during bonus (NO), or step When the process of S763 is completed, it is determined whether or not the BB has been won (S764). That is, the main CPU 93 normally determines whether or not it is "between BB flags" in the game up to the previous time. When determining that the BB has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the normal process. On the other hand, when determining that the BB has not been won (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the player has won the BB in the current game (S765).

When determining that the BB has been won in this game (YES), the main CPU 93 refers to the BB winning lock lottery table (see FIG. 35) and draws the BB winning lock by lot based on the internal winning combination. Then, as a result of the lottery, it is determined whether or not the BB winning lock has been won (S767). When the main CPU 93 determines that the BB winning lock has been won (YES), it sets the additional zone winning (S768), adds "ART management information 4" to the ART management information stock number (S769), Normal processing ends. That is, when the BB winning lock is executed, the main CPU 93 performs processing for shifting from the normal to the additional zone after the bonus, the additional zone preparation, and the most advantageous ART for the player. “ART management information 4” which is management information is added.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the lock has not been won at the time of winning the BB (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the win is a duplicate win with red, blue and green (S770). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning number “45” or “46” (see FIG. 19) has been determined in the normal gaming state (RT0 to RT3). When the main CPU 93 determines that the winning combination is red, blue, and green (YES), the main CPU 93 sets the ART transfer winning (S771) and adds "ART management information 4" to the number of ART management information stock (S772). , Normal processing ends. That is, even if the lock is not executed at the time of winning the BB, when the BB wins redundantly with red-blue-green (“one red-blue-green”), normally, during bonus, during preparation for ART. After that, a process for shifting to ART is performed and "ART management information 4" which is the most advantageous ART management information for the player is added.

When determining in the process of step S765 that the BB has not been won in the current game (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the ART has been won (S773). That is, the main CPU 93 normally determines whether or not the player has already won the ART transition. When the main CPU 93 determines that the ART transfer has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S778. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the ART has not been won (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ shift has been won (S774). That is, the main CPU 93 normally determines whether or not the player has already won the CZ transition.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ shift has been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S778. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ shift has not been won (NO), the ceiling game count is decremented by "1" (S775). That is, in this embodiment, even if it is normal, the number of ceiling games is not subtracted when the player has won the ART transition or the CZ transition. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of ceiling games is "0" (S776). When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of ceiling games is not “0” (NO), it moves the process to step S778. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the number of ceiling games is "0" (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ transition content lottery process when the ceiling is reached (S777), and moves the process to step S786.

In the ceiling arrival CZ transition content lottery process of step S777, the main CPU 93 determines the ART transition with a probability of 128/128, for example. In addition, for example, the ART transition may be determined with a probability of 64/128, and the CZ management information 7 may be determined with a probability of 64/128.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the CZ/ART transfer lottery table (see FIG. 36) and randomly selects the CZ/ART transfer based on the internal winning combination (S778). That is, the main CPU 93 determines by lottery whether or not the CZ management information is won or promoted, or whether or not it is transferred to ART. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ/ART transition has been won (S779). If the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the CZ/ART transition (YES), it moves the process to step S780, and if it determines that it has not won the CZ/ART transition (NO), the process proceeds to step S787. Transfer processing.

Next, the main CPU 93 refers to the transition content lottery table (see FIG. 37) at the time of CZ/ART transition winning, determines the content of the transition based on the internal winning combination (S780), and as a result of the determination, shifts to ART. It is determined whether or not it is won (S781). When the main CPU 93 determines that it has won the ART transition (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S785. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not won the ART transition (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the CZ transition has already been won (S782). That is, the main CPU 93 normally determines whether or not the player has won the CZ shift, when the player has normally won the CZ shift. When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ migration has already been won (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ management information update process (S783), and moves the process to step S785. In this CZ management information update process, the same process as the process of step S541 of FIG. 68 is performed, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ migration win has not been completed (NO), the main CPU 93 executes the CZ management information setting process (S784), and moves the process to step S785. In this CZ management information setting process, the same process as the process of step S605 of FIG. 71 is performed, and therefore the description thereof is omitted here.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the CZ/ART transition has been won (S785). When the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ/ART transfer has already been won (YES), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S787. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the CZ/ART transition win has not been completed (NO), it refers to the CZ/ART transition win precursor game number lottery table (see FIG. 38), and based on the transition content, The number of predictive games is determined and the number of predictive games is set according to the determination result (S786). That is, in the present embodiment, when the CZ shift or the ART shift is won, the CZ shift or the ART shift is already won. If the number of predictive games is set based on this, the number of predictive games is not reset. When this process ends, the process moves to step S787.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the number of precursor games is “1” or more (S787). When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of precursor games is not “1” or more (NO), the normal processing ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of precursor games is “1” or more (YES), the number of precursor games is subtracted by “1” (S788), and subsequently, whether the number of precursor games is “0” or not. Is determined (S789). When the main CPU 93 determines that the number of precursor games is “0” (YES), it clears normal, sets CZ during normal or ART in preparation (S790), and ends normal processing. That is, the main CPU 93 normally wins the CZ shift or the ART shift, and shifts to the normal CZ or shifts to the ART after preparing for the ART based on the fact that the number of precursor games has been exhausted. Perform processing. On the other hand, when determining that the number of precursor games is not “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the normal process.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when it is determined that the normal CZ in which the ART management information for managing the ART can be added is determined, the normal CZ is further added in the precursory state. When it is determined whether or not to add the medium CZ in the normal state, the medium CZ in the normal state is more advantageous.

Specifically, with respect to the CZ management information for managing the normal CZ, by combining the attribute of the CZ management information determined before the transition to the precursory state and the attribute of the CZ management information determined in the precursory state. , And is configured to update to more advantageous CZ management information.

Therefore, when the player shifts to the normal CZ in which the ART advantageous to the player can be given, it is possible to improve the interest of the precursory state. Note that this is also the case when it is decided during the ART that the CZ during the ART is given.

<Game start lock execution process>
FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the game start time lock execution processing executed in step S18 of the main control processing shown in FIG. 63.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is a lock at the time of winning the BB (S800). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not to execute the BB winning lock in the above-described normal process (see FIGS. 80 and 81). When the main CPU 93 determines that there is a lock during BB winning (YES), it sets “61440” in the lock timer (S801), and ends the game start time lock execution process. The lock execution time is obtained by multiplying the value set as the lock timer by the time (for example, 1.1172 ms) for generating the interrupt process (see FIG. 87). On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that there is no lock at the time of winning the BB (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S802.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is an additional zone transition game (S802). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of the game which has moved from the other effect state into the additional zone. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the additional zone shift game (YES), it sets “10240” in the lock timer (S803), and ends the game start time lock execution process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the additional zone shift game (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S804.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game has a CZ counter of "4" (S804). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether it is the start time of the game that has transitioned to the CZ execution state during the CZ during ART or the CZ during normal operation. When the main CPU 93 determines that the game has the CZ counter set to "4" (YES), it sets "3328" to the lock timer (S805), and ends the game start-time lock execution process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not a game in which the CZ counter is "4" (NO), the process proceeds to step S806.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a special zone transition game (S806). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is the start time of the game which has shifted from the normal state to the special zone. When the main CPU 93 determines that it is a special zone transition game (YES), it sets “3840” in the lock timer (S807), and ends the game start time lock execution process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not the special zone transition game (NO), the process proceeds to step S808.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is ART management information promotion (S808). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it has been decided to promote the ART management information in the ART management information setting process (see FIG. 74) described above. When the main CPU 93 determines that there is ART management information promotion (YES), it sets “10240” in the lock timer (S809) and ends the game start time lock execution processing. On the other hand, when determining that there is no ART management information promotion (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S810.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes other game start time lock execution processing (S810), and ends the game start time lock execution processing. In this process, for example, one or more locks executed in the after-game lock execution process described later may be executed in this process, or a specific internal winning combination (for example, described above). When the internal winning of “Special Double”) is performed, the lock execution lottery is performed, and when it is decided to execute the lock as a result of the lottery, a predetermined lock (for example, the value of the lock timer “2048”) is It may be executed.

<Bonus end check process>
FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the bonus end check process executed in step S25 of the main control process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether the current gaming state is the BB gaming state or the MB gaming state (S150). That is, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to any one of bits 5 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 1, bits 0 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 2, and bit 0 and bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 3. ," is set. When determining that the current game state is not the BB game state or the MB game state (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus end check process.

On the other hand, when determining that the current game state is the BB game state or the MB game state (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the value of the bonus end number counter based on the value of the payout number counter (S151). .. Specifically, the number of medals paid out in this game is subtracted from the bonus end number counter. Subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the value of the bonus end number counter is less than "0" (S152). That is, it is determined whether or not the update result (subtraction result) by the process of step S151 is less than “0”. When determining that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S155.

When determining in the process of step S152 that the value of the bonus end number counter is less than “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 executes a BB/MB end process (S153). In this process, the main CPU 93 clears the bits 1 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 2 and the bits 0 and 1 of the game state flag storage area 3 to "0" at the end of the BB game state, and plays the game. "1" is set to bit 0 of the status flag storage area 1. Also, if the MB gaming state is over, of the bits 5 to 7 of the gaming state flag storage area 1 and the bit 0 of the gaming state flag storage area 2, the bit in which "1" is set is cleared to "0". Then, among the bits 0 to 3 of the game state flag storage area 1, the corresponding RT game state bit is set to "1". When this process ends, the process moves to step S154.

Next, the main CPU 93 generates bonus end command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and stores the generated bonus end command data in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S154). , The bonus end check process ends. The bonus end command data is data for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the end of the BB game state or the MB game state.

When determining in the process of step S152 that the value of the bonus end number counter is not less than 0 (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current gaming state is RB1 or RB2. (S155). That is, the main CPU 91 determines whether or not "1" is set in any one of bits 4 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 2 and bits 0 and 1 of the game state storage area 3. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current game state is RB1 or RB2 (YES), if a small winning combination has been won in the unit game (that is, if a medal has been paid out), RB1 Or, if the winning number counter that counts the number of winnings of the small win in RB2 and the game number counter that counts the number of playing games in RB1 or RB2 are decremented by one, and the small win is not winning in the unit game (that is, , If no medals have been paid out, the game number counter is decremented by 1 (S156). When this process ends, the process moves to step S157.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the winning number counter or the game number counter is "0" (S157). When the main CPU 93 determines that neither the prize number counter nor the game number counter is “0” (NO), the bonus end check process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the prize number counter or the game number counter is “0” (YES), it executes the RB1 and RB2 end time process (S158), and ends the bonus end check process. In this process, the main CPU 93 clears "0" when bit 4 or bit 7 of the game state flag storage area 2 is set, and sets bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 2 Set "1" to. Also, if "1" is set in bit 5 of the game status flag storage area 2 or bit 0 of the game status flag storage area 3, it is cleared to "0" and the bit of the game status flag storage area 2 is cleared. Set “1” to 2. Also, if "1" is set in bit 6 of the game state flag storage area 2 or bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 3, it is cleared to "0" and the bit in the game state flag storage area 2 is cleared. Set “1” to 3.

<Bonus activation check process>
FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the bonus operation check process executed in step S26 of the main control process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (S170). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any one of bits 5 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 1 and bit 0 of the game state flag storage area 2. When determining that the current gaming state is the MB gaming state (YES), the main CPU 93 ends the bonus operation check process.

On the other hand, when determining that the current game state is not the MB game state (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether the current game state is the BB game state (S171). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any one of bits 1 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 2 and bits 0 and 1 of the game state flag storage area 3. When determining that the current gaming state is not the BB gaming state (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S176.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S171 that the current gaming state is the BB gaming state (YES), it subsequently determines whether the current gaming state is RB1 or RB2. (S172). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not "1" is set in any one of bits 4 to 7 of the game state flag storage area 2 and bits 0 and 1 of the game state flag storage area 3. When the main CPU 93 determines that the current game state is RB1 or RB2 (YES), the bonus operation check process ends.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S172 that the current game state is not in RB1 or RB2 (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not JACIN1 or JACIN2 is established (S173). When determining that JACIN1 or JACIN2 is not established (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S176.

When determining that JACIN1 or JACIN2 is established in the process of step S173 (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the RB1 and RB2 operation time process (S174). In this process, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to bit 4 or bit 7 of the game state flag storage area 2 and clears "0" to bit 2 or bit 6 of the game state flag storage area 2. Also, the winning number counter is set to "8" and the game number counter is set to "12". Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value in the carryover combination storing area (S175), and ends the bonus operation check process. That is, the main CPU 93 clears bits 4 to 7 of the internal carryover combination storing area 1, bits 0 and 1 of the internal carryover combination storing area 2, or bits 2 to 4 of the internal carryover combination storing area 2 to “0”.

In the process of step S171, the main CPU 93 determines that the current game state is not the BB game state (NO), or in the process of step S173, determines that JACIN1 or JACIN2 is not established (NO). Then, it is determined whether or not BB, MB1 or MB2 is established (S176). When determining that BB, MB1 or MB2 is not established (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S180.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the processing of step S176 that BB, MB1 or MB2 is established (YES), the main CPU 93 executes the BB/MB operation time processing (S177). In this process, if the BB is established, the main CPU 93 sets "1" to bit 1 of the game state flag storage area 2 and sets another game state flag (for example, bit 4 of the game state flag storage area 1). ) Is cleared to “0” and the bonus end number counter is set to “349”. If MB1 or MB2 is established, of the bits 0 to 3 in the game state flag storage area 1, the bit in which "1" is set is cleared to "0", and the bit in the game state flag storage area 1 is cleared. Of bits 0 to 5 and 7 of the game state flag storage area 2, the corresponding RT game state bit is set to "1" and the bonus end number counter is set to "10". When this process ends, the process moves to step S178.

Next, the main CPU 93 clears the value of the carryover combination storing area corresponding to the established bonus combination (S178), generates the bonus start command data to be transmitted from the main control circuit 91 to the sub control circuit 101, and generates the generated bonus. The start command data is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95 (S179), and the bonus operation check process ends. The bonus start command data is, for example, data for allowing the sub CPU 102 to recognize information such as the start of the BB gaming state or the MB gaming state.

When determining that none of JACIN1, JACIN2, BB, MB1 or MB2 is established in the process of step S173 or step S176 (NO), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the replay is established ( S180). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not any replay combination has been established. When determining that the replay has been established (YES), the main CPU 93 performs an automatic insertion request (that is, a request process for activating a regame in the next unit game) (S181), and ends the bonus action check process. .. Also, when it is determined that the replay is not established (NO), the bonus operation check process is ended.

<ART related processing at the end of the game>
FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing a game end ART related process executed in step S27 of the main control process shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is BB end time (S820). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB game state (during bonus) is the end game. When the main CPU 93 determines that the BB is over (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the player has returned to the additional zone or has been elected (S821). That is, whether the main CPU 93 is at the end of the bonus when the addition zone is in progress or when the transition is made from the preparation of the addition zone, or at the end of the bonus when the BB is elected and transitioned in the special zone, Alternatively, it is determined whether or not it is the end time of the bonus when the BB is normally won and the lock at the time of winning the BB is executed to shift. When the main CPU 93 determines that the player has returned to the additional zone or has won the game (YES), it clears the bonus, sets the additional zone in preparation (S822), and ends the game-related ART-related processing. That is, the main CPU 93 performs processing for shifting from the bonus state to the additional zone after the additional zone is being prepared.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it has not returned to the additional zone or won (NO), subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether it has returned to ART or has been won (S823). That is, the main CPU 93 is at the end of the bonus when winning the ART transition during the bonus, or during the bonus when the transition from the normal CZ, the ART preparation, the ART state, or the ART CZ state is completed. It is determined whether it is time or the end of the bonus when the BB (red, blue, green and green) is elected and transferred normally. When the main CPU 93 determines that it has returned to ART or has been won (YES), it clears the bonus, sets ART ready (S824), and finishes the ART-related processing at the end of the game. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of shifting from the bonus state to the ART state after the ART preparation period.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game has not been returned to the ART or has not been won (NO), the inside of the bonus is cleared, the normal is set (S825), and the ART related process at the end of the game is ended. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of shifting from being in bonus to normal.

When the main CPU 93 determines in the process of step S820 that it is not the time to end the BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether it is the time to start the BB (S826). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB game state (during bonus) is the game to be started (game where BB is established). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the time to start the BB (YES), it sets the bonus in progress (S827), and ends the game-related ART related processing. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process of shifting from the other effect state to the bonus state.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time to start the BB (NO), it subsequently determines whether it is the time to start the MB (S828). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the MB game state is a game to be started (a game in which MB1 or MB2 has been established). When determining that the MB is started (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether the effect state is "normal" and the RT game state is "RT3" (S829). That is, the main CPU 93 normally does not notify the procedure of the stop operation that is advantageous to the player, but determines whether MB1 or MB2 is established when in the general game state (RT3). .. When the main CPU 93 determines that the effect state is "normal" and the RT game state is "RT3" (YES), it clears normal and sets the special zone inside (S830), and the game is played. At the end, the ART related processing is ended. That is, the main CPU 93 performs processing for shifting from normal to the special zone. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the effect state is “normal” and the RT game state is not “RT3” (NO), the game end ART related process is ended.

When determining in step S828 that the MB is not started (NO), the main CPU 93 subsequently determines whether or not the current effect state is a CZ medium-high probability chance (S831). When the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is not the CZ medium-high probability chance (NO), the game end ART related process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the current effect state is the CZ medium/high probability chance, subsequently, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the "8 winning combination 2" is won (S832). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols of “8 winning combinations 2” is displayed on the activated line.

When the main CPU 93 determines that the player has won the “8-sheet winning combination 2” (YES), it clears the CZ medium-high accuracy chance, sets the CZ medium-high accuracy zone (S833), and sets the initial value to the high-accuracy zone counter. "0" is set as (S834), and the ART related process at the end of the game is ended. That is, the main CPU 93 performs the process of shifting to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone when the CZ middle-high accuracy chance has succeeded during the normal CZ or the ART CZ.

On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the "8 coin combination 2" has not been won (NO), the CZ medium-high probability chance is cleared (S835), and the game end ART related process is ended. That is, the main CPU 93 performs a process in which the CZ middle-high accuracy chance fails and the CZ middle-high accuracy zone is not moved during the normal CZ or the ART CZ.

<Lock execution process at the end of game>
FIG. 86 is a flow chart showing the game end lock execution processing executed in step S28 of the main control processing shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is BB end time (S850). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB game state (during bonus) is the end game. When the main CPU 93 determines that the time is BB end time (YES), the lock timer is set to “6144” (S851), and the game end time lock execution process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time of ending the BB (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S852.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is BB start time (S852). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the BB game state (during bonus) is the game to be started (game where BB is established). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is the time to start the BB (YES), the lock timer is set to “9216” (S853), and the game end time lock execution process is ended. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that it is not the time to start BB (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S854.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether the game is a special addition execution game (S854). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game is a game in which the special addition described above is executed in the normal CZ or the ART CZ. When determining that the game is the special addition execution game (YES), the main CPU 93 sets “6656” to the lock timer (S855), and ends the game end lock execution process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not the special addition execution game (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S856.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is a JACIN2 establishment game (S856). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game is one in which JACIN2 is established during the bonus. When the main CPU 93 determines that the game is JACIN2 established (YES), the lock timer is set to “2048” (S857), and the game end lock execution process is ended. On the other hand, if the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not a JACIN2 established game (NO), the process proceeds to step S858.

Next, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not it is an ART end game (S858). That is, the main CPU 93 determines whether or not the game is a game that shifts from the ART state to the normal state (a game in which the ART is finished). When the main CPU 93 determines that it is an ART ending game (YES), it sets “6144” to the lock timer (S859), and ends the game end lock execution process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the game is not the ART ending game (NO), the main CPU 93 shifts the processing to step S860.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes other game end time lock execution processing (S860), and ends the game end time lock execution processing. In this process, for example, one or a plurality of locks executed in the above-mentioned game start lock execution process may be executed in this process, or a specific internal winning combination (for example, described above). "Special double") is internally won, and a specific symbol combination (for example, a combination of symbols including at least one of "red special" symbol, "blue special" symbol and "green special" symbol) is displayed. If the lock execution lottery is performed, and the lock is determined to be executed as a result of the lottery, a predetermined lock (for example, the lock timer value “2048”) is executed. Good.

<Interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU>
FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93. This process is periodically executed every 1.1172 ms.

First, the main CPU 93 saves the register (S320). Next, the main CPU 93 executes an input port check process described later in the description of FIG. 88 (S321). In this input port check processing, for example, the presence or absence (change of ON/OFF) of signals of various switches and sensors connected to the main CPU 93 is confirmed. Specifically, the main CPU 93 stores information about ON/OFF of various switches such as a start switch 79 and a stop switch (not shown) and ON/OFF information of various sensors such as a medal sensor (not shown) in the main RAM 95. Store.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a timer update process (S322). In this timer updating process, for example, when the value of the wait timer that controls the wait time or the lock timer that controls the lock execution time is 1 or more, the value of the timer is subtracted by "1" for each interrupt. The process is executed. Next, the main CPU 93 executes a communication data transmission process described later in the description of FIG. 89 (S323).

Next, the main CPU 93 executes reel control processing (S324). In this reel control process, for example, an acceleration process for accelerating the rotation of each reel is executed by driving and controlling each stepping motor based on the rotation start request of each reel in the reel rotation start process (S20 of FIG. 63). Then, based on the fact that each reel has reached a predetermined speed (for example, 80 rotations/minute), the constant speed processing for maintaining the predetermined speed is executed by driving and controlling each stepping motor, Based on the rotation stop request for each reel in the stop control processing (S21 of FIG. 63), the stop processing for stopping the rotation of each reel is executed by controlling the drive of each stepping motor.

Next, the main CPU 93 executes a lamp/7SEG drive process (S325). In the lamp/7SEG driving process, the 7-segment display 24 and the LED 82 are driven and controlled to display the number of credited medals, the number of payouts, and the like. Further, for example, when the instruction information transmission state flag is “1” or “2”, processing for displaying information regarding the stop operation sequence is executed. Specifically, the process for displaying the value stored in the “stop operation sequence” in the effect control information storage area (see FIG. 34) on the 7-segment display 24 is executed.

The manner in which the "stop operation sequence" is displayed on the 7-segment display unit 24 is not limited to the above. For example, when “0” is stored in the “stop operation order”, no information is displayed on the 7-segment display 24, and when “1” is stored in the “stop operation order”. Displays “123” on the 7-segment display 24, and displays “132” on the 7-segment display 24 when “2” is stored in the “stop operation sequence” and displays “stop operation sequence”. If “3” is stored in “”, the display is “213” on the 7-segment display 24, and if “4” is stored in “Stop operation order”, the 7-segment display 24 is displayed. When "231" is displayed on the display and "5" is stored on the "stop operation sequence", "312" is displayed on the 7-segment display 24 and "6" is stored on the "stop operation sequence". When it is displayed, "321" is displayed on the 7-segment display 24, and when "7" is stored in the "stop operation sequence", "1--" is displayed on the 7-segment display 24. When “8” is stored in the “stop operation sequence”, “−1−” is displayed on the 7-segment display 24, and “9” is stored in the “stop operation sequence”. May be displayed on the 7-segment display 24 as “−1”.

Next, the main CPU 93 restores the register (S326) and finishes the interrupt processing that occurs periodically.

<Input port check processing>
88 is a flowchart showing the input port check processing executed in step S321 of the interrupt processing under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 checks the state of each input port (S330). Next, the main CPU 93 stores the previous interrupt, that is, the state of the input port one interrupt before in the main RAM 95 (S331), and stores the current state of the input port in the main RAM 95 (S332).

In this way, by comparing the state of the input port one interrupt before and the state of the current input port, the main CPU 93 can confirm the state of both input ports. It is checked whether or not the state has changed, for example, whether or not the BET button 22, the start lever 23 or the like has been operated.

Next, the main CPU 93 stores the on-edge state in the main RAM 95 (S333), and ends the input port check processing. For example, when the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 79 is data indicating OFF before one interrupt but is data indicating ON at present, the main CPU 93 shifts to ON edge. Is stored in the main RAM 95, and the input data of the input port assigned to the start switch 79 is data indicating ON before one interrupt, but is currently data indicating OFF. If so, the off-edge information indicating the transition to the off-edge is stored in the main RAM 95.

<Communication data transmission process>
89 is a flowchart showing the communication data transmission process executed in step S323 of the interrupt process under the control of the main CPU 93 shown in FIG.

First, the main CPU 93 subtracts "1" from the communication data transmission timer (S340), and determines whether the communication data transmission timer is "0" (S341).

When determining that the communication data transmission timer is not “0” (NO), the main CPU 93 ends the communication data transmission process. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the communication data transmission timer is “0” (YES), the main CPU 93 determines whether or not there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (S342).

When determining that there is no untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (NO), the main CPU 93 generates no-operation command data, and the generated no-operation command data is stored in the communication data storage area assigned to the main RAM 95. It is stored (S343).

The non-operation command data is set with parameters such as on-edge and off-edge information of various switches and on/off information of various sensors stored in the above-described input port check processing. As a result, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized action against command transmission by preventing an interrupt process in which a command is not transmitted, and to make the sub CPU 102 recognize these pieces of information, so that the operation during the period when the operation is originally invalid is performed. The effect can be changed based on the operation (for example, the operation on the BET button 22 while the reel is rotating).

In the process of step S342, the main CPU 93 determines that there is untransmitted data in the communication data storage area (YES), or after executing the process of step S343, sets the communication data transmission timer to the initial value (for example, 14). Is set (S344).

Next, the main CPU 93 transmits the communication data stored in the communication data storage area to the sub control circuit 101 (S345), and determines whether or not the transmission of the communication data is completed (S346).

When determining that the transmission of the communication data is not completed (NO), the main CPU 93 returns to the process of step S345. On the other hand, when the main CPU 93 determines that the transmission of the communication data is completed (YES), the main CPU 93 updates the communication data storage area to clear it (S347) and ends the communication data transmission process.

[Sub-control processing]
Next, various processing executed by the sub CPU 102 of the sub control circuit 101 will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 to 93.

<Power-on process>
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a power-on process of the sub CPU 102 when the power is turned on.

First, the sub CPU 102 executes an initialization process (S360). In this initialization processing, the sub CPU 102 checks the sub RAM 103 and the like for errors and initializes the task system. The task system includes a lamp control task and a sound control task that are task groups for timer interrupt synchronization, a mother task (see FIG. 91) that is a task group for VSYNC (Vertical Synchronization) interrupt synchronization, and a task group for command reception interrupt synchronization. Main board communication task (see FIG. 92) and the like.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the lamp control task (S361). In this lamp control task, the sub CPU 102 waits for reception of a timer interrupt event message transmitted to the sub CPU 102 every 2 milliseconds, and various lamps are received in response to the timer interrupt event message. The lighting state of (for example, the LED 85) is controlled.

Next, the sub CPU 102 activates a sound control task (S362). In this sound control task, similarly to the lamp control task, the sound output states of various speakers (for example, the speakers 42, 58, 64, 65L, 65R) are controlled. Next, the sub CPU 102 activates the mother task shown in FIG. 91 (S363) and ends the power-on process.

<Mother task>
FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing the mother task activated in step S363 of the power-on processing shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 activates the main task (S370). Next, the main board communication task shown in FIG. 92 is activated (S371). Next, the animation task is activated (S372) and the mother task is ended. In this anime task, the display state of the liquid crystal display device 11 is controlled according to changes in game information and operation by the player.

<Main board communication task>
FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the main board communication task started in step S371 of the mother task shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 checks the received command (S380) and extracts the type of the received command (S381).

Next, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not a command different from the previous one is received (S382). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the command different from the previous command is not received (NO), the process returns to the process of step S380.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines that a command different from the previous command is received (YES), it determines that the received command is a legitimate command and executes the command reception process shown in FIG. 93 ( S383). Next, the sub CPU 102 registers animation data (that is, data for executing an effect (notification) by image display) based on the effect data selected in the command reception process shown in FIG. 93 (S384). The lamp/sound data (that is, data for executing the effect (notification) according to the light emission mode/sound output mode) is registered (S385), and the process returns to step S380.

<Process when command is received>
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the command reception process executed in step S383 of the main board communication task shown in FIG.

First, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not an effect state command has been received (S400). When the sub CPU 102 determines that the effect state command has been received (YES), it acquires the effect control information included in the effect state command (S401), checks the change from the previous effect control information, and changes it. The corresponding effect data is set (S402), and the command receiving process is ended.

For example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from another effect state to normal, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for performing an effect on the effect stage corresponding to the effect state “normal”. The effect stage indicates that one or more of the background image, the character, and other displays are displayed according to the effect state.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the bonus state, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for performing an effect on the effect stage corresponding to the effect state “during bonus”. During the bonus, when the game state shifts to the "BB game state (RB2)", effect data for effecting at a specific effect stage is set. In this way, it is notified that the degree of expectation of ART transfer or addition of ART management information is high. In addition, in the bonus, when JACIN2 is internally won, when the start command described later is received, the effect data for performing a specific effect suggesting that JACIN2 is internally won is set. In this way, it is notified that the degree of expectation of ART transfer and addition of ART management information is high. However, if the internal winning of JACIN2 is achieved in the bonus game state "BB game state (RB1)" or "BB game state (RB2)", the ending condition of the BB game state is satisfied in the RB game state ( That is, in the case where the BB gaming state (JACIN2 internal winning) does not shift to after the BB gaming state (RB1) or the BB gaming state (RB2) ends, the effect data for performing the above-described specific effect is not set.

In addition, in the bonus, it is decided to shift to the additional zone after the bonus is finished, when it is decided to shift to the ART after the bonus is finished, and after the bonus is finished. The production stage may be different from when the transition to the additional zone or the ART is not decided.

In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the normal CZ state or the ART CZ state, the sub CPU 102 is in the effect stage corresponding to the effect state “normal CZ” or “ART CZ”. Set the performance data for performing the performance. In this case, the effect data for performing the effect on the effect stage according to the current CZ management information is set. Specifically, if the current CZ management information is "CZ management information 1", the performance data for performing the performance in the performance stage "red character chance zone" is set, and the current CZ management information is "CZ management." If it is "information 2", the performance data for performing the performance in the performance stage "blue character chance zone" is set. If the current CZ management information is "CZ management information 3", the performance stage "green character chance zone" is set. If the current CZ management information is "CZ management information 4", the performance data for performing in the performance stage "red-blue character chance zone" is set, If the current CZ management information is "CZ management information 5", the performance data for performing the performance in the performance stage "red-green character chance zone" is set, and the current CZ management information is "CZ management information 6". If so, the production data for performing the production in the production stage "blue-green character chance zone" is set, and if the current CZ management information is "CZ management information 7", the production stage "red-blue-green character chance zone". The effect data for effecting is set.

In addition, in the normal CZ or CZ during ART, if the CZ middle and high probability chance shifts, that effect and "8-card combination 2" should be awarded (that is, the pressing order of the second stop operation is correct). If it is a special addition execution game, the effect data indicating that it will move to the CZ medium-high accuracy zone is set, and if the effect data indicating that effect is set, and if the CZ management information has been promoted. , When the production data indicating that the production is to be performed on the stage after promotion is set, and when the player shifts to the CZ middle-high accuracy zone, the production is performed on the production stage according to the production state "CZ middle-high accuracy zone". Production data of.

Further, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the special zone, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for performing an effect on the effect stage corresponding to the effect state “during special zone”. Further, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the state of preparing for ART, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for performing an effect on the effect stage corresponding to the effect state “in preparation of ART”. In addition, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the ART state, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for performing an effect on the effect stage corresponding to the effect state “during ART”. Further, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the additional zone preparation stage, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for performing the effect on the effect stage according to the effect state “addition zone preparation”. Further, for example, when the sub CPU 102 shifts from the other effect state to the additional zone, the sub CPU 102 sets effect data for performing an effect on the effect stage according to the effect state “in the additional zone”.

On the other hand, when determining that the effect state command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether a start command has been received (S403). When determining that the start command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 subsequently determines whether or not the stop operation order is other than "0" (S404). That is, the sub CPU 102 determines whether or not any of "1" to "9" is stored in the "stop operation sequence" in the effect control information acquired when the effect state command is received.

In the process of step S404, when the sub CPU 102 determines that the stop operation sequence is other than “0” (YES), it sets the stop operation procedure notification effect data according to the acquired stop operation sequence. (S405), the process proceeds to step S406. Since the effect control information is already acquired when the effect state command is received, the stop operation procedure notification effect data may be set when the effect state command is received. Further, in the present embodiment, the timing at which the procedure of the stop operation is notified based on the stop operation procedure notification effect data is any timing from the start operation by the player to the stop operation. be able to.

For example, the timing at which the "stop operation sequence" is displayed on the 7-segment display 24 under the control of the main CPU 93 and the timing at which the "stop operation sequence" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 under the control of the sub CPU 102 are synchronized. You may In this case, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable even if both parties notify the procedure of the stop operation. Further, for example, the timing at which the “stop operation sequence” is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 under the control of the sub CPU 102 is earlier than the timing at which the “stop operation sequence” is displayed on the 7-segment display 24 under the control of the main CPU 93. You may. In this case, since the notification by the liquid crystal display device 11 which is easily felt by the player is started first, the convenience of the player can be improved. Further, for example, the timing at which the "stop operation sequence" is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11 under the control of the sub CPU 102 is later than the timing at which the "stop operation sequence" is displayed on the 7-segment display 24 under the control of the main CPU 93. You may. In this case, by clarifying that the control relating to the advantageous state (for example, ART) is being performed by the main control circuit 91, it is possible to prevent the illegal action against the sub control circuit 101.

On the other hand, when the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S404 that the stop operation order is not other than “0” (that is, “0”) (NO), it is extracted by the sub CPU 102 and stored in the sub RAM 103. A sub-random number value (for example, an arbitrary random number value from 0 to 32767) is acquired, performance data is determined based on performance control information, an internal winning combination, etc., and performance data is set according to the determination result. Then, (S406), the command reception process ends.

When the sub CPU 102 determines in the process of step S403 that the start command has not been received (NO), it subsequently determines whether or not the winning operation command has been received (S407). When determining that the winning operation command has been received (YES), the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data according to the effect control information and the winning combination (S408), and ends the command reception process. For example, the sub CPU 102 sets the effect data for outputting the payout sound according to the number of payouts, or when the game state or the effect state shifts, sets the effect data indicating that effect.

Further, for example, when the "8-sheet winning combination 2" is established in the CZ medium high probability chance during the normal medium CZ or the ART CZ during the ART, the sub CPU 102 has succeeded in the CZ medium high probability chance. When the effect data indicating that the player is going to move into the CZ middle-high accuracy zone is set and "8-sheet winning combination 2" is not established, the CZ middle-high accuracy chance fails and the CZ middle-high accuracy zone is not moved. The effect data that indicates is set.

When determining in step S407 that the start command has not been received (NO), the sub CPU 102 executes other command reception time processing (S409) and ends the command reception time processing. In this process, for example, if the initialization command for which the command data was generated in the above-described power-on process (see step S10 in FIG. 63) is received, the effect stage is returned based on the presence/absence of setting change. , Or initialize the performance stage. Further, for example, when a medal insertion command for which command data has been generated in the medal acceptance/start check processing described above (see step S12 in FIG. 63) is received, a medal insertion sound is output based on whether or not a medal has been inserted. The effect data for displaying is set, or the effect data for displaying the background image according to the effect stage is set.

Further, for example, when a reel rotation start command for which command data has been generated in the above-described reel rotation start processing (see step S20 in FIG. 63) is received, effect data for outputting a reel rotation start sound is set. It Further, for example, when the reel stop command for which the command data is generated in the reel stop control process (see step S21 of FIG. 63) described above is received, the effect data for outputting the reel stop sound is set.

Further, for example, when the bonus start command for which the command data is generated in the bonus operation check process (see step S26 in FIG. 63) described above is received, the effect data for displaying the initial value of the bonus end number counter is displayed. Set. In addition, for example, when a bonus end command for which command data has been generated in the bonus end check processing (see step S25 of FIG. 63) described above is received, the game state and effect state to be transferred after the bonus end are suggested. Performance data is set. Further, for example, when a non-operation command for which command data is generated in the communication data transmission processing (see FIG. 89) described above is received, the effect content is changed based on the information transmitted as the non-operation command. Performance data is set. Specifically, when the effect data determined at the time of receiving the start command is effect data requesting continuous hitting of the BET button 22, whether the BET button 22 received as a no-operation command is in the on-edge state, The effect contents are changed based on the information on the off-edge state.

[Relationship between winning combination and CZ transition]
Next, the relationship between the winning combination and the CZ shift will be described with reference to FIGS. 94 to 99. 94 is a diagram showing an example of CZ migration (CZ management information 1), FIG. 95 is a diagram showing an example of CZ migration (CZ management information 2), and FIG. 96 is a CZ migration (CZ management information). FIG. 97 is a diagram showing an example of CZ migration (CZ management information 4), and FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of CZ migration (CZ management information 5). FIG. 99 is a diagram showing an example of CZ migration (CZ management information 6).

In the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination is red single (“red lip”) in the normal or ART, the CZ transition lottery is performed, and when the CZ transition is won, the CZ management information 1 is highly likely to occur. It is determined (see FIGS. 37 and 57). Then, during the normal CZ or the CZ during ART based on the CZ management information 1, the red CZ (red character chance zone) is controlled. Here, the internal winning combination "red lip" is to stop the "red special" symbol in the area facing the left reel 3L of the display window 4 according to the stop operation timing of the player ("special lip A1" It is possible to establish).

That is, as shown in FIG. 94, in the left reel 3L, when the "red special" symbol is stopped, it can be expected to shift to the red CZ (red character chance zone). In addition, when the character actually shifts to the red CZ (red character chance zone), a character based on red coloring (hereinafter referred to as “red character”) is displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 11. Below the liquid crystal display device 11, the degree of expectation (for example, one star) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination is a blue single (“blue rip”) during normal or ART, the CZ transition lottery is performed, and if the CZ transition is won, there is a high probability that the CZ management information is high. 2 is determined (see FIGS. 37 and 57). Then, during the normal CZ or the CZ during ART based on the CZ management information 2, the blue CZ (blue character chance zone) is controlled. Here, the internal winning combination "blue lip" stops the "blue special" symbol in the area facing the middle reel 3C of the display window 4 according to the stop operation timing of the player ("special lip B1" It is possible to establish).

That is, as shown in FIG. 95, in the middle reel 3C, when the "blue special" symbol is stopped, it can be expected to shift to the blue CZ (blue character chance zone). Further, when the color actually shifts to the blue CZ (blue character chance zone), a character based on blue coloring (hereinafter referred to as “blue character”) is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal display device 11. Below the liquid crystal display device 11, the degree of expectation (for example, two stars) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination is a green single (“green lip”) in the normal or ART, the CZ transition lottery is performed, and if the CZ transition is won, the CZ management information has a high probability. 3 is determined (see FIGS. 37 and 57). The normal CZ or the CZ during ART based on the CZ management information 3 is controlled to the green CZ (green character chance zone). Here, the internal winning combination "green lip" is to stop the "green special" symbol in the area facing the right reel 3R of the display window 4 according to the stop operation timing of the player ("special lip C1" It is possible to establish).

That is, as shown in FIG. 96, in the right reel 3R, when the "green special" symbol is stopped, it can be expected to shift to the green CZ (green character chance zone). In addition, when the character actually shifts to the green CZ (green character chance zone), a character whose basic color is green (hereinafter referred to as “green character”) is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 11. Below the liquid crystal display device 11, the degree of expectation (for example, three stars) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination is red-blue double (“red-blue rip”) in the normal or ART, the CZ transition lottery is performed, and when the CZ transition is won, another internal winning is performed. The CZ management information 4 is determined with a higher probability than in the case of a winning combination (see FIGS. 37 and 57). Then, during the normal CZ or the CZ during ART based on the CZ management information 4, the red/blue CZ (red/blue character chance zone) is controlled. Here, the internal winning combination "red-blue lip" is to stop the "red special" symbol in the area facing the left reel 3L of the display window 4 according to the stop operation timing of the player and the inside of the display window 4. It is possible to stop the "blue special" symbol in the area facing the reel 3C (establish the "special lip D1-1" or the "special lip D1-2").

That is, as shown in FIG. 97, in the left reel 3L, when the "red special" symbol stops and the middle reel 3C stops the "blue special" symbol, the red-blue CZ (red-blue character chance zone) Can be expected to move to. In addition, when the red-blue CZ (red-blue character chance zone) is actually entered, the red character is displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 11, the blue character is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the liquid crystal is displayed. Below the display device 11, the degree of expectation (for example, 4 stars) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed. It should be noted that these displays are also performed when the CZ management information is promoted in the CZ introduction state.

In the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination is red-green double (“red-green rip”) in normal or ART, a CZ transition lottery is performed, and when the CZ transition is won, another internal winning is performed. The CZ management information 5 is determined with a higher probability than in the case of a winning combination (see FIGS. 37 and 57). Then, during the normal CZ or the CZ during ART based on the CZ management information 5, the red/green CZ (red/green character chance zone) is controlled. Here, the internal winning combination "red-green lip" is to stop the "red special" symbol in the area facing the left reel 3L of the display window 4 and to the right of the display window 4 according to the stop operation timing of the player. It is possible to stop the "green special" symbol in the area facing the reel 3R (establish the "special lip E1").

That is, as shown in FIG. 98, in the left reel 3L, when the "red special" symbol is stopped and in the right reel 3R, when the "green special" symbol is stopped, the red-green CZ (red-green character chance zone) Can be expected to move to. Further, when the player actually shifts to the red-green CZ (red-green character chance zone), the red character is displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 11, the green character is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the liquid crystal is displayed. Below the display device 11, the degree of expectation (for example, 4 stars) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed. It should be noted that these displays are also performed when the CZ management information is promoted in the CZ introduction state.

Further, in the present embodiment, for example, when the internal winning combination is blue-green double (“blue-green rep A” or “blue-green rep B”) during normal or ART, the CZ transfer lottery is performed and the CZ transfer is performed. When the winning combination is won, the CZ management information 6 is determined with higher probability than in the case of other internal winning combinations (see FIGS. 37 and 57). The normal CZ or the ART CZ during the ART based on the CZ management information 6 is controlled to be a blue-green CZ (blue-green character chance zone). Here, the internal winning combination "blue green lip A" and "blue green lip B" stop the "blue special" symbol in the area facing the middle reel 3C of the display window 4 according to the stop operation timing of the player. It is possible to stop the "green special" symbol in the area facing the right reel 3R of the display window 4 (establish the "special lip F1" or "special lip F2").

That is, as shown in FIG. 99, in the middle reel 3C, when the "blue special" symbol stops and the right reel 3R stops the "green special" symbol, the blue green CZ (blue green character chance zone) Can be expected to move to. In addition, when the color is actually changed to the blue-green CZ (blue-green character chance zone), the blue character is displayed in the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, the green character is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the liquid crystal is displayed. Below the display device 11, the degree of expectation (for example, 4 stars) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed. It should be noted that these displays are also performed when the CZ management information is promoted in the CZ introduction state.

Although illustration is omitted, when the CZ management information 7 is determined, during normal CZ or CZ during ART, it is controlled to the red-blue-green CZ (red-blue-green character chance zone). In the red-blue-green CZ (red-blue-green character chance zone), the red character is displayed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 11, the blue character is displayed on the center of the liquid crystal display device 11, and the green character is displayed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 11. In addition to being displayed, the degree of expectation (for example, 5 stars) of ART transition (or successful addition) in the CZ is displayed below the liquid crystal display device 11. It should be noted that these displays are also performed when the CZ management information is promoted in the CZ introduction state.

Then, these displayed characters are also used when performing a battle effect in the CZ execution state. For example, in the case of shifting to the red CZ, the red character becomes the ally character to perform the battle effect, and in the case of shifting to the blue CZ, the blue character becomes the ally character to perform the battle effect, and the green CZ. In the case of shifting to, the green character becomes an ally character to perform the battle effect, and in the case of shifting to red-blue CZ, the red character and the blue character become ally characters to perform the battle effect, and red-green. When moving to CZ, a red character and a green character become ally characters for battle production, and when moving to blue-green CZ, a blue character and green character become ally characters for battle production. When the player shifts to the red-blue-green CZ, the red character, the blue character, and the green character become ally characters and a battle effect is performed.

In this embodiment, as the special symbols, a "red special" symbol, a "blue special" symbol, and a "green special" symbol are adopted, and correspondingly, "red lip" and "blue lip" are adopted. , "Green Lip", "Red-Blue Lip", "Red-Green Lip" and "Blue-Green Lip" are adopted, and "Red CZ", "Blue CZ", "Green CZ", "Red Blue CZ" are adopted. , “Red-green CZ”, “blue-green CZ”, and “red-blue-green CZ” are adopted, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, instead of a small role of "red, blue, and green", an internal winning combination of "red, blue, and green lip" that has the same combination of symbols is adopted, and if you internally win "red, blue, green, and lip". , "Red-blue-green CZ" may be provided with a higher probability. Further, as the special symbol, four or more types of symbols may be adopted, and the internal winning combination or the CZ may be configured to correspond thereto. Also, as special symbols, two types of symbols (for example, "red special" symbol and "green special" symbol) are adopted, and correspondingly, an internal winning combination (for example, "red lip", "green lip") And “red-green lip”) or CZ (for example, “red CZ”, “green CZ”, and “red-green CZ”).

As described above, in the present embodiment, a specific combination that is a lottery target combination that determines whether or not to add a normal medium CZ or an ART medium CZ to which ART management information for managing the ART can be added (for example, "Red Lip", "Blue Lip", "Green Lip", "Red Blue Lip", "Red Green Lip" and "Teal Green Lip"), if "Red Lip" is determined, The probability that "CZ" will be given is high, and if "blue lip" is determined, the probability that "blue CZ" will be given is high, and if "green lip" is decided, "green CZ" will be given. If the “red-blue lip” is determined, the probability that “red-blue CZ” is assigned is high, and if the “red-green lip” is determined, “red-green lip” is determined. The probability that “CZ” is given is high, and when “blue-green lip” is determined, the probability that “blue-green CZ” is given is high.

Also, if you win the "Red Lip" internally, the "Red Special" symbol is displayed. If you win the "Blue Lip" internally, the "Blue Special" symbol is displayed and the "Green Lip" symbol is internal. If you win, the "green special" symbol will be displayed, and if you win inside the "red-blue lip", the "red special" symbol and "blue special" symbol will be displayed, and inside the "red-green lip" If you win, the "red special" symbol and "green special" symbol are displayed, and if you internally win the "blue-green lip", the "blue special" symbol and "green special" symbol are displayed. It is configured to be possible.

Then, when two or more of the "red special" symbol, the "blue special" symbol, and the "green special" symbol are displayed and the state shifts to CZ during normal or CZ during ART, the "red special" symbol, One of the "blue special" symbol and the "green special" symbol is displayed, and the degree of expectation that the ART management information is given is higher than that in the case of shifting to CZ during normal or CZ during ART. There is. Therefore, the player can recognize which of the normal CZ or the ART CZ is likely to be given according to the displayed symbol, and the normal CZ or the ART CZ. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation that ART management information will be added when medium is added.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the display window 4, the column in which the "red special" symbol is displayed, the column in which the "blue special" symbol is displayed, and the column in which the "green special" symbol is displayed are different. Is configured. Therefore, the player can intuitively feel which of the normal CZ or the ART CZ is likely to be given according to the displayed symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, when shifting to the normal CZ or the ART CZ, the character corresponding to the symbol that can be displayed when the specific winning combination is won is displayed. Therefore, even when the special symbol cannot be displayed when the specific combination is won, the lottery target combination determined to be transferred to the normal CZ or the ART CZ is recognized. It is possible to recognize the expected degree in the CZ in the normal CZ or the CZ in ART that has been transferred.

[Pachislot machine screen display example]
Next, an example of screen display of the pachi-slot machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of a screen display during ART.

In the present embodiment, during the ART, for example, a display area 1101 for displaying a background image or a character image to perform an effect, and a stop operation procedure display for displaying a stop operation procedure (stop operation sequence) advantageous to the player. A region 1102, a game history display region 1103 for displaying a game history during ART, a count target combination display region 1104 for displaying a count target combination corresponding to the current ART management information, and a notification corresponding to the current ART management information. Notification number display area 1105 that displays the possible number (and the number of notifications that have been exhausted), ART management information display area 1106 that displays the current ART management information, and ART management information stock number display that displays the ART management information stock number The area 1107, the lottery state suggestion display area 1108 that displays information that suggests the current lottery state, and the precursor game number suggestion display area 1109 that displays information that suggests the current number of precursor games are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 11. It is provided in the display area.

In the effect display area 1101, various effect images are displayed in accordance with effect data determined based on effect control information, an internal winning combination, or the like. For example, when an internal winning combination (for example, a common winning combination) that can be double-winned with BB is determined, or when an internal winning combination (for example, a special single or a special double) for which the CZ transition lottery is performed is determined. , An effect for suggesting those expectations in one or more games is displayed.

Further, in the stop operation procedure display area 1102, a stop operation procedure advantageous for the player is displayed according to the stop operation procedure notification effect data. In the example of FIG. 100, the stop operation sequence of "left middle right" is displayed as the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player.

In the game history display area 1103, various game histories are displayed according to the degree of progress of the game during ART. In the example of FIG. 100, the “total number of coins”, which is the number of medals paid out during the ART (including a bonus, a CZ during the ART, or a period during the transition to the additional zone) during the ART, The "digestion game number", which is the number of times the game is played during the ART (including during the CZ during the ART or during the addition zone during the ART) is displayed.

In the count target winning combination display area 1104, a combination of symbols of the count target winning combination defined in the current ART management information is displayed. In the example of FIG. 100, when the current ART management information is “ART management information 2”, the counting target winning combination is “push order bell A” (more specifically, a combination of symbols of “8 winning combinations 1”) Is displayed.

In the notification count display area 1105, the notification count specified in the current ART management information and the notification count consumed in the notification count are displayed. In the example of FIG. 100, when the current ART management information is “ART management information 2”, it is displayed that the prescribed notification number is “5” and the digested notification number is “3”. Has been done.

Further, in the ART management information display area 1106, the current ART management information is displayed in a predetermined display mode. In the example of FIG. 100, “yellow ball” is displayed when the current ART management information is “ART management information 2”. When the current ART management information is “ART management information 1”, “blue ball” is displayed, and when the current ART management information is “ART management information 3”, “green ball” is displayed. If the current ART management information is "ART management information 4", "rainbow ball" is displayed. Further, when the ART management information is promoted, the display mode of the ART management information display area 1106 is changed to notify the player that the ART management information has been promoted. For example, when the ART management information is promoted from “ART management information 2” to “ART management information 3”, “yellow ball” displayed in the ART management information display area 1106 changes to “green ball”.

Further, in the ART management information stock number display area 1107, the content and the number of ART management information currently stocked are displayed. In the example of FIG. 100, it is displayed that "3" is stored as "ART management information 1 stock number", and "1" is stored as "ART management information 2 stock number", It is displayed that “2” is stored as “3 stocks of ART management information” and that “0” is stored as “4 stocks of ART management information”.

Further, in the lottery state suggestion display area 1108, various effect images suggesting the current ART mode or CZ lottery mode are displayed. For example, different characters are displayed depending on whether the ART mode is “1” or “3”. Further, for example, the color of the displayed character is made different depending on whether the CZ lottery mode during ART is “1” or “3”. That is, an effect that suggests the degree of expectation (lottery state) of transition to the additional zone or the CZ during ART during ART is displayed. The display contents may be determined by lottery. For example, even if the ART mode is “1”, a character with a high expectation value of “3” in the ART mode may be displayed, and the CZ lottery mode during ART is “1”. Alternatively, the character may be displayed in a color with a high degree of expectation that the CZ lottery mode during ART is “3”.

Further, in the indication game number suggestion display area 1109, various effect images suggesting the current number of games are displayed. For example, different characters are displayed depending on whether the number of precursor games is set to less than "21" or "21" or more. That is, an effect that indicates the degree of expectation of the transition content when the transition is made from the ART to the additional zone or the CZ during the ART is displayed. The display contents may be determined by lottery. For example, even if the number of precursor games is not set, the character displayed when the number of precursor games is set may be displayed.

The screen display during ART shown in FIG. 100 is merely an example, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in the screen display during ART, some of the above-mentioned areas may be displayed. Further, in other effect states, a part of the above-mentioned areas may be replaced with an effect state display area for displaying the current effect state. In particular, when the effect state display area is provided in the normal CZ or the ART CZ, it is suitable for recognizing whether it is the CZ middle high accuracy chance or the CZ middle high accuracy zone. Further, in other effect states, an RT game state display area for displaying the current RT game state may be provided instead of a part of the above-mentioned areas. In particular, when this RT game status display area is usually provided, it is suitable for recognizing the degree of expectation of transition to the special zone. Further, it is possible to appropriately provide a region for displaying other information according to the effect state.

[Modification of this embodiment]
Next, a modified example of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 is a diagram showing a relationship (general game state) between a stop operation sequence for an internal winning combination and a winning combination in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example of the present embodiment.

First, as shown in FIG. 101, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example, in the general game state, the stop operation sequence and the winning combination when the above-mentioned “push order bell A” and “push order bell B” are internally won Is different from that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. In the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the first modification, the pachi-slot machine 1 according to the present embodiment is related to the relationship between the stop operation sequence and the winning combination in one of the “push order bell A” and the “push order bell B” described above. It is also possible to adopt a configuration different from that of the above, and to have the other configuration similar to that of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment.

Specifically, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "left middle right bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "30"), the stop operation sequence is "left middle right". If it is, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “Eight-piece hand 1” is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing, and the stop operation sequence is “right and left middle”. In some cases, regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of "8 winning combinations 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "left and right middle bell A" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "31"), and the stop operation sequence is "right and left middle" , Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of symbols of "8-sheet combination 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation order is "left middle right". It is assumed that the control is performed such that the combination of the symbols of "8-sheet combination 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

Also, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "middle left and right bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "32"), and the stop operation sequence is "middle left and right" , Regardless of the stop operation timing, control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “8 winning hands 1” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation sequence is “middle right left”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, it is assumed that the control is performed such that the combination of the symbols of "8-card combination 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is “middle right left bell A” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “33”), and the stop operation sequence is “middle right left”, , Regardless of the stop operation timing, control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “8-piece hand 1” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation sequence is “middle left and right”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed such that the symbol combination of "8 winning combinations 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

Further, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "Right Left Middle Bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "34"), if the stop operation sequence is "Right Left Middle" , Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “Eight-piece hand 1” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation sequence is “right center left”. The control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of "8 winning combinations 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

Also, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "Right Middle Left Bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "35"), the stop operation sequence is "Right Middle Left" Is controlled so that the combination of the symbols of "8 hand combination 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing, and when the stop operation sequence is "right left middle" Is controlled such that the combination of the symbols of "8 winning combinations 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is “left middle right bell B” (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is “36”), and the stop operation sequence is “left middle right” Is controlled so that the combination of the symbols of "Eight-piece hand 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing, and when the stop operation sequence is "right and left middle". The control is performed such that the combination of the symbols of “8 winning hands 1” is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "left and right middle bell B" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "37"), and the stop operation sequence is "left and right middle" , Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “Eight-piece hand 2” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation sequence is “left center right”. It is assumed that the control is performed such that the combination of the symbols of "Eight-sheet combination 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

Further, in the normal gaming state, when the internal winning combination is "middle left and right bell B" (the value of the small combination/replay data pointer is "38"), and the stop operation sequence is "middle left and right" , Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “Eight-piece hand 2” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation order is “middle right left”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, it is assumed that the control is performed such that the combination of the symbols of "Eight-piece hand 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

In the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "middle right left bell B" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "39"), and the stop operation sequence is "middle right left", , Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “8-sheet combination 2” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation sequence is “middle left/right”, Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of "8 winning combinations 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line.

Also, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "Right Left Middle Bell B" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "40"), if the stop operation sequence is "Right Left Middle" , Regardless of the stop operation timing, the control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “Eight-piece hand 2” is preferentially displayed on the activated line, and the stop operation sequence is “right center left”. The control is performed so that the combination of the symbols of “8 winning hands 1” is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

Also, in the normal gaming state, if the internal winning combination is "Right Middle Left Bell B" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "41"), and the stop operation sequence is "Right Middle Left" Is controlled so that the combination of the symbols of "8-card combination 2" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing, and the stop operation sequence is "right-left-middle". Is controlled such that the combination of the symbols of "Eight-piece combination 1" is preferentially displayed on the activated line regardless of the stop operation timing.

In the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example 1, the winning probabilities of the “push order bell A” and the “push order bell B” in the general gaming state may be the same as those of the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment. The configuration may be different or different. For example, the winning probability may be configured such that the winning probability of “push order bell A” and the winning probability of “push order bell B” are the same.

Next, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example, "ART management information 5" and "ART management information 6" are defined as the ART management information. In the "ART management information 5" and the "ART management information 6", "5" times are defined as the number of notifications possible (the initial value of the notification counter), as in "ART management information 1" to "ART management information 3". Has been done. However, in the "ART management information 5", when the symbol combination actually stopped and displayed is the symbol combination "8-sheet winning combination 1", the value of the notification counter is subtracted and the symbol actually stopped and displayed. If the combination is a combination of symbols of "8-card combination 2", the value of the notification counter is not subtracted. On the other hand, in the "ART management information 6", when the combination of symbols actually stopped and displayed is the combination of symbols of "8 winning combinations 2", the value of the notification counter is subtracted, and the symbols actually stopped and displayed. If the combination is a combination of symbols of "8-card combination 2", the value of the notification counter is not subtracted. That is, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example, when the "ART management information 5" or the "ART management information 6" is set, the number of times the stop operation procedure advantageous to the player is notified (the number of times of notification) Instead, the continuation or the end of the ART is managed by the number of times the combination of symbols of "8-card combination 1" or "8-card combination 2" is stopped and displayed (the number of winnings).

Then, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example, "ART management information 5" or "ART management information 6" is set during the ART, and the player is internally elected to "push order bell A" or "push order bell B". In this case, for example, "2" is set in the instruction information transmission status flag. That is, in the case of internally winning the “push order bell A” or the “push order bell B”, only the stop operation order of the first stop operation is notified as a procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player.

For example, in the case of internally winning "Left Middle Right Bell A" (small win/replay data pointer value is "30"), "7" is stored in the "stop operation sequence" of the effect control information storage area. , "Left first stop" is notified. At this time, "ART management information 5" is set, and if the player performs a stop operation at "left middle right", the combination of symbols of "8 hand combination 1" is stopped and displayed. The value of the counter is decremented by "1". Therefore, the end of the ART based on the "ART management information 5" is approaching. On the other hand, when the player performs a stop operation in "right and left middle", the combination of the symbols of "8 winning combinations 2" is stopped and displayed, so the value of the notification counter is not subtracted. Therefore, the ART state based on the "ART management information 5" is maintained.

In addition, for example, when the player is internally elected to "left middle right bell B" (the value of the small win/replay data pointer is "36"), "7" is added to the "stop operation sequence" in the effect control information storage area. It is stored and informed that the "left first stop" should be performed. At this time, "ART management information 5" is set, and when the player performs a stop operation at "left middle right", the combination of symbols of "8 hand combination 2" is stopped and displayed. The counter value is not subtracted. Therefore, the ART state based on the "ART management information 5" is maintained. On the other hand, when the player performs a stop operation at "left and right middle", the combination of symbols of "8-piece combination 1" is stopped and displayed, so that the value of the notification counter is decremented by "1". Therefore, the end of the ART during the ART based on the "ART management information 5" is approaching.

In addition, when the player performs the stop operation in a stop operation order different from the notified stop operation order (for example, the middle first stop or the right first stop in the above example), The value of the notification counter may be subtracted by "1" regardless of the combination.

As described above, in the modified example of the present embodiment, when the “push order bell A” or the “push order bell B” is internally won during the ART, the first stop operation is stopped as an advantageous stop operation procedure. Only the operation procedure is notified, and the combination of symbols that are stopped and displayed is different according to the second stop operation procedure. Then, the combination of symbols for which the number of winnings is counted is different according to the type of ART management information. That is, depending on which symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change the end time during the ART and the profit obtained by the execution during the ART. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the ART and further improve the interest.

In addition, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example, in place of or in addition to the above-mentioned "push order bell A" and "push order bell B", small wins of "bell A" and "bell B" are used as internal winning combinations. It can also be adopted.

Specifically, for example, when the player's stop operation sequence is "left first stop", the internal winning combination "Bell A" displays the combination of symbols of "8-piece combination 1" as a stop, If the person's stop operation order is any other stop operation order, the combination of the symbols of "8 hand combination 2" is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned dropout occurs or the "RT1 transition symbol" is stopped and displayed. Configure so that there is no such thing.

Further, for example, in the case of the internal winning combination "Bell B", when the player's stop operation sequence is "right first stop", the combination of symbols of "8-sheet combination 1" is stopped and displayed, and the player is stopped. If the operation order is any other stop operation order, the combination of the symbols of "8 hand combination 2" is stopped and displayed, and the above-mentioned dropout occurs or the "RT1 transition symbol" is not stopped and displayed. To configure.

In addition, during the ART, basically, a procedure of a stop operation which is advantageous for the player so as not to shift the game state from RT3 to RT1 (that is, "RT3 left rep" (small win/replay data pointer value is " 21"), "left first stop", "RT3 middle lip" (small win/replay data pointer value is "22") "middle first stop", and "RT3 right lip" (small win/replay) When the value of the data pointer for use is "23"), the "right first stop") is informed, and when "Bell A" or "Bell B" is internally won, an advantageous stop operation procedure is informed. Is not performed.

Then, instead of the notification counter, a winning counter that counts the number of winnings of the combination of the symbols of "8 winning hands 1" or "8 winning hands 2" is adopted, and "ART management information 5" and "ART management information 6" are adopted. In addition, "5" times is defined as the number of times of winning (the initial value of the winning counter).

In this case, for example, if "ART management information 6" is set, and if the player internally wins "Bell A" and the player performs a stop operation at "left first stop", "8 pieces" Since the combination of the symbols of “winning part 1” is stopped and displayed, the value of the winning counter is not subtracted. Therefore, the ART state based on the "ART management information 5" is maintained. On the other hand, when the player performs the stop operation in the other stop operation order, the combination of the symbols of “8 winning combinations 2” is stopped and displayed, so that the value of the winning counter is decremented by “1”. Therefore, the end of the ART based on the "ART management information 6" is approaching.

In addition, for example, when "ART management information 6" is set and the player internally stops at "Bell B" and the player performs a stop operation at "right first stop", "8 hand Since the combination of symbols "1" is stopped and displayed, the value of the winning counter is not subtracted. Therefore, the ART state based on the "ART management information 5" is maintained. On the other hand, when the player performs the stop operation in the other stop operation sequence, the combination of the symbols of “8 winning combinations 2” is stopped and displayed, so that the value of the winning counter is decremented by “1”. Therefore, the end of the ART based on the "ART management information 6" is approaching.

As described above, in the modified example of the present embodiment, the advantageous stop operation procedure is not notified when "Bell A" or "Bell B" is internally won during the ART, but according to the stop operation procedure. The combination of symbols displayed in a stopped state is configured to be different. Then, the combination of symbols for which the number of winnings is counted is different according to the type of ART management information. That is, depending on which symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change the end time during the ART and the profit obtained by the execution during the ART. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous during the ART and further improve the interest.

Furthermore, in the pachi-slot machine 1 of the modified example, the "common bell A" and the "common bell A" and the "common bell A" together with the above-mentioned "winning order bell A" and "pushing order bell B" or the small roles of "bell A" and "bell B". It is also possible to adopt a small role of "B".

Specifically, for example, the internal winning combination "common bell A" is configured so that the combination of the symbols "8-sheet combination 1" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation timing and the stop operation order of the player, The internal winning combination "common bell B" is configured so that the combination of symbols of "8 winning combinations 2" is stopped and displayed regardless of the stop operation timing and the stop operation order of the player.

That is, when "ART management information 5" is set and "Common Bell A" is internally won, the notification counter or the winning counter is always decremented by "1", and "ART management information 6" is set. In this case, if the player is internally won in the “common bell B”, the notification counter or the winning counter may be decremented by “1”. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the game shop from inadvertently continuing during the ART and suffering an unexpected disadvantage. From the viewpoint of ensuring playability, when adopting a small combination of "common bell A" and "common bell B", "push order bell A" and "push order bell B" or "bell A" It is desirable to set the winning probability so that the winning probability is lower than that of the small role of “Bell B”.

As described above, according to the pachi-slot machine 1 of the present embodiment (including modifications), it is possible to provide at least the following gaming machines according to the first to tenth inventions.

[Game Machines According to First to Fourth Inventions]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, a gaming machine is known in which 100 games are set as one set in an advantageous state (for example, ART) advantageous to a player, and the start, end, or continuation of the advantageous state is controlled in units of one set ( For example, Prior Art Document 1: Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2012-200498).

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, the advantageous state is managed in units of a predetermined set. Therefore, when it is not decided to continue the advantageous state, the end time of the advantageous state is always set. Since it is constant, there is a problem that the game in the advantageous state becomes monotonous.

Further, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 1, in the advantageous state, the winning probability of the internal winning combination (for example, the pushing order small winning combination) in which the game medium is to be paid out is a certain probability. The profits obtained from execution were not likely to fluctuate, and there was a need to devise ways to further enhance the interest.

It is an object of the first and fourth inventions to provide a gaming machine which can prevent a game from becoming monotonous in an advantageous state advantageous to a player and further improve the interest.

<Game machine according to the first invention>
The first invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
An advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified,
The advantageous state is at least when the first winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell A”) or the second winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell B”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In the state in which the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) associated with a predetermined noticeable number of times (for example, initial value “5” of the notification counter) is set based on a predetermined setting condition. State management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination unit determines the counting target combination, a notification number updating unit (for example, an ART process by the main CPU 93) that updates the notification number,
An advantageous state end control unit (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) that ends the advantageous state when the number of notifications updated by the notification number updating unit reaches the predetermined number of notifications possible,
The advantageous state management information includes first advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 1") and second advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 2"),
When the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the first winning combination and the second winning combination become the counting target winning combination,
When the second advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the first winning combination is the counting target winning combination.

Further, the first invention is
The advantageous state management information further includes third advantageous state management information (for example, “ART management information 3”),
When the third advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the second winning combination is the counting target winning combination.

In the first invention, the number of times of notification is counted according to the type of advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) in the advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player is informed. It is configured such that the counted target roles to be performed are different. That is, it is possible to change the end timing of the advantageous state and the profit obtained by executing the advantageous state depending on which combination is to be counted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the advantageous state and further improve the interest.

Further, the first invention is
In the profit giving means, the first winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, and the stop operation is performed in the advantageous stop operation procedure, so that a combination of the first symbols (for example, “8 pieces The combination of symbols of "Win 1") is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, and the second winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determination means, and the stop operation is performed in the advantageous stop operation procedure. As a result, the same profit (for example, payout of 8 medals) is given when the second symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of "8 coin combination 2") is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in the first aspect, even if the counting target combination is different, the profit obtained when the notification target combination (for example, “pushing order bell A” and “pushing order bell B”) is realized is the same. It is configured to be. Therefore, the player can easily estimate the profit obtained in the advantageous state from the type of the winning combination to be counted and the winning probability thereof, and thus the interest in the advantageous state can be improved. Further, it is possible to easily design the payout of the gaming machine while preventing the game in the advantageous state from becoming monotonous.

<Game machine according to the second invention>
The second invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
An advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified,
The advantageous state is at least when the first winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell A”) or the second winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell B”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In the state in which the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) associated with a predetermined noticeable number of times (for example, initial value “5” of the notification counter) is set based on a predetermined setting condition. State management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination unit determines the counting target combination, a notification number updating unit (for example, an ART process by the main CPU 93) that updates the notification number,
An advantageous state end control unit (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) that ends the advantageous state when the number of notifications updated by the notification number updating unit reaches the predetermined number of notifications possible,
The advantageous state management information includes first advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 2") and second advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 3"),
When the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the first winning combination becomes the counting target winning combination,
When the second advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the second winning combination becomes the counting target winning combination,
The internal winning combination determination means determines the first winning combination as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than the second winning combination.

In the second invention, in addition to the first invention, of the notification target combinations in the advantageous state (for example, “push order bell A” and “push order bell B”), the first combination (for example, “push order bell A”). )) is a target to be counted, and a second role (for example, “push order bell B”) is a target to be counted, and it is highly probable that the first role has a higher probability than the second role. It is configured to do. That is, when the second winning combination is a counting target winning combination, the player can be more advantageous than when the first winning combination is a counting target winning combination. Therefore, since the degree of advantage can be further changed in the advantageous state, the interest in the advantageous state can be improved.

<Game machine according to third invention>
The third invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
An advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified,
The advantageous state is at least when the first winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell A”) or the second winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell B”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In the state in which the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) associated with a predetermined noticeable number of times (for example, initial value “5” of the notification counter) is set based on a predetermined setting condition. State management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination unit determines the counting target combination, a notification number updating unit (for example, an ART process by the main CPU 93) that updates the notification number,
Advantageous state end control means (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) that terminates the advantageous state when the number of notifications updated by the notification number updating means reaches the predetermined number of possible notifications.
When the advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the advantageous state management information becomes more advantageous based on the promotion mode (for example, “promotion mode 1” or “promotion mode 2”). Promotion determining means for determining whether or not to promote (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
And an promotion mode determination means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93) for determining the promotion mode,
The advantageous state management information includes first advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 1") and second advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 2" or "ART management information 3"). Including
When the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the first winning combination and the second winning combination become the counting target winning combination,
When the second advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the first winning combination or the second winning combination becomes the counting target winning combination,
The promotion mode includes a first promotion mode (for example, "promotion mode 1") and a second promotion mode (for example, "promotion mode 2"),
The promotion determining means, when the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, is in the first promotion mode, the second advantageous state has a first probability. It is determined whether to promote to management information, and if it is the second promotion mode, whether to promote to the second advantageous state management information with a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Decide whether or not
The promotion mode determination means determines the second promotion mode when the promotion determination means determines to promote the first advantageous state management information to the second advantageous state management information. Is a gaming machine characterized by.

The third invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
An advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified,
The advantageous state is at least when the first winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell A”) or the second winning combination (eg, “pushing order bell B”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. In the state in which the procedure of the advantageous stop operation is notified,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) associated with a predetermined noticeable number of times (for example, initial value “5” of the notification counter) is set based on a predetermined setting condition. State management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determination unit determines the counting target combination, a notification number updating unit (for example, an ART process by the main CPU 93) that updates the notification number,
Advantageous state end control means (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) that terminates the advantageous state when the number of notifications updated by the notification number updating means reaches the predetermined number of possible notifications.
When the advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the advantageous state management information becomes more advantageous based on the promotion mode (for example, “promotion mode 1” or “promotion mode 2”). Promotion determining means for determining whether or not to promote (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
And an promotion mode determination means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93) for determining the promotion mode,
The advantageous state management information includes first advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 2") and second advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 3"),
When the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the first winning combination becomes the counting target winning combination,
When the second advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the second winning combination becomes the counting target winning combination,
The internal winning combination determining means determines the first winning combination as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than the second winning combination,
The promotion mode includes a first promotion mode (for example, "promotion mode 1") and a second promotion mode (for example, "promotion mode 2"),
The promotion determining means, when the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, is in the first promotion mode, the second advantageous state has a first probability. It is determined whether to promote to management information, and if it is the second promotion mode, whether to promote to the second advantageous state management information with a second probability that is higher than the first probability. Decide whether or not
The promotion mode determination means determines the second promotion mode when the promotion determination means determines to promote the first advantageous state management information to the second advantageous state management information. Is a gaming machine characterized by.

In the third invention, in addition to the first invention, at the time of setting the advantageous state management information, it is determined whether or not the advantageous state management information is promoted to more advantageous advantageous state management information, and it is determined that the advantageous state management information is promoted. In this case, the advantageous state management information is configured to be easily promoted when the advantageous state management information is set thereafter. Therefore, in the advantageous state, for example, even when the advantageous state management information relatively disadvantageous to the player is set, the player's expectation can be maintained.

<Game machine according to the fourth invention>
The fourth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
An advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified,
The internal winning combination determination means can determine the first winning combination (for example, "left middle right bell A") and the second winning combination (for example, "left middle right bell B") as an internal winning combination,
The symbol fluctuation stop control means,
When the internal winning combination determining unit determines the first winning combination as an internal winning combination, a first stopping operation (eg, left first stopping) is performed as a first stopping operation and a second stopping operation is performed as a second stopping operation. When the stop operation of 2 (for example, the second stop in the middle) is performed, the symbol display means is caused to stop and display the first symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “8 winning hands 1”),
When the internal winning combination determining unit determines the first winning combination as the internal winning combination, the first stopping operation is performed as the first stopping operation, and the third stopping operation is performed as the next stopping operation (for example, When the right second stop) is carried out, the symbol display means is caused to stop and display the second symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of "8 winning hands 2"),
When the internal winning combination determining unit determines the second winning combination as an internal winning combination, the first stopping operation is performed as the first stopping operation and the second stopping operation is performed as the next stopping operation. In the case of being displayed, the symbol display means is caused to stop and display the combination of the second symbols,
When the internal winning combination determining unit determines the second winning combination as an internal winning combination, the first stopping operation is performed as the first stopping operation, and the third stopping operation is performed as the next stopping operation. In the case of being displayed, the symbol display means is caused to stop and display the combination of the first symbols,
The advantageous state is at least the procedure of the first stop operation as the procedure of the advantageous stop operation when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means. Is informed,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) associated with a predetermined noticeable number of times (for example, initial value “5” of the notification counter) is set based on a predetermined setting condition. State management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
In the advantageous state, when the first winning combination or the second winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the number of winnings is determined according to the combination of symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol displaying means. Prize number updating means (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) to be updated,
Advantageous state end control means (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) that terminates the advantageous state when the number of winnings updated by the winning number updating means reaches the predetermined number of notifications possible,
The advantageous state management information includes first advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 5") and second advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 6"),
The winning number updating means is
When the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting means, the winning number is updated when the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, and When the combination of the second symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the winning number is not updated,
When the second advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting unit, the number of winnings is updated when the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, The game machine is characterized in that the number of winnings is not updated when the combination of the first symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.

In the fourth invention, in the advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which the procedure of the stop operation advantageous for the player is informed, the specific combination (for example, “push order bell A” or “push order bell B”) is internally In the case of winning, as an advantageous stop operation procedure, only the stop operation procedure of the first stop operation is informed, and the combination of symbols displayed in a stop manner differs depending on the procedure of the second stop operation. Is configured as follows. Then, the combination of symbols for which the number of winnings is counted is different depending on the type of advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information). That is, depending on which symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change the end timing of the advantageous state and the profit obtained by executing the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the advantageous state and further improve the interest.

The fourth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
When a predetermined transition condition is satisfied in a low RT gaming state in which the probability that the replay combination for activating the re-play by the internal winning combination determining means is determined as the internal winning combination is low, the internal winning combination determining means determines the An RT game state in which a replay combination is transferred to a high RT game state in which there is a high probability of being determined as an internal winning combination, and when a specific transition condition is satisfied in the high RT game state, the state is changed to the low RT game state. Control means (for example, RT game status update processing by the main CPU 93),
An advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified,
The internal winning combination determination means can determine a first specific winning combination (for example, "bell A") and a second specific winning combination (for example, "bell B") as internal winning combinations.
The symbol fluctuation stop control means,
When the first specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, when the stop operation is performed in a predetermined stop operation procedure (for example, left first stop), the symbol In the case where the first combination of symbols (for example, the combination of the symbols of "8-sheet combination 1") is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the stop operation is performed by a stop operation procedure different from the predetermined stop operation procedure. , The second symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of "8-piece combination 2") is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
When the second specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, when the stop operation is performed in a specific stop operation procedure (for example, the first right stop), the symbol When the combination of the second symbols is stopped and displayed on the display means, and the stop operation is performed by a stop operation procedure different from the specific stop operation procedure, the first symbol is displayed on the symbol display means. Stop the combination of
The advantageous state, at least in the high RT gaming state, is a state in which the procedure of the stop operation for not satisfying the specific transition condition is notified as the procedure of the advantageous stop operation,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) associated with a predetermined number of possible winnings (for example, an initial value “5” of the winning counter) is set based on a predetermined setting condition. State management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting processing by the main CPU 93),
In the advantageous state, when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first specific winning combination or the second specific winning combination as an internal winning combination, the number of winnings depending on the combination of symbols displayed on the symbol displaying means. A winning number updating means (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
Advantageous state end control means (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93) that terminates the advantageous state when the number of winnings updated by the winning number updating means reaches the predetermined number of possible winnings.
The advantageous state management information includes first advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 5") and second advantageous state management information (for example, "ART management information 6"),
The winning number updating means is
When the first advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting unit, the winning number is updated when the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, When the combination of the second symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the winning number is not updated,
When the second advantageous state management information is set by the advantageous state management information setting unit, the number of winnings is updated when the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display unit, The game machine is characterized in that the number of winnings is not updated when the combination of the first symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, in the fourth invention, in a advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is informed, a specific combination (for example, “bell A” or “bell B”) is internally won. In this case, the advantageous stopping operation procedure is not notified, but the combination of symbols displayed in a stopped manner is different depending on the stopping operation procedure. Then, the combination of symbols for which the number of winnings is counted is different depending on the type of advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information). That is, depending on which symbol combination is stopped and displayed, it is possible to change the end timing of the advantageous state and the profit obtained by executing the advantageous state. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game from becoming monotonous in the advantageous state and further improve the interest.

The fourth invention is
The profit giving means has the same profit when the first symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means and when the second symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means (for example, , Payout of 8 medals) is provided.

Further, in the fourth aspect of the present invention, even when the combination of symbols for which the number of winnings is counted is different, the profit obtained when the winning is realized is the same. Therefore, the player can easily estimate the profit obtained in the advantageous state, and thus the interest in the advantageous state can be improved. Further, it is possible to easily design the payout of the gaming machine while preventing the game in the advantageous state from becoming monotonous.

[Game Machine According to Fifth Invention]
In recent years, a gaming machine having a plurality of chance zones is known as a specific state having a high degree of expectation of shifting to an advantageous state (eg, ART) advantageous to a player (eg, Prior Art Document 2: JP-A-2014-2014). 57653).

By the way, in the gaming machine disclosed in the prior art document 2, for example, each chance zone is moved by satisfying a predetermined condition such as the exhaustion of the number of games. It is not made clear whether or not the situation can satisfy the conditions. Therefore, there is a problem in that the player may not be able to recognize which chance zone is likely to move to, and may not be able to enter the game with expectation.

A fifth aspect of the present invention is a gaming machine in which a player is able to recognize which specific state is likely to be given, when having a plurality of specific states to which an advantageous state advantageous to a player can be given. The purpose is to provide.

The fifth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified.
A specific state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART),
The internal winning combination determining means internally wins the first specific winning combination (eg, “red lip”), the second specific winning combination (eg, “green lip”), and the third specific winning combination (eg, “red green lip”). Can be determined as a role,
The symbol fluctuation stop control means,
When the first specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, a combination of symbols relating to the first specific winning combination includes a first symbol (for example, a "red special" symbol), It is possible to stop and display the first symbol combination (for example, "special lip A1") not including the second symbol (for example, "green special" symbol) on the symbol display means,
When the second specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the combination of the symbols relating to the second specific winning combination includes the second symbol and does not include the first symbol, It is possible to stop and display the second symbol combination (for example, "special lip C1") on the symbol display means,
When the third specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the combination of the symbols relating to the third specific winning combination includes the first symbol and the second symbol, It is possible to stop and display a combination of symbols (for example, "special lip E1") on the symbol display means,
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting process by the main CPU 93) that sets advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition. )When,
An advantageous state end control means for ending the advantageous state when a notification termination condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
The specific state includes a first specific state (for example, "red CZ"), a second specific state (for example, "green CZ") and a third specific state (for example, "red green CZ"),
The specific state control means,
At least when the internal winning combination determining means determines the first specific winning combination, the second specific winning combination, or the third specific winning combination as an internal winning combination, it is determined whether or not the specific state is given. ,
When the internal winning combination determining means determines that the first specific winning combination is an internal winning combination, and decides to give the specific status, the first specific winning status is set to be higher than other specific winning statuses. I decided to give it with a high probability,
When it is determined by the internal winning combination determination means that the second specific winning combination is an internal winning combination, and the specific state is determined to be given, the second specific winning state is set to be higher than the other specific states. I decided to give it with a high probability,
When the internal winning combination determining means determines that the third specific winning combination is an internal winning combination, and when it is determined to give the specific status, the third specific winning status is set to be higher than the other specific statuses. I decided to give it with a high probability,
The third specific state is a gaming machine characterized by a higher degree of expectation that the advantageous state management information is given than in the first specific state and the second specific state.

In the fifth invention, a specific state (for example, during normal CZ or during ART during CZ) to which advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing an advantageous state (for example, ART) is provided. The first specific combination (for example, "red lip") is determined from the specific combinations (for example, "red lip", "blue lip", and "red-green lip") that are lottery target combinations for which whether or not to be determined is determined. If the first specific state (for example, “red CZ”) is given, the second specific combination (for example, “green lip”) is determined. When the specific state (for example, "green CZ") is highly likely to be given and the third specific role (for example, "red-green lip") is determined, the third specific state (for example, "red-green") is determined. CZ”) is added so that the probability is high.

Further, when the internal winning of the first specific winning combination, the first symbol (for example, "red special" symbol) is displayed, when the internal winning of the second specific winning combination, the second symbol (for example, "green" "Special" symbol) is displayed, and when the third specific winning combination is internally won, the first symbol and the second symbol can be displayed.

Then, when the first symbol and the second symbol are displayed and shift to the specific state, the advantageous state management information is expected to be added, as compared with the case where the first symbol or the second symbol is displayed and shifts to the specific state. It is configured so that the degree is high. Therefore, the player can recognize which particular state is likely to be given according to the displayed symbol, and the advantageous state management information when the particular state is given is given. It is possible to recognize the degree of expectation.

The fifth invention is
The first symbol included in the first symbol combination and the third symbol combination is stopped in the first row (for example, the area of the display window 4 facing the left reel 3L) in the symbol display means. Is displayed,
The second symbol included in the combination of the second symbol and the combination of the third symbol is a second column different from the first column in the symbol display means (for example, facing the right reel 3R). The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that it is stopped and displayed in a region of the display window 4.

In the fifth invention, in the symbol display area (for example, the display window 4), the column in which the first symbol is displayed is different from the column in which the second symbol is displayed. Therefore, the player can intuitively feel which specific state is highly likely to be given according to the displayed symbol.

The fifth invention is
An effect display unit (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for displaying an effect is provided,
The effect display means,
When transitioning to the first specific state, display an effect in which the first character corresponding to the first symbol is displayed,
In the case of shifting to the second specific state, an effect in which a second character corresponding to the second symbol is displayed is displayed,
The game machine according to the above, characterized in that, when shifting to the third specific state, an effect in which the first character and the second character are displayed is displayed.

Further, in the fifth aspect of the present invention, when shifting to the specific state, the character corresponding to the symbol that can be displayed when the specific combination is won is displayed. Therefore, even when the first symbol or the second symbol cannot be displayed when the specific winning combination is won, it is possible to recognize the lottery target winning combination that is decided to shift to the specific state. In addition to being able to do so, it is possible to recognize the degree of expectation of the transferred specific state.

[Game Machine According to Sixth Invention]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, chance zone) that is highly expected to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player (for example, Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-242242). No. 2014-57653).

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 2, when it is determined to shift to the specific state, the state is shifted to the specific state after the precursory state has passed (for example, after the number of precursory games has been exhausted). Has become. However, in such a precursory state, since it has already been decided to shift to the specific state, no other privilege related to the specific state is given. Therefore, there is a problem that, for example, when the player transits to a specific state with low expectation after a long omen state, the player's interest may be reduced.

A sixth aspect of the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the enjoyment of the precursory state when shifting to a specific state where an advantageous state advantageous to the player can be given.

The sixth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified.
A specific state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART),
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting process by the main CPU 93) that sets advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition. )When,
An advantageous state end control means for ending the advantageous state when a notification termination condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied (for example, processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
The specific state is a state in which it is determined whether or not to add the advantageous state management information,
The specific state control means,
Specific state assignment determining means for determining whether or not to assign the specific state when specific winning combinations (for example, "special single" and "special double") are determined by the internal winning combination determining means as internal winning combinations (For example, normal processing by the main CPU 93 or processing during ART),
A specific state management information determination unit (for example, CZ management information) that determines the specific state management information (for example, CZ management information) that manages the specific state when the specific state transition determination unit determines to assign the specific state Normal processing by the main CPU 93 or processing during ART),
When it is determined by the specific state assignment determination means that the specific state is assigned, the state is controlled to a precursory state, and the precursory state ends (for example, when the number of precursor games becomes “0”). A specific state transition control means for transitioning to the specific state (for example, normal processing by the main CPU 93 or processing during ART),
The specific state provision determination means, in the aura state, it is possible to further determine whether to provide the specific state,
The specific state management information determining means can further determine the specific state management information in the precursory state,
The specific state control means,
In the aforesaid state, when the specific state management information determining unit determines the specific state management information, the specific state management information updating unit updates the specific state management information to the more advantageous specific state management information (for example, , Normal processing by the main CPU 93 or processing during ART).

Further, the sixth invention is
The specific state management information determining means determines the specific management information from a plurality of specific state management information associated with different attributes (eg, "red", "blue" or "green"),
The specific state management information updating means is an attribute associated with the specific state management information determined before the transition to the precursory state, and an attribute associated with the specific management information determined in the precursory state The above-mentioned gaming machine is characterized in that the specific management information is updated in combination with.

In the sixth invention, a specific state (for example, during normal CZ or during ART during CZ) to which advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing an advantageous state (for example, ART) is provided. If it is decided, in the precursory state, it is further decided whether or not to add the specific state, and if it is decided to add the specific state, the specific state becomes more advantageous. I am configuring.

Specifically, regarding the specific state management information (for example, CZ management information) that manages the specific state, the attributes of the specific state management information determined before the transition to the precursory state, and the specific state management determined in the precursory state By combining with the information attribute, it is configured to update to more advantageous specific state management information.

Therefore, when shifting to a specific state in which an advantageous state advantageous to the player can be given, it is possible to improve the interest of the omen state.

[Game Machines According to Seventh to Ninth Inventions]
2. Description of the Related Art In recent years, there has been known a gaming machine that can be controlled to a specific state (for example, chance zone) that is highly expected to shift to an advantageous state (for example, ART) that is advantageous to the player (for example, Prior Art Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open Publication No. 2004-242242). No. 2014-57653).

By the way, in the gaming machine described in the prior art document 2, in the specific state, only whether or not to shift to the advantageous state is determined, so that the game in the specific state becomes monotonous. was there.

It is an object of the seventh to ninth inventions to provide a gaming machine capable of preventing a game from becoming monotonous in a specific state where an advantageous state advantageous to a player can be given.

<Game machine according to seventh invention>
The seventh invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified.
A specific state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART),
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting process by the main CPU 93) that sets advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition. )When,
Advantageous state end control means for ending the advantageous state when a notification end condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied (for example, when the notification counter becomes “0”) (for example, , Processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
The specific state control means,
It is possible to control to the specific state at least during a predetermined number of games (for example, in the CZ execution state),
Point number determination means for determining the number of points to be provided for each game in the specific state (for example, a normal medium CZ medium process or an ART medium CZ medium process by the main CPU 93),
A point number storage means for accumulating and storing the number of points determined by the point number determination means (for example, a main RAM 95 for storing a value of a point counter),
Advantageous state management information provisional provision means for deciding whether or not to provision the advantageous state management information provisionally for each game in the specific state (for example, normal CZ mid-process or ART mid-CZ mid process by the main CPU 93),
Advantageous state management information provisional storage means for storing the advantageous state management information provisionally provided by the advantageous state management information provisional provision means (for example, main RAM 95 for storing ART management information provisional stock),
In the specific state, when the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "100"), the advantageous state management information stored in the advantageous state management information temporary storage means Advantageous state management information book giving means (for example, normal CZ medium processing or ART CZ medium processing by the main CPU 93) for permanently giving information so that it can be set by the advantageous state management information setting means. Is a gaming machine.

In the seventh invention, it is advantageous in a specific state (for example, during normal CZ or during ART CZ) to which advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing an advantageous state (for example, ART) can be added. When it is determined whether or not the state management information is provisionally provided (for example, provisionally stocked) and a predetermined provision condition is satisfied (for example, the value of the point counter becomes “100” or more), the provisionally-added advantageous state is obtained. The management information is configured to be provided (for example, officially stocked). That is, in the specific state, it is determined whether or not the grant condition is satisfied for the information (advantageous state management information) for shifting or continuing to the advantageous state, and the content of the grant is also determined. It has become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game in the specific state from becoming monotonous.

The seventh invention is
When the advantageous state management information is stored in the advantageous state management information temporary storage means, the point number determining means determines the point number such that the number of points is relatively large. The gaming machine described above.

Further, in the seventh aspect of the invention, when the advantageous state management information is provisionally provided, the determination of the number of points is given preferential treatment, so that the predetermined provision condition is more easily satisfied. Therefore, the interest of the game in the specific state can be further improved.

<Game machine according to eighth invention>
The eighth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified.
A specific state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART),
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting process by the main CPU 93) that sets advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition. )When,
Advantageous state end control means for ending the advantageous state when a notification end condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied (for example, when the notification counter becomes “0”) (for example, , Processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
The specific state control means,
It is possible to control to the specific state at least during a predetermined number of games (for example, in the CZ execution state),
Normal point number determination means for determining the number of points to be given for each game in the specific state (for example, a medium CZ medium processing or an ART CZ medium processing by the main CPU 93),
When a special condition is satisfied (for example, when special addition is determined), a special point number determination means for determining a special point number as the number of points to be provided (for example, during normal operation by the main CPU 93) Processing during CZ or processing during CZ during ART),
A point number storage means for accumulating and storing the number of points determined by the normal point number determination means and the special point number determination means (for example, a main RAM 95 for storing the value of a point counter),
Advantageous state management information provisional provision means for deciding whether or not to provision the advantageous state management information provisionally for each game in the specific state (for example, normal CZ mid-process or ART mid-CZ mid process by the main CPU 93),
Advantageous state management information provisional storage means for storing the advantageous state management information provisionally provided by the advantageous state management information provisional provision means (for example, main RAM 95 for storing ART management information provisional stock),
In the specific state, when the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "100"), the advantageous state management information stored in the advantageous state management information temporary storage means Advantageous state management information book giving means (for example, normal medium CZ medium processing or ART medium CZ medium processing by the main CPU 93) for permanently giving information so that it can be set by the advantageous state management information setting means,
When the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage unit is a specific value (for example, “51”) or more, the special point-number determination unit determines that the number of points of the special point is the number-of-points storage unit. The gaming machine is characterized by determining the number of points at which the stored number of points is equal to or more than the predetermined value.

The eighth invention is
The normal point number determination means includes at least a predetermined first point number (for example, “8”) of 1 or more as the point number, and a second point number larger than the first point number. (For example, "12"),
When the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage unit is less than the specific value, the special point number determination unit determines the first point by the normal point number determination unit as the special point number. The number of points is determined, the number of points stored in the number-of-points storage means is determined to be the predetermined value or more, the number of points is determined.

In the eighth invention, in addition to the seventh invention, in a specific state, when a special condition is satisfied (for example, when special addition is determined), a predetermined grant condition is satisfied. It is configured so that a special number of points is determined.

Specifically, if the current number of points is a specific value (for example, "51") or more, by determining a special number of points that sets the number of points to a predetermined value (for example, "100") or more. , So that the predetermined granting condition is satisfied.

In addition, when the current number of points is less than the specific value, even when a relatively disadvantageous first point number (for example, “8”) is determined when determining the normal point number. If the first number of points is determined, by determining a special number of points that makes the number of points equal to or greater than a predetermined value (for example, "100"), the degree of expectation that the predetermined grant condition is satisfied is dramatically increased. It is configured to increase.

Therefore, for example, even when the situation of determining the number of points in the specific state is not good, it is possible to maintain the expectation of giving the advantageous state in the specific state, so that the interest of the game in the specific state can be further improved. it can.

<A game machine according to the ninth invention>
The ninth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
Advantageous state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling an advantageous state (for example, during ART) in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous for the player is notified.
A specific state control means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART),
The advantageous state control means,
In the advantageous state, advantageous state management information setting means (for example, ART management information setting process by the main CPU 93) that sets advantageous state management information (for example, ART management information) for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition. )When,
Advantageous state end control means for ending the advantageous state when a notification end condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied (for example, when the notification counter becomes “0”) (for example, , Processing during ART by the main CPU 93),
The specific state control means,
It is possible to control to the specific state at least during a predetermined number of games (for example, in the CZ execution state),
Point number determination means for determining the number of points to be provided for each game in the specific state (for example, a normal medium CZ medium process or an ART medium CZ medium process by the main CPU 93),
A point number storage means for accumulating and storing the number of points determined by the point number determination means (for example, a main RAM 95 for storing a value of a point counter),
Advantageous state management information provisional provision means for deciding whether or not to provision the advantageous state management information provisionally for each game in the specific state (for example, normal CZ mid-process or ART mid-CZ mid process by the main CPU 93),
Advantageous state management information provisional storage means for storing the advantageous state management information provisionally provided by the advantageous state management information provisional provision means (for example, main RAM 95 for storing ART management information provisional stock),
In the specific state, when the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means exceeds a predetermined value (for example, "100"), the advantageous state management information stored in the advantageous state management information temporary storage means Advantageous state management information book giving means for permanently giving information so that it can be set by the advantageous state management information setting means (for example, processing during normal CZ during CZ or processing during CZ during ART)
Special for determining whether the specific state is a normal state (for example, processing during normal CZ during CZ medium or high precision zone during ART) or a special state (for example, during medium high-precision zone for CZ) A state determining means (for example, a normal medium CZ process or an ART medium CZ process by the main CPU 93),
Special state control means for controlling the specific state to the special state when the special state determining means determines that the specific state is to be the special state (for example, normal CZ intermediate processing or ART by the main CPU 93). Medium CZ medium treatment), and
The point number determination means,
When the specific state is the special state, the number of points is determined so that the number of points is relatively larger than when the specific state is the normal state,
When the number of games in which the special state is controlled to the special state by the special state control unit is a specific number (for example, “4”), the number of points stored by the point number storage unit is The gaming machine is characterized in that the number of points that is equal to or greater than the predetermined value is determined.

In the ninth invention, in addition to the seventh invention, the specific state is set to a normal state (for example, during normal CZ or during CZ during ART which is not in the CZ medium high-accuracy zone), or in a special state (for example, CZ medium high-accuracy state). In the zone), when the specific state is the special state, the determination of the number of points is preferentially treated so that the predetermined giving condition can be more easily satisfied. Further, when the number of games in which the specific state is controlled to be the special state becomes the specific number of times (for example, "4" times), the predetermined grant condition is satisfied. Therefore, since the playability in the specific state can be made more diverse, the interest in the game in the specific state can be further improved.

The ninth invention is
When the specific state is the normal state, the specific state control means determines that a specific winning combination (for example, “push order bell B”) is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, When the condition is satisfied (for example, when the CZ medium-high probability chance is entered), a special notification control unit (for example, a main notification control unit that controls to notify a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation related to the specific combination) Further includes a normal medium CZ processing by the CPU 93),
The symbol variation stop control means, when the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, when a stop operation is performed in the advantageous stop operation procedure, a specific symbol When a combination of (for example, a combination of the symbols of "8-sheet combination 2") is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, and the stop operation is performed by a stop operation procedure different from the advantageous stop operation procedure, , Without stopping and displaying the combination of the specific symbols on the symbol display means,
In the special state determination means, the special notification control means notifies a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation related to the specific winning combination, and the symbol variation stop control means combines the specific symbols with the symbol display means. The game machine according to the above, wherein the special state is determined to be the special state based on the stop display.

Further, in the ninth invention, a specific combination (for example, “push order bell B”) is determined as an internal winning combination, and is specified when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the CZ middle/high probability chance is entered). When a part of the advantageous stop operation procedure related to the combination (for example, the stop operation sequence of the first stop operation) is notified and the stop operation can be performed in the advantageous stop operation procedure, the specific state is set to be special. The state is configured to be decided. That is, in the specific state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied and the stop operation sequence can be correctly answered, the specific state shifts to a more advantageous special state. Therefore, the degree of advantage of the specific state can be changed according to the situation of the game operation (for example, stop operation) by the player, so that the interest of the game in the specific state can be further improved.

[Game Machine According to Tenth Invention]
In recent years, in a special game state (eg, BB game state) advantageous to the player, an advantageous state advantageous to the player (eg, “JAC Don”) has been internally won based on the internal winning of a specific internal winning combination (eg, “JAC Don”). , AT) is known (for example, Prior Art Document 3: JP 2010-167197 A).

By the way, in the gaming machine shown in the prior art document 3, since the winning probability of a specific internal winning combination is a certain probability in the special gaming state, a device for further increasing the expectation regarding the giving of the advantageous state is required. Was there.

A tenth aspect of the present invention aims to provide a gaming machine capable of further increasing the sense of expectation regarding the granting of other benefits in the special gaming state.

The tenth invention is
Symbol display means (for example, reels 3L, 3C, 3R and display window 4) for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination (for example, an internal lottery process by the main CPU 93),
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol fluctuation start control means (for example, reel rotation start processing by the main CPU 93) for starting variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means,
When the player performs a stop operation, a symbol fluctuation stop control means (for example, by the main CPU 93) that stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determination means. Reel stop control processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and a profit giving means (for example, a medal payout by the main CPU 93) which gives a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. Processing),
The symbol fluctuation stop control means stops the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means, and the symbol combination relating to the special combination (for example, BB) (for example, the symbol combination of “BB”) is stopped on the symbol display means. Special game state control means (for example, bonus operation check processing by the main CPU 93) for controlling to a special game state (for example, BB game state) advantageous to the player based on the display.
And a privilege giving means (for example, a game start ART related process by the main CPU 93) for giving another privilege (for example, ART shift) different from the special game state,
The special game state control means,
In the special game state, the first specific game state is displayed based on the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination “JACIN1”) related to the first specific winning combination (for example, JACIN1) being stopped and displayed on the symbol display means. (For example, RB1 game state), when the ending condition of the first specific game state is satisfied, first specific game state control means (for example, the main CPU93 end bonus) to end the first specific game state Check processing and bonus operation check processing),
In the special game state, based on the symbol display (for example, a combination of symbols "JACIN2") related to the second specific winning combination (for example, JACIN2) being stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, the second specific game state (For example, RB2 game state), and when the ending condition of the second specific game state is satisfied, second specific game state control means (for example, main CPU 93 end bonus) to end the second specific game state Check processing and bonus operation check processing),
In the special game state, when the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied, the special game state is ended, and in the first specific game state, when the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied, the special A special game that ends the game state and the first specific game state, and ends the special game state and the second specific game state when the ending condition of the special game state is satisfied in the second specific game state. A state end control means (for example, a bonus end check process by the main CPU 93),
When the internal winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, the internal winning combination carried over until the combination of symbols relating to the first specific winning combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol displaying means. And
When the internal winning combination is determined by the internal winning combination determining means, the second specific winning combination is carried over until the symbol combination related to the second specific winning combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol displaying means. And
The internal winning combination determining means is
In the special game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, if the first specific combination or the second specific combination is not carried over as an internal winning combination, the first specific combination is It is possible to determine an internal winning combination with a probability of 1, and it is possible to determine the second specific winning combination as an internal winning combination with a second probability lower than the first probability.
In the second specific game state, it is possible to determine a predetermined winning combination (for example, "7 matching Lip A" and "7 matching Lip B") as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than in the first specific gaming status.
The privilege granting means is a gaming machine characterized in that, when the predetermined winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, it determines to grant the other privilege.

In the tenth invention, in the special game state (for example, BB game state), the first specific game state (for example, RB1 game state) and the second specific game state (for example, RB2 game state), the first specific combination (for example, , JACIN1) and the second specific winning combination (for example, JACIN2) are not carried over, it is possible to determine the first specific winning combination or the second specific winning combination as an internal winning combination, and the second specific gaming state. In, in the case of internally winning a predetermined combination (for example, “7 sets of rep A” and “7 sets of rep B”) that is determined as an internal winning combination with a higher probability than the first specific game state, other benefits (eg, , ART transfer) is determined. Therefore, in any of the special game states, it is possible to expect a transition to the second specific game state in which there is a high probability that a predetermined winning combination will be determined. You can increase your expectations.

The tenth invention is
An effect execution means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 11) for executing an effect is provided,
The effect execution means,
In the special game state, the first specific game state, and the second specific game state, when the second specific combination is determined as an internal winning combination, a specific effect is executed,
In the first specific game state and the second specific game state, the special game state end control means ends the special game state and the first specific game state, or the special game state and the second specific game state. The game machine described above is characterized in that the specific effect is not executed when is scheduled.

In addition, in the tenth invention, when the second specific combination is determined as the internal winning combination, it is notified that the specific effect is executed and the degree of expectation regarding the granting of another privilege is increased. Even if the two specific winning combinations are determined as the internal winning combination, if the special gaming state ends without shifting to the second specific gaming state, the specific effect is not executed. Therefore, by executing the specific effect, it is possible to increase the expectation regarding the granting of other benefits in the special game state, but it is possible to prevent the player from being confused.

Although the present invention has been described above using the present embodiment (including modified examples), the present invention is not limited to this. That is, the specific configuration of each means included in the present invention is not limited to the example adopted in the present embodiment described above, and various modifications can be made without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

For example, in the present embodiment, the reels 3L, 3C, 3R and the display window 4 are used as the symbol display means, but a liquid crystal display device may be used instead of or together with the reels. That is, the image of the pattern displayed on the liquid crystal display device may be variably displayed. Further, the display window 4 is configured as a plurality of display windows 4L, 4C, 4R corresponding to the reels 3L, 3C, 3R, and the display windows 4L, 4C, 4R are arranged on the peripheral surfaces of the reels 3L, 3C, 3R. You may make it display a part of the symbol.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, as the internal winning combination determining means, the main CPU 93 acquires the random number value generated by the random number generator 98 and performs the internal lottery process and the notification number lottery process. Alternatively, or in addition to this, a random number generation circuit (not shown) built in the main CPU 93 may be used to acquire the random number value.

Further, for example, in the present embodiment, a start switch 79 that detects an operation to the start lever 23 is adopted as a start operation detection unit that detects a start operation of the player, and a stop operation that detects a stop operation of the player. As the detection means, the stop switch substrate 80 that detects the operation of the stop buttons 19L, 19C, 19R is adopted, but a touch panel switch may be used instead of or in addition to this.

Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 93 or the sub CPU 102 shown in the present embodiment may be appropriately changed in their management modes without departing from the spirit of the present invention. You can For example, various counters and various timers managed by “addition” may be managed by “subtraction”, and in this case, the determination as to whether or not “to or more” is “to or less”. It is to be read as a determination as to whether or not the above, and a determination as to whether or not "exceeds" is read as a determination as to whether or not "less than". Further, for example, various counters and various timers managed by “subtraction” may be managed by “addition”, and in this case, the determination as to whether or not “up to” is “˜ The above is to be read as a determination of whether it is "greater than or equal to" and the determination of whether it is "less than" is to be read as a determination of whether "exceeds".

Further, for example, various data such as various counters, various flags, and various timers managed by the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment are stored in the sub CPU 102 without departing from the scope of the present invention. The data may be managed by the control, and various data managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 without departing from the scope of the present invention.

Further, for example, various game states and various performance states managed by the control of the main CPU 93 shown in the present embodiment are managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 without departing from the spirit of the present invention. The states of various effect stages and the like managed by the control of the sub CPU 102 may be managed by the control of the main CPU 93 without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

It should be noted that all the inventions described in the present embodiment can be applied to all gaming machines such as pachinko machines, game machines, slot machines and the like without departing from the spirit of the invention.

1 Pachi-slot machine 3L, 3C, 3R Reel 4 Display window (design display area)
23 Start Lever 19L, 19C, 19R Stop Button 91 Main Control Circuit 101 Sub Control Circuit 93 Main CPU
95 Main RAM
102 sub CPU
103 sub RAM

Claims (2)

A symbol display means for variably displaying a plurality of symbols in a plurality of columns,
An internal winning combination determining means for determining an internal winning combination;
When a start operation is performed by the player, a symbol variation start control means for starting variable display of symbols by the symbol display means,
When a stop operation is performed by the player, based on the internal winning combination determined by the internal winning combination determining means, a symbol fluctuation stop control means for stopping the variable display of the symbols by the symbol displaying means,
By the symbol fluctuation stop control means, the variable display of the symbols by the symbol display means is stopped, and a profit giving means for giving a profit according to the combination of the symbols stopped and displayed on the symbol display means,
Advantageous state control means for controlling an advantageous state in which a procedure of a stop operation advantageous to the player is notified,
A specific state control means for controlling a specific state different from the advantageous state,
The advantageous state control means,
Advantageous state management information setting means for setting advantageous state management information for managing the advantageous state based on a predetermined setting condition in the advantageous state,
When a notification termination condition associated with the set advantageous state management information is satisfied, an advantageous state termination control means for terminating the advantageous state is included,
The specific state control means,
It is possible to control to the specific state at least during a predetermined number of games,
Point number determining means for determining the number of points to be given for each game in the specific state,
A point number storage unit that cumulatively stores the number of points determined by the point number determination unit;
Advantageous state management information temporary giving means for deciding whether or not to temporarily give the advantageous state management information for each game in the specific state,
Advantageous state management information provisional storage means for storing the advantageous state management information provisionally provided by the advantageous state management information provisional provision means,
In the specific state, when the number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means exceeds a predetermined value, the advantageous-state management information stored in the advantageous-state management information temporary storage means is changed to the advantageous-state management. Advantageous state management information book giving means for giving books so that they can be set by the information setting means,
The specific state, a normal state, or a special state determining means for determining whether to a special state,
A special state control means for controlling the specific state to the special state when the special state determining means determines that the specific state is the special state, and
The point number determination means,
When the specific state is the special state, the number of points is determined so that the number of points is relatively larger than when the specific state is the normal state,
The number of points stored by the number-of-points storage means is equal to or more than the predetermined value when the number of games in which the particular state is controlled to the particular state by the special state control means is a certain number of times. A game machine characterized by determining the number. The specific state control means, when the specific state is the normal state, when the specific winning combination is determined as an internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means and a predetermined condition is satisfied, the specific winning combination Further including a special notification control means for controlling so that a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation according to
The symbol variation stop control means, when the specific winning combination is determined as the internal winning combination by the internal winning combination determining means, when a stop operation is performed in the advantageous stop operation procedure, a specific symbol The combination of the symbols is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means, and when the stop operation is performed by a stop operation procedure different from the advantageous stop operation procedure, the specific symbol combination is stopped on the symbol display means. Without displaying
In the special state determination means, the special notification control means notifies a part of the procedure of the advantageous stop operation related to the specific winning combination, and the symbol variation stop control means combines the specific symbols with the symbol display means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific state is determined to be the special state based on being stopped and displayed.

Images